updated for version 7.0044

Filelist

@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ SRC_ALL1 =	\
 		src/gui.h \
 		src/gui_beval.c \
 		src/gui_beval.h \
+		src/hashtable.c \
 		src/keymap.h \
 		src/macros.h \
 		src/main.c \
@@ -92,6 +93,7 @@ SRC_ALL2 =	\
 		src/proto/getchar.pro \
 		src/proto/gui.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_beval.pro \
+		src/proto/hashtable.pro \
 		src/proto/main.pro \
 		src/proto/mark.pro \
 		src/proto/mbyte.pro \
@@ -153,12 +155,19 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 		src/gui_kde_x11.cc \
 		src/kvim_iface.h \
 		src/gui_motif.c \
+		src/gui_xmdlg.c \
+		src/gui_xmebw.c \
+		src/gui_xmebw.h \
+		src/gui_xmebwp.h \
 		src/gui_x11.c \
+		src/gui_x11_pm.h \
 		src/hangulin.c \
 		src/if_xcmdsrv.c \
 		src/integration.c \
 		src/integration.h \
 		src/link.sh \
+		src/installman.sh \
+		src/installml.sh \
 		src/mkinstalldirs \
 		src/os_unix.c \
 		src/os_unix.h \
@@ -173,6 +182,7 @@ SRC_UNIX =	\
 		src/proto/gui_kde.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_kde_x11.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_motif.pro \
+		src/proto/gui_xmdlg.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_x11.pro \
 		src/proto/hangulin.pro \
 		src/proto/if_xcmdsrv.pro \
@@ -334,17 +344,12 @@ SRC_AMI =	\
 		README_amisrc.txt.info \
 		src.info \
 		src/INSTALLami.txt \
-		src/Make_agui.mak \
-		src/Make_aros.mak \
 		src/Make_dice.mak \
 		src/Make_manx.mak \
 		src/Make_morph.mak \
 		src/Make_sas.mak \
-		src/gui_amiga.c \
-		src/gui_amiga.h \
 		src/os_amiga.c \
 		src/os_amiga.h \
-		src/proto/gui_amiga.pro \
 		src/proto/os_amiga.pro \
 		src/testdir/Make_amiga.mak \
 		src/testdir/amiga.vim \
@@ -414,8 +419,6 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		README_os390.txt \
 		src/Make_mint.mak \
 		src/Make_ro.mak \
-		src/gui_beos.cc \
-		src/gui_beos.h \
 		src/gui_riscos.c \
 		src/gui_riscos.h \
 		src/if_sniff.c \
@@ -428,9 +431,7 @@ SRC_EXTRA =	\
 		src/os_mint.h \
 		src/os_riscos.c \
 		src/os_riscos.h \
-		src/proto/gui_beos.pro \
 		src/proto/gui_riscos.pro \
-		src/proto/os_beos.pro \
 		src/proto/os_riscos.pro \
 		src/os_vms_fix.com \
 		src/toolbar.phi \
@@ -659,6 +660,7 @@ EXTRA =		\
 # generic language files
 LANG_GEN = \
 		README_lang.txt \
+		runtime/doc/*-it.1 \
 		runtime/lang/README.txt \
 		runtime/lang/menu_*.vim \
 		runtime/keymap/README.txt \

pixmaps/tb_print.xpm

@@ -5,19 +5,19 @@ static char * tb_print_xpm[] = {
 /* colors */
 " 	s none	m none	c none",
 ".	s iconColor1	m black	c #000000",
-"X	s iconColor2	m none 	c #FFFFFF",
-"o	s iconGray2	m none 	c #bdbdbd",
+"X	s iconColor2	m none	c #FFFFFF",
+"o	s iconGray2	m none	c #bdbdbd",
 "O	s iconGray5	m black	c #737373",
 "+	s bottomShadowColor	m black	c #5D6069",
 "@	c #FF1144",
 /* pixels */
 "   .......        ",
 "   .XXXXX..       ",
-"   .X...X.X.      ",
+"   .XXXXX.X.      ",
 "   .XXXXX....     ",
-"   .X...XXXX.O    ",
-"   .XXXXXXXX.O    ",
-"   .X.....XX.O    ",
+"   .XXXXXXXX.     ",
+"   .XXXXXXXX.     ",
+"  ..XXXXXXXX..    ",
 "   .XXXXXXXX.O    ",
 "................  ",
 ".XXXXXXXXXXXXXO.  ",

runtime/compiler/checkstyle.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	Checkstyle
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/checkstyle.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/checkstyle.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/javac.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:     javac
-" Maintainer:   Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/javac.vim
-" Last Change:  2004 Apr 15
+" Maintainer:   Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/javac.vim
+" Last Change:  2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/php.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	PHP
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/php.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Sep 05
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/php.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/ruby.vim

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 "
 " Contributors:
 "   Hugh Sasse <hgs@dmu.ac.uk>
-"   Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
+"   Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
 "
 " Todo:
 "   match error type %m

runtime/compiler/se.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	se (SmartEiffel Compiler)
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/se.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 May 16
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/se.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/tcl.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	tcl
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/tcl.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/tcl.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/compiler/tidy.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	HTML Tidy
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/tidy.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/tidy.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 " NOTE: set 'tidy_compiler_040800' if you are using the 4th August 2000 release
 "       of HTML Tidy.

runtime/compiler/xmllint.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 " Vim compiler file
 " Compiler:	xmllint
-" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@mugca.its.monash.edu.au>
-" URL:		http://mugca.its.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/xmllint.vim
-" Last Change:	2004 Mar 27
+" Maintainer:	Doug Kearns <djkea2@gus.gscit.monash.edu.au>
+" URL:		http://gus.gscit.monash.edu.au/~djkea2/vim/compiler/xmllint.vim
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 27
 
 if exists("current_compiler")
   finish

runtime/doc/Makefile

@@ -36,6 +36,7 @@ DOCS = \
 	help.txt \
 	howto.txt \
 	if_cscop.txt \
+	if_mzsch.txt \
 	if_ole.txt \
 	if_perl.txt \
 	if_pyth.txt \
@@ -156,6 +157,7 @@ HTMLS = \
 	help.html \
 	howto.html \
 	if_cscop.html \
+	if_mzsch.html \
 	if_ole.html \
 	if_perl.html \
 	if_pyth.html \

runtime/doc/autocmd.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 17
+*autocmd.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -14,9 +14,10 @@ For a basic explanation, see section |40.3| in the user manual.
 4.  Listing autocommands	|autocmd-list|
 5.  Events			|autocmd-events|
 6.  Patterns			|autocmd-patterns|
-7.  Groups			|autocmd-groups|
-8.  Executing autocommands	|autocmd-execute|
-9.  Using autocommands		|autocmd-use|
+7.  Buffer-local autocommands	|autocmd-buflocal|
+8.  Groups			|autocmd-groups|
+9.  Executing autocommands	|autocmd-execute|
+10. Using autocommands		|autocmd-use|
 
 {Vi does not have any of these commands}
 {only when the |+autocmd| feature has not been disabled at compile time}
@@ -62,6 +63,9 @@ Note: The ":autocmd" command cannot be followed by another command, since any
 			order in which they were given.  See |autocmd-nested|
 			for [nested].
 
+The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> defines a buffer-local autocommand.
+See |autocmd-buflocal|.
+
 Note that special characters (e.g., "%", "<cword>") in the ":autocmd"
 arguments are not expanded when the autocommand is defined.  These will be
 expanded when the Event is recognized, and the {cmd} is executed.  The only
@@ -148,6 +152,9 @@ If you provide the [group] argument, Vim lists only the autocommands for
 [group]; otherwise, Vim lists the autocommands for ALL groups.  Note that this
 argument behavior differs from that for defining and removing autocommands.
 
+In order to list buffer-local autocommands, use a pattern in the form <buffer>
+or <buffer=N>.  See |autocmd-buflocal|.
+
 ==============================================================================
 5. Events					*autocmd-events* *E215* *E216*
 
@@ -230,8 +237,10 @@ BufWritePost			After writing the whole buffer to a file
 							*BufWriteCmd*
 BufWriteCmd			Before writing the whole buffer to a file.
 				Should do the writing of the file and reset
-				'modified' if successful.  The buffer contents
-				should not be changed.  |Cmd-event|
+				'modified' if successful, unless '+' is in
+				'cpo' and writing to another file |cpo-+|.
+				The buffer contents should not be changed.
+				|Cmd-event|
 							*FileWritePre*
 FileWritePre			Before writing to a file, when not writing the
 				whole buffer.  Use the '[ and '] marks for the
@@ -551,6 +560,10 @@ two ways:
    both short file name (as you typed it) and the full file name (after
    expanding it to a full path and resolving symbolic links).
 
+The special pattern <buffer> or <buffer=N> is used for buffer-local
+autocommands |autocmd-buflocal|.  This pattern is not matched against the name
+of a buffer.
+
 Examples: >
 	:autocmd BufRead *.txt		set et
 Set the 'et' option for all text files. >
@@ -606,7 +619,7 @@ Note that for all systems the '/' character is used for path separator (even
 MS-DOS and OS/2).  This was done because the backslash is difficult to use
 in a pattern and to make the autocommands portable across different systems.
 
-
+							*autocmd-changes*
 Matching with the pattern is done when an event is triggered.  Changing the
 buffer name in one of the autocommands, or even deleting the buffer, does not
 change which autocommands will be executed.  Example: >
@@ -619,8 +632,62 @@ the current buffer instead.  Vim doesn't take into account that "*.foo"
 doesn't match with that buffer name.  It matches "*.foo" with the name of the
 buffer at the moment the event was triggered.
 
+However, buffer-local autocommands will not be executed for a buffer that has
+been wiped out with |:bwipe|.  After deleting the buffer with |:bdel| the
+buffer actually still exists (it becomes unlisted), thus the autocommands are
+still executed.
+
 ==============================================================================
-7. Groups						*autocmd-groups*
+7. Buffer-local autocommands  	*autocmd-buflocal* *autocmd-buffer-local*
+                                    	*<buffer=N>* *<buffer=abuf>* *E680*
+
+Buffer-local autocommands are attached to a specific buffer.  They are useful
+if the buffer does not have a name and when the name does not match a specific
+pattern.  But it also means they must be explicitly added to each buffer.
+
+Instead of a pattern buffer-local autocommands use one of these forms:
+	<buffer>	current buffer
+	<buffer=99>	buffer number 99
+	<buffer=abuf>	using <abuf> (only when executing autocommands)
+			|<abuf>|
+
+Examples: >
+    :au CursorHold <buffer>  echo 'hold'
+    :au CursorHold <buffer=33>  echo 'hold'
+    :au CursorHold <buffer=abuf>  echo 'hold'
+
+All the commands for autocommands also work with buffer-local autocommands,
+simply use the special string instead of the pattern.  Examples: >
+    :au! * <buffer>     	     " remove buffer-local autotommands for
+                                     " current buffer
+    :au! * <buffer=33>  	     " remove buffer-local autotommands for
+    				     " buffer #33
+    :dobuf :au! CursorHold <buffer>  " remove autocmd for given event for all
+    				     " buffers
+    :au * <buffer>       	     " list buffer-local autocommands for
+    				     " current buffer
+
+Note that when an autocommand is defined for the current buffer, it is stored
+with the buffer number.  Thus it uses the form "<buffer=12>", where 12 is the
+number of the current buffer.  You will see this when listing autocommands,
+for example.
+
+To test for presence of buffer-local autocommands use the |exists()| function
+as follows: >
+    :if exists("#CursorHold#<buffer=12>") | ... | endif
+    :if exists("#CursorHold#<buffer>") | ... | endif    " for current buffer
+
+When a buffer is wiped out its buffer-local autocommands are also gone, of
+course.  Note that when deleting a buffer, e.g., with ":bdel", it is only
+unlisted, the autocommands are still present.  In order to see the removal of
+buffer-local autocommands: >
+    :set verbose=6
+
+It is not possible to define buffer-local autocommands for a non-existent
+buffer.
+
+==============================================================================
+8. Groups						*autocmd-groups*
 
 Autocommands can be put together in a group.  This is useful for removing or
 executing a group of autocommands.  For example, all the autocommands for
@@ -668,7 +735,7 @@ This prevents having the autocommands defined twice (e.g., after sourcing the
 .vimrc file again).
 
 ==============================================================================
-8. Executing autocommands				*autocmd-execute*
+9. Executing autocommands				*autocmd-execute*
 
 Vim can also execute Autocommands non-automatically.  This is useful if you
 have changed autocommands, or when Vim has executed the wrong autocommands
@@ -711,7 +778,7 @@ option will not cause any commands to be executed.
 			options, change highlighting, and things like that.
 
 ==============================================================================
-9. Using autocommands					*autocmd-use*
+10. Using autocommands					*autocmd-use*
 
 For WRITING FILES there are four possible sets of events.  Vim uses only one
 of these sets for a write command:
@@ -924,4 +991,5 @@ The |v:cmdbang| variable is one when "!" was used, zero otherwise.
 
 See the $VIMRUNTIME/plugin/netrw.vim for examples.
 
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/change.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 16
+*change.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -13,6 +13,10 @@ commands with the "." command.
 2. Delete and insert		|delete-insert|
 3. Simple changes		|simple-change|		*changing*
 4. Complex changes		|complex-change|
+   4.1 Filter commands		   |filter|
+   4.2 Substitute		   |:substitute|
+   4.3 Search and replace	   |search-replace|
+   4.4 Changing tabs		   |change-tabs|
 5. Copying and moving text	|copy-move|
 6. Formatting text		|formatting|
 
@@ -346,29 +350,35 @@ CTRL-X			Subtract [count] from the number or alphabetic
 The CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands work for (signed) decimal numbers, unsigned
 octal and hexadecimal numbers and alphabetic characters.  This depends on the
 'nrformats' option.
-- When 'nrformats' includes "alpha", Vim will change the alphabetic character
-  under or after the cursor.  This is useful to make lists with an alphabetic
-  index.
+- When 'nrformats' includes "octal", Vim considers numbers starting with a '0'
+  to be octal, unless the number includes a '8' or '9'.  Other numbers are
+  decimal and may have a preceding minus sign.
+  If the cursor is on a number, the commands apply to that number; otherwise
+  Vim uses the number to the right of the cursor.
 - When 'nrformats' includes "hex", Vim assumes numbers starting with '0x' or
   '0X' are hexadecimal.  The case of the rightmost letter in the number
   determines the case of the resulting hexadecimal number.  If there is no
   letter in the current number, Vim uses the previously detected case.
-- When 'nrformats' includes "octal", Vim considers numbers starting with a '0'
-  to be octal.  Other numbers are decimal and may have a preceding minus sign.
-  If the cursor is on a number, the commands apply to that number; otherwise
-  Vim uses the number to the right of the cursor.
+- When 'nrformats' includes "alpha", Vim will change the alphabetic character
+  under or after the cursor.  This is useful to make lists with an alphabetic
+  index.
 
 For numbers with leading zeros (including all octal and hexadecimal numbers),
 Vim preserves the number of characters in the number when possible.  CTRL-A on
-"0077" results in "0100", CTRL-X on "0x100" results in "0x0ff".  Note that
-when 'nrformats' includes "octal", decimal numbers with leading zeros are
-impossible because they are indistinguishable from octal numbers.
+"0077" results in "0100", CTRL-X on "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
+There is one exception: When a number that starts with a zero is found not to
+be octal (it contains a '8' or '9'), but 'nrformats' does include "octal",
+leading zeros are removed to avoid that the result may be recognized as an
+octal number.
+
+Note that when 'nrformats' includes "octal", decimal numbers with leading
+zeros cause mistakes, because they can be confused with octal numbers.
 
 The CTRL-A command is very useful in a macro.  Example: Use the following
 steps to make a numbered list.
 
 1. Create the first list entry, make sure it starts with a number.
-2. qa	     - start recording into buffer 'a'
+2. qa	     - start recording into register 'a'
 3. Y	     - yank the entry
 4. p	     - put a copy of the entry below the first one
 5. CTRL-A    - increment the number
@@ -449,7 +459,19 @@ For example: >
 ==============================================================================
 4. Complex changes					*complex-change*
 
-							*!* *filter*
+4.1 Filter commands 					*filter*
+
+A filter is a program that accepts text at standard input, changes it in some
+way, and sends it to standard output.  You can use the commands below to send
+some text through a filter, so that it is replace by the filter output.
+Examples of filters are "sort", which sorts lines alphabetically, and
+"indent", which formats C program files (you need a version of indent that
+works like a filter; not all versions do).  The 'shell' option specifies the
+shell Vim uses to execute the filter command (See also the 'shelltype'
+option).  You can repeat filter commands with ".".  Vim does not recognize a
+comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command.
+
+							*!*
 !{motion}{filter}	Filter {motion} text lines through the external
 			program {filter}.
 
@@ -492,17 +514,9 @@ For example: >
 {Visual}=		Filter the highlighted lines like with ={motion}.
 			{not in Vi}
 
-A filter is a program that accepts text at standard input, changes it in some
-way, and sends it to standard output.  You can use the commands above to send
-some text through a filter.  Examples of filters are "sort", which sorts lines
-alphabetically, and "indent", which formats C program files (you need a
-version of indent that works like a filter; not all versions do).  The 'shell'
-option specifies the shell Vim uses to execute the filter command (See also
-the 'shelltype' option).  You can repeat filter commands with ".".  Vim does
-not recognize a comment (starting with '"') after the ":!" command.
 
-
-						*:s* *:su* *:substitute*
+4.2 Substitute						*:substitute*
+							*:s* *:su*
 :[range]s[ubstitute]/{pattern}/{string}/[&][c][e][g][p][r][i][I] [count]
 			For each line in [range] replace a match of {pattern}
 			with {string}.
@@ -741,7 +755,9 @@ Example: >
 This replaces an end-of-line with a new line containing the value of $HOME.
 
 
-						*:pro* *:promptfind*
+4.3 Search and replace					*search-replace*
+
+							*:pro* *:promptfind*
 :promptf[ind] [string]
 			Put up a Search dialog.  When [string] is given, it is
 			used as the initial search string.
@@ -753,6 +769,8 @@ This replaces an end-of-line with a new line containing the value of $HOME.
 			given, it is used as the initial search string.
 			{only for Win32, Motif and GTK GUI}
 
+
+4.4 Changing tabs					*change-tabs*
 							*:ret* *:retab*
 :[range]ret[ab][!] [new_tabstop]
 			Replace all sequences of white-space containing a
@@ -851,8 +869,10 @@ inside of strings can change!  Also see 'softtabstop' option. >
 							*<MiddleMouse>*
 ["x]<MiddleMouse>	Put the text from a register before the cursor [count]
 			times.  Uses the "* register, unless another is
-			specified.  Using the mouse only works when 'mouse'
-			contains 'n' or 'a'.
+			specified.  
+			Leaves the cursor at the end of the new text.
+			Using the mouse only works when 'mouse' contains 'n'
+			or 'a'.
 			{not in Vi}
 			If you have a scrollwheel and often accidentally paste
 			text, you can use these mappings to disable the
@@ -965,10 +985,11 @@ Vim fills this register with text deleted with the "d", "c", "s", "x" commands
 or copied with the yank "y" command, regardless of whether or not a specific
 register was used (e.g.  "xdd).  This is like the unnamed register is pointing
 to the last used register.  An exception is the '_' register: "_dd does not
-store the deleted text in any register.  Vim uses the contents of this
-register for any put command (p or P) which does not specify a register.
-Additionally you can access it with the name '"'.  This means you have to type
-two double quotes.  Writing to the "" register writes to register "0.
+store the deleted text in any register.
+Vim uses the contents of the unnamed register for any put command (p or P)
+which does not specify a register.  Additionally you can access it with the
+name '"'.  This means you have to type two double quotes.  Writing to the ""
+register writes to register "0.
 {Vi: register contents are lost when changing files, no '"'}
 
 2. Numbered registers "0 to "9		*quote_number* *quote0*	*quote1*
@@ -979,9 +1000,9 @@ unless the command specified another register with ["x].
    Numbered register 1 contains the text deleted by the most recent delete or
 change command, unless the command specified another register or the text is
 less than one line (the small delete register is used then).  An exception is
-made for these commands: |%|, |(|, |)|, |`|, |/|, |?|, |n|, |N|, |{| and |}|.
-Register "1 is always used then (this is Vi compatible).  The "- register is
-used as well if the delete is within a line.
+made for the delete operator with these movement commands: |%|, |(|, |)|, |`|,
+|/|, |?|, |n|, |N|, |{| and |}|.  Register "1 is always used then (this is Vi
+compatible).  The "- register is used as well if the delete is within a line.
    With each successive deletion or change, Vim shifts the previous contents
 of register 1 into register 2, 2 into 3, and so forth, losing the previous
 contents of register 9.
@@ -1312,10 +1333,12 @@ a	Automatic formatting of paragraphs.  Every time text is inserted or
 	deleted the paragraph will be reformatted.  See |auto-format|.
 	When the 'c' flag is present this only happens for recognized
 	comments.
-n	When formatting text, recognize numbered lists.  The indent of the
-	text after the number is used for the next line.  The number may
-	optionally be followed by '.', ':', ')', ']' or '}'.  Note that
-	'autoindent' must be set too.  Doesn't work well together with "2".
+n	When formatting text, recognize numbered lists.  This actually uses
+	the 'formatlistpat' option, thus any kind of list can be used.  The
+	indent of the text after the number is used for the next line.  The
+	default is to find a number, optionally be followed by '.', ':', ')',
+	']' or '}'.  Note that 'autoindent' must be set too.  Doesn't work
+	well together with "2".
 	Example: >
 		1. the first item
 		   wraps

runtime/doc/cmdline.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 14
+*cmdline.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -153,6 +153,10 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#:-=.}					*c_CTRL-R* *c_<C-R>*
 			'='	the expression register: you are prompted to
 				enter an expression (see |expression|)
 		See |registers| about registers.  {not in Vi}
+		Implementation detail: When using the |expression| register
+		and invoking setcmdpos(), this sets the position before
+		inserting the resulting string.  Use CTRL-R CTRL-R to set the
+		position afterwards.
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-F				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-F* *c_<C-R>_<C-F>*
 CTRL-R CTRL-P				*c_CTRL-R_CTRL-P* *c_<C-R>_<C-P>*
@@ -355,6 +359,8 @@ CTRL-D		List names that match the pattern in front of the cursor.
 		When showing file names, directories are highlighted (see
 		'highlight' option).  Names where 'suffixes' matches are moved
 		to the end.
+		The 'wildoptions' option can be set to "tagfile" to list the
+		file of matching tags.
 					*c_CTRL-I* *c_wildchar* *c_<Tab>*
 'wildchar' option
 		A match is done on the pattern in front of the cursor.  The

runtime/doc/editing.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Aug 29
+*editing.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -8,21 +8,22 @@ Editing files						*edit-files*
 
 1.  Introduction		|edit-intro|
 2.  Editing a file		|edit-a-file|
-3.  Dialogs			|edit-dialogs|
-4.  The current directory	|current-directory|
-5.  The argument list		|argument-list|
-6.  Writing			|writing|
-7.  Writing and quitting	|write-quit|
+3.  The argument list		|argument-list|
+4.  Writing			|writing|
+5.  Writing and quitting	|write-quit|
+6.  Dialogs			|edit-dialogs|
+7.  The current directory	|current-directory|
 8.  Editing binary files	|edit-binary|
 9.  Encryption			|encryption|
 10. Timestamps			|timestamps|
+11. File Searching		|file-searching|
 
 ==============================================================================
 1. Introduction						*edit-intro*
 
 Editing a file with Vim means:
 
-1. reading the file into the internal buffer
+1. reading the file into a buffer
 2. changing the buffer with editor commands
 3. writing the buffer into a file
 
@@ -30,12 +31,13 @@ Editing a file with Vim means:
 As long as you don't write the buffer, the original file remains unchanged.
 If you start editing a file (read a file into the buffer), the file name is
 remembered as the "current file name".  This is also known as the name of the
-current buffer.
+current buffer.  It can be used with "%" on the command line |:_%|.
 
 							*alternate-file*
 If there already was a current file name, then that one becomes the alternate
-file name.  It can later be used with "#" on the command line |:_#|.  However,
-the alternate file name is not changed when |:keepalt| is used.
+file name.  It can be used with "#" on the command line |:_#| and you can use
+the |CTRL-^| command to toggle between the current and the alternate file.
+However, the alternate file name is not changed when |:keepalt| is used.
 
 							*:keepalt* *:keepa*
 :keepalt {cmd}		Execute {cmd} while keeping the current alternate file
@@ -43,18 +45,19 @@ the alternate file name is not changed when |:keepalt| is used.
 			with a function) may still set the alternate file
 			name.  {not in Vi}
 
-All file names are remembered in the file list.  When you enter a file name,
-for editing (e.g., with ":e filename") or writing (e.g., with (:w file name"),
-the file name is added to the list.  You can use this list to remember which
-files you edited and to quickly switch from one file to another with the
-CTRL-^ command (e.g., to copy text).  First type the number of the file and
-then hit CTRL-^.  {Vi: only one alternate file name}
+All file names are remembered in the buffer list.  When you enter a file name,
+for editing (e.g., with ":e filename") or writing (e.g., with ":w file name"),
+the file name is added to the list.  You can use the buffer list to remember
+which files you edited and to quickly switch from one file to another (e.g.,
+to copy text) with the |CTRL-^| command.  First type the number of the file
+and then hit CTRL-^.  {Vi: only one alternate file name is remembered}
+
 
 CTRL-G		or				*CTRL-G* *:f* *:fi* *:file*
 :f[ile]			Prints the current file name (as typed), the
 			cursor position (unless the 'ruler' option is set),
 			and the file status (readonly, modified, read errors,
-			new file)).  See the 'shortmess' option about how tho
+			new file).  See the 'shortmess' option about how tho
 			make this message shorter.  {Vi does not include
 			column number}
 
@@ -84,6 +87,9 @@ g CTRL-G		Prints the current position of the cursor in four
 							*:file_f*
 :f[ile][!] {name}	Sets the current file name to {name}.  The optional !
 			avoids truncating the message, as with |:file|.
+			If the buffer did have a name, that name becomes the
+			|alternate-file| name.  An unlisted buffer is created
+			to hold the old name.
 
 :0f[ile][!]		Remove the name of the current buffer.  The optional !
 			avoids truncating the message, as with |:file|.  {not
@@ -105,7 +111,7 @@ string, it is often displayed with HOME replaced with "~".  This was done to
 keep file names short.  When reading or writing files the full name is still
 used, the "~" is only used when displaying file names.  When replacing the
 file name would result in just "~", "~/" is used instead (to avoid confusion
-with 'backupext' set to "~").
+between options set to $HOME with 'backupext' set to "~").
 
 When writing the buffer, the default is to use the current file name.  Thus
 when you give the "ZZ" or ":wq" command, the original file will be
@@ -212,11 +218,10 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
 :e[dit] [++opt] [+cmd] #[count]
-			Edit the [count]th alternate file name (as shown by
-			:files).  This command does the same as
-			[count] CTRL-^.  But ":e #" doesn't work if the
-			alternate buffer doesn't have a file name, while
-			CTRL-^ still works then.
+			Edit the [count]th buffer (as shown by |:files|).
+			This command does the same as [count] CTRL-^.  But ":e
+			#" doesn't work if the alternate buffer doesn't have a
+			file name, while CTRL-^ still works then.
 			Also see |++opt| and |+cmd|.
 			{Vi: no ++opt}
 
@@ -255,20 +260,20 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 
 							*:vi* *:visual*
 :vi[sual][!] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]
-			When entered in Ex mode: Leave |Ex-mode|, go back to
+			When used in Ex mode: Leave |Ex-mode|, go back to
 			Normal mode.  Otherwise same as |:edit|.
 
 							*:vie* *:view*
 :vie[w] [++opt] [+cmd] file
-			When entered in Ex mode: Leave Ex mode, go back to
+			When used in Ex mode: Leave |Ex mode|, go back to
 			Normal mode.  Otherwise same as |:edit|, but set
 			'readonly' option for this buffer.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*CTRL-^* *CTRL-6*
-[count]CTRL-^		Edit [count]th alternate file (equivalent to ":e
-			#[count]").  Without count this gets you to the
-			previously edited file.  This is a quick way to toggle
-			between two (or more) files.
+CTRL-^			Edit the alternate file (equivalent to ":e #").
+			Mostly the alternate file is the previously edited
+			file.  This is a quick way to toggle between two
+			files.
 			If the 'autowrite' or 'autowriteall' option is on and
 			the buffer was changed, write it.
 			Mostly the ^ character is positioned on the 6 key,
@@ -276,6 +281,12 @@ If you want to keep the changed buffer without saving it, switch on the
 			But on some non-US keyboards CTRL-^ is produced in
 			another way.
 
+{count}CTRL-^		Edit [count]th file in the buffer list (equivalent to
+			":e #[count]").  This is a quick way to switch between
+			files.
+			See |CTRL-^| above for further details.
+			{not in Vi}
+
 [count]]f						*]f* *[f*
 [count][f		Same as "gf".  Deprecated.
 
@@ -332,11 +343,12 @@ current file name.
 Note for systems other than Unix and MS-DOS: When using a command that
 accepts a single file name (like ":edit file") spaces in the file name are
 allowed, but trailing spaces are ignored.  This is useful on systems that
-allow file names with embedded spaces (like the Amiga).  Example: The command
-":e   Long File Name " will edit the file "Long File Name".  When using a
-command that accepts more than one file name (like ":next file1 file2")
-embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.
+allow file names with embedded spaces (like MS-Windows and the Amiga).
+Example: The command ":e   Long File Name " will edit the file "Long File
+Name".  When using a command that accepts more than one file name (like ":next
+file1 file2") embedded spaces must be escaped with a backslash.
 
+							*wildcard*
 Wildcards in {file} are expanded.  Which wildcards are supported depends on
 the system.  These are the common ones:
 	*	matches anything, including nothing
@@ -348,7 +360,8 @@ as a wildcard when "[" is in the 'isfname' option.  A simple way to avoid this
 is to use "path\[[]abc]".  Then the file "path[abc]" literally.
 
 					*backtick-expansion* *`-expansion*
-On Unix you can also use backticks in the file name, for example: >
+On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks in the file name,
+for example: >
 	:e `find . -name ver\\*.c -print`
 The backslashes before the star are required to prevent "ver*.c" to be
 expanded by the shell before executing the find program.
@@ -357,12 +370,11 @@ backticks must be around the whole item.  It is not possible to have text
 directly before the first or just after the last backtick.
 
 							*`=*
-You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of
-an external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
-	:let foo='bar'
-	:e `=foo . ".c" `
-This will edit "bar.c".  The expression can contain just about anything, thus
-this can also be used to avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.
+You can have the backticks expanded as a Vim expression, instead of an
+external command, by using the syntax `={expr}` e.g.: >
+	:e `=tempname()`
+The expression can contain just about anything, thus this can also be used to
+avoid the special meaning of '"', '|', '%' and '#'.
 
 							*++opt* *[++opt]*
 The [++opt] argument can be used to force the value of 'fileformat' or
@@ -467,241 +479,17 @@ You can encrypt files that are written by setting the 'key' option.  This
 provides some security against others reading your files. |encryption|
 
 
-File Searching						*file-searching*
-
-{not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
-
-The file searching is currently used for the 'path', 'cdpath' and 'tags'
-options.  There are three different types of searching:
-
-1) Downward search:
-   Downward search uses the wildcards '*', '**' and possibly others
-   supported by your operating system. '*' and '**' are handled inside Vim, so
-   they work on all operating systems.
-
-   The usage of '*' is quite simple: It matches 0 or more characters.
-
-   '**' is more sophisticated:
-      - It ONLY matches directories.
-      - It matches up to 30  directories deep, so you can use it to search an
-	entire directory tree
-      - The maximum number of levels matched can be given by appending a number
-	to '**'.
-	Thus '/usr/**2' can match: >
-		/usr
-		/usr/include
-		/usr/include/sys
-		/usr/include/g++
-		/usr/lib
-		/usr/lib/X11
-		....
-<	It does NOT match '/usr/include/g++/std' as this would be three
-	levels.
-	The allowed number range is 0 ('**0' is removed) to 255.
-	If the given number is smaller than 0 it defaults to 30, if it's
-	bigger than 255 it defaults to 255.
-      - '**' can only be at the end of the path or be followed by a path
-	separator or by a number and a path separator.
-
-   You can combine '*' and '**' in any order: >
-	/usr/**/sys/*
-	/usr/*/sys/**
-	/usr/**2/sys/*
-
-2) Upward search:
-   Here you can give a directory and then search the directory tree upward for
-   a file. You could give stop-directories to limit the upward search. The
-   stop-directories are appended to the path (for the 'path' option) or to
-   the filename (for the 'tags' option) with a ';'. If you want several
-   stop-directories separate them with ';'. If you want no stop-directory
-   ("search upward till the root directory) just use ';'. >
-	/usr/include/sys;/usr
-<   will search in: >
-	   /usr/include/sys
-	   /usr/include
-	   /usr
-<
-   If you use a relative path the upward search is started in Vim's current
-   directory or in the directory of the current file (if the relative path
-   starts with './' and 'd' is not included in 'cpoptions').
-
-   If Vim's current path is /u/user_x/work/release and you do >
-	:set path=include;/u/user_x
-<  and then search for a file with |gf| the file is searched in: >
-	/u/user_x/work/release/include
-	/u/user_x/work/include
-	/u/user_x/include
-
-3) Combined up/downward search
-   If Vim's current path is /u/user_x/work/release and you do >
-	set path=**;/u/user_x
-<  and then search for a file with |gf| the file is searched in: >
-	/u/user_x/work/release/**
-	/u/user_x/work/**
-	/u/user_x/**
-<
-   BE CAREFUL! This might consume a lot of time, as the search of
-   '/u/user_x/**' includes '/u/user_x/work/**' and
-   '/u/user_x/work/release/**'.  So '/u/user_x/work/release/**' is searched
-   three and '/u/user_x/work/**' is searched two times.
-
-   In the above example you might want to set path to: >
-	:set path=**,/u/user_x/**
-<   This searches: >
-	/u/user_x/work/release/**
-	/u/user_x/**
-<   This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
-
 ==============================================================================
-3. Dialogs						*edit-dialogs*
-
-							*:confirm* *:conf*
-:conf[irm] {command}	Execute {command}, and use a dialog when an
-			operation has to be confirmed.  Can be used on the
-			":q", ":qa" and ":w" commands (the latter to over-ride
-			a read-only setting).
-
-Examples: >
-  :confirm w foo
-<	Will ask for confirmation when "foo" already exists. >
-  :confirm q
-<	Will ask for confirmation when there are changes. >
-  :confirm qa
-<	If any modified, unsaved buffers exist, you will be prompted to save
-	or abandon each one.  There are also choices to "save all" or "abandon
-	all".
-
-If you want to always use ":confirm", set the 'confirm' option.
-
-			*:browse* *:bro* *E338* *E614* *E615* *E616* *E578*
-:bro[wse] {command}	Open a file selection dialog for an argument to
-			{command}.  At present this works for |:e|, |:w|,
-			|:r|, |:saveas|, |:sp|, |:mkexrc|, |:mkvimrc| and
-			|:mksession|.
-			{only in Win32, Athena, Motif, GTK and Mac GUI}
-			When ":browse" is not possible you get an error
-			message.  If the |+browse| feature is missing or the
-			{command} doesn't support browsing, the {command} is
-			executed without a dialog.
-			":browse set" works like |:options|.
-
-The syntax is best shown via some examples: >
-	:browse e $vim/foo
-<		Open the browser in the $vim/foo directory, and edit the
-		file chosen. >
-	:browse e
-<		Open the browser in the directory specified with 'browsedir',
-		and edit the file chosen. >
-	:browse w
-<		Open the browser in the directory of the current buffer,
-		with the current buffer filename as default, and save the
-		buffer under the filename chosen. >
-	:browse w C:/bar
-<		Open the browser in the C:/bar directory, with the current
-		buffer filename as default, and save the buffer under the
-		filename chosen.
-Also see the |'browsedir'| option.
-For versions of Vim where browsing is not supported, the command is executed
-unmodified.
-
-							*browsefilter*
-For MS Windows, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse dialog.
-By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can change the
-filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to a string in
-the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter label} is the
-text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern} is the
-pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given, separated
-by ';'.
-
-For Motif the same format is used, but only the very first pattern is actually
-used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
-
-For example, to have only Vim files in the dialog, you could use the following
-command: >
-
-     let g:browsefilter="Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
-
-You can override the filter setting on a per-buffer basis by setting the
-b:browsefilter variable.  You would most likely set b:browsefilter in a
-filetype plugin, so that the browse dialog would contain entries related to
-the type of file you are currently editing.  Disadvantage: This makes it
-difficult to start editing a file of a different type.  To overcome this, you
-may want to add "All Files\t*.*\n" as the final filter, so that the user can
-still access any desired file.
-
-==============================================================================
-4. The current directory				*current-directory*
-
-You may use the |:cd| and |:lcd| commands to change to another directory, so
-you will not have to type that directory name in front of the file names.  It
-also makes a difference for executing external commands, e.g. ":!ls".
-
-							*:cd* *E472*
-:cd			On non-Unix systems: Print the current directory
-			name.  On Unix systems: Change the current directory
-			to the home directory.  Use |:pwd| to print the
-			current directory on all systems.
-
-:cd {path}		Change the current directory to {path}.
-			If {path} is relative, it is searched for in the
-			directories listed in |'cdpath'|.
-			Does not change the meaning of an already opened file,
-			because its full path name is remembered.  Files from
-			the |arglist| may change though!
-			On MS-DOS this also changes the active drive.
-			To change to the directory of the current file: >
-				:cd %:h
-<
-							*:cd-* *E186*
-:cd -			Change to the previous current directory (before the
-			previous ":cd {path}" command). {not in Vi}
-
-							*:chd* *:chdir*
-:chd[ir] [path]		Same as |:cd|.
-
-							*:lc* *:lcd*
-:lc[d] {path}		Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory for the
-			current window.  The current directory for other
-			windows is not changed. {not in Vi}
-
-							*:lch* *:lchdir*
-:lch[dir]		Same as |:lcd|. {not in Vi}
-
-							*:pw* *:pwd* *E187*
-:pw[d]			Print the current directory name.  {Vi: no pwd}
-			Also see |getcwd()|.
-
-So long as no |:lcd| command has been used, all windows share the same current
-directory.  Using a command to jump to another window doesn't change anything
-for the current directory.
-When a |:lcd| command has been used for a window, the specified directory
-becomes the current directory for that window.  Windows where the |:lcd|
-command has not been used stick to the global current directory.  When jumping
-to another window the current directory will become the last specified local
-current directory.  If none was specified, the global current directory is
-used.
-When a |:cd| command is used, the current window will lose his local current
-directory and will use the global current directory from now on.
-
-After using |:cd| the full path name will be used for reading and writing
-files.  On some networked file systems this may cause problems.  The result of
-using the full path name is that the file names currently in use will remain
-referring to the same file.  Example: If you have a file a:test and a
-directory a:vim the commands ":e test" ":cd vim" ":w" will overwrite the file
-a:test and not write a:vim/test.  But if you do ":w test" the file a:vim/test
-will be written, because you gave a new file name and did not refer to a
-filename before the ":cd".
-
-==============================================================================
-5. The argument list				*argument-list* *arglist*
+3. The argument list				*argument-list* *arglist*
 
 If you give more than one file name when starting Vim, this list is remembered
 as the argument list.  You can jump to each file in this list.
 
 Do not confuse this with the buffer list, which you can see with the
 |:buffers| command.  The argument list was already present in Vi, the buffer
-list is new in Vim.  A file name in the argument list will also be present in
-the buffer list (unless it was deleted with ":bdel").
+list is new in Vim.  Every file name in the argument list will also be present
+in the buffer list (unless it was deleted with |:bdel| or |:bwipe|).  But it's
+common that names in the buffer list are not in the argument list.
 
 This subject is introduced in section |07.2| of the user manual.
 
@@ -878,7 +666,7 @@ list of the current window.
 			in Vi}
 
 :[count]wN[ext][!] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]		*:wN* *:wNext*
-:[count]wp[revous][!] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]		*:wp* *:wprevious*
+:[count]wp[revious][!] [++opt] [+cmd] [file]		*:wp* *:wprevious*
 			Same as :wnext, but go to previous file instead of
 			next.  {not in Vi}
 
@@ -891,11 +679,17 @@ positioned at the first non-blank in the line, otherwise the last know column
 is used.  If there is no last known cursor position the cursor will be in the
 first line (the last line in Ex mode).
 
+							*{arglist}*
 The wildcards in the argument list are expanded and the file names are sorted.
 Thus you can use the command "vim *.c" to edit all the C files.  From within
-Vim the command ":n *.c" does the same.  On Unix you can also use backticks,
-for example: >
-	:n `find . -name \\*.c -print`
+Vim the command ":n *.c" does the same.
+
+White space is used to separate file names.  Put a backslash before a space or
+Tab to include it in a file name.  E.g., to edit the single file "foo bar": >
+	:next foo\ bar
+
+On Unix and a few other systems you can also use backticks, for example: >
+	:next `find . -name \\*.c -print`
 The backslashes before the star are required to prevent "*.c" to be expanded
 by the shell before executing the find program.
 
@@ -985,7 +779,7 @@ flag is used for the ":substitute" command to avoid an error for files where
 "my_foo" isn't used.  ":update" writes the file only if changes were made.
 
 ==============================================================================
-6. Writing					*writing* *save-file*
+4. Writing					*writing* *save-file*
 
 Note: When the 'write' option is off, you are not able to write any file.
 
@@ -1029,7 +823,10 @@ Note: When the 'write' option is off, you are not able to write any file.
 			executed like with ":!{cmd}", any '!' is replaced with
 			the previous command |:!|.
 
-The default [range] for the ":w" command is the whole buffer (1,$).
+The default [range] for the ":w" command is the whole buffer (1,$).  If you
+write the whole buffer, it is no longer considered changed.  Also when you
+write it to a different file with ":w somefile"!
+
 If a file name is given with ":w" it becomes the alternate file.  This can be
 used, for example, when the write fails and you want to try again later with
 ":w #".  This can be switched off by removing the 'A' flag from the
@@ -1167,7 +964,7 @@ For MS-DOS and MS-Windows the device is detected by its name:
 The names can be in upper- or lowercase.
 
 ==============================================================================
-7. Writing and quitting					*write-quit*
+5. Writing and quitting					*write-quit*
 
 							*:q* *:quit*
 :q[uit]			Quit the current window.  Quit Vim if this is the last
@@ -1259,6 +1056,146 @@ MULTIPLE WINDOWS AND BUFFERS				*window-exit*
 		which cannot be written for another reason, Vim will not quit.
 		{not in Vi}
 
+==============================================================================
+6. Dialogs						*edit-dialogs*
+
+							*:confirm* *:conf*
+:conf[irm] {command}	Execute {command}, and use a dialog when an
+			operation has to be confirmed.  Can be used on the
+			":q", ":qa" and ":w" commands (the latter to over-ride
+			a read-only setting).
+
+Examples: >
+  :confirm w foo
+<	Will ask for confirmation when "foo" already exists. >
+  :confirm q
+<	Will ask for confirmation when there are changes. >
+  :confirm qa
+<	If any modified, unsaved buffers exist, you will be prompted to save
+	or abandon each one.  There are also choices to "save all" or "abandon
+	all".
+
+If you want to always use ":confirm", set the 'confirm' option.
+
+			*:browse* *:bro* *E338* *E614* *E615* *E616* *E578*
+:bro[wse] {command}	Open a file selection dialog for an argument to
+			{command}.  At present this works for |:e|, |:w|,
+			|:r|, |:saveas|, |:sp|, |:mkexrc|, |:mkvimrc| and
+			|:mksession|.
+			{only in Win32, Athena, Motif, GTK and Mac GUI}
+			When ":browse" is not possible you get an error
+			message.  If the |+browse| feature is missing or the
+			{command} doesn't support browsing, the {command} is
+			executed without a dialog.
+			":browse set" works like |:options|.
+
+The syntax is best shown via some examples: >
+	:browse e $vim/foo
+<		Open the browser in the $vim/foo directory, and edit the
+		file chosen. >
+	:browse e
+<		Open the browser in the directory specified with 'browsedir',
+		and edit the file chosen. >
+	:browse w
+<		Open the browser in the directory of the current buffer,
+		with the current buffer filename as default, and save the
+		buffer under the filename chosen. >
+	:browse w C:/bar
+<		Open the browser in the C:/bar directory, with the current
+		buffer filename as default, and save the buffer under the
+		filename chosen.
+Also see the |'browsedir'| option.
+For versions of Vim where browsing is not supported, the command is executed
+unmodified.
+
+							*browsefilter*
+For MS Windows, you can modify the filters that are used in the browse dialog.
+By setting the g:browsefilter or b:browsefilter variables, you can change the
+filters globally or locally to the buffer.  The variable is set to a string in
+the format "{filter label}\t{pattern};{pattern}\n" where {filter label} is the
+text that appears in the "Files of Type" comboBox, and {pattern} is the
+pattern which filters the filenames.  Several patterns can be given, separated
+by ';'.
+
+For Motif the same format is used, but only the very first pattern is actually
+used (Motif only offers one pattern, but you can edit it).
+
+For example, to have only Vim files in the dialog, you could use the following
+command: >
+
+     let g:browsefilter="Vim Scripts\t*.vim\nVim Startup Files\t*vimrc\n"
+
+You can override the filter setting on a per-buffer basis by setting the
+b:browsefilter variable.  You would most likely set b:browsefilter in a
+filetype plugin, so that the browse dialog would contain entries related to
+the type of file you are currently editing.  Disadvantage: This makes it
+difficult to start editing a file of a different type.  To overcome this, you
+may want to add "All Files\t*.*\n" as the final filter, so that the user can
+still access any desired file.
+
+==============================================================================
+7. The current directory				*current-directory*
+
+You may use the |:cd| and |:lcd| commands to change to another directory, so
+you will not have to type that directory name in front of the file names.  It
+also makes a difference for executing external commands, e.g. ":!ls".
+
+							*:cd* *E472*
+:cd			On non-Unix systems: Print the current directory
+			name.  On Unix systems: Change the current directory
+			to the home directory.  Use |:pwd| to print the
+			current directory on all systems.
+
+:cd {path}		Change the current directory to {path}.
+			If {path} is relative, it is searched for in the
+			directories listed in |'cdpath'|.
+			Does not change the meaning of an already opened file,
+			because its full path name is remembered.  Files from
+			the |arglist| may change though!
+			On MS-DOS this also changes the active drive.
+			To change to the directory of the current file: >
+				:cd %:h
+<
+							*:cd-* *E186*
+:cd -			Change to the previous current directory (before the
+			previous ":cd {path}" command). {not in Vi}
+
+							*:chd* *:chdir*
+:chd[ir] [path]		Same as |:cd|.
+
+							*:lc* *:lcd*
+:lc[d] {path}		Like |:cd|, but only set the current directory for the
+			current window.  The current directory for other
+			windows is not changed. {not in Vi}
+
+							*:lch* *:lchdir*
+:lch[dir]		Same as |:lcd|. {not in Vi}
+
+							*:pw* *:pwd* *E187*
+:pw[d]			Print the current directory name.  {Vi: no pwd}
+			Also see |getcwd()|.
+
+So long as no |:lcd| command has been used, all windows share the same current
+directory.  Using a command to jump to another window doesn't change anything
+for the current directory.
+When a |:lcd| command has been used for a window, the specified directory
+becomes the current directory for that window.  Windows where the |:lcd|
+command has not been used stick to the global current directory.  When jumping
+to another window the current directory will become the last specified local
+current directory.  If none was specified, the global current directory is
+used.
+When a |:cd| command is used, the current window will lose his local current
+directory and will use the global current directory from now on.
+
+After using |:cd| the full path name will be used for reading and writing
+files.  On some networked file systems this may cause problems.  The result of
+using the full path name is that the file names currently in use will remain
+referring to the same file.  Example: If you have a file a:test and a
+directory a:vim the commands ":e test" ":cd vim" ":w" will overwrite the file
+a:test and not write a:vim/test.  But if you do ":w test" the file a:vim/test
+will be written, because you gave a new file name and did not refer to a
+filename before the ":cd".
+
 ==============================================================================
 8. Editing binary files					*edit-binary*
 
@@ -1448,5 +1385,91 @@ It is also possible that you modified the file yourself, from another edit
 session or with another command (e.g., a filter command).  Then you will know
 which version of the file you want to keep.
 
+==============================================================================
+11. File Searching					*file-searching*
+
+{not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
+
+The file searching is currently used for the 'path', 'cdpath' and 'tags'
+options.  There are three different types of searching:
+
+1) Downward search:
+   Downward search uses the wildcards '*', '**' and possibly others
+   supported by your operating system. '*' and '**' are handled inside Vim, so
+   they work on all operating systems.
+
+   The usage of '*' is quite simple: It matches 0 or more characters.
+
+   '**' is more sophisticated:
+      - It ONLY matches directories.
+      - It matches up to 30 directories deep, so you can use it to search an
+	entire directory tree
+      - The maximum number of levels matched can be given by appending a number
+	to '**'.
+	Thus '/usr/**2' can match: >
+		/usr
+		/usr/include
+		/usr/include/sys
+		/usr/include/g++
+		/usr/lib
+		/usr/lib/X11
+		....
+<	It does NOT match '/usr/include/g++/std' as this would be three
+	levels.
+	The allowed number range is 0 ('**0' is removed) to 255.
+	If the given number is smaller than 0 it defaults to 30, if it's
+	bigger than 255 it defaults to 255.
+      - '**' can only be at the end of the path or be followed by a path
+	separator or by a number and a path separator.
+
+   You can combine '*' and '**' in any order: >
+	/usr/**/sys/*
+	/usr/*/sys/**
+	/usr/**2/sys/*
+
+2) Upward search:
+   Here you can give a directory and then search the directory tree upward for
+   a file. You could give stop-directories to limit the upward search. The
+   stop-directories are appended to the path (for the 'path' option) or to
+   the filename (for the 'tags' option) with a ';'. If you want several
+   stop-directories separate them with ';'. If you want no stop-directory
+   ("search upward till the root directory) just use ';'. >
+	/usr/include/sys;/usr
+<   will search in: >
+	   /usr/include/sys
+	   /usr/include
+	   /usr
+<
+   If you use a relative path the upward search is started in Vim's current
+   directory or in the directory of the current file (if the relative path
+   starts with './' and 'd' is not included in 'cpoptions').
+
+   If Vim's current path is /u/user_x/work/release and you do >
+	:set path=include;/u/user_x
+<  and then search for a file with |gf| the file is searched in: >
+	/u/user_x/work/release/include
+	/u/user_x/work/include
+	/u/user_x/include
+
+3) Combined up/downward search
+   If Vim's current path is /u/user_x/work/release and you do >
+	set path=**;/u/user_x
+<  and then search for a file with |gf| the file is searched in: >
+	/u/user_x/work/release/**
+	/u/user_x/work/**
+	/u/user_x/**
+<
+   BE CAREFUL! This might consume a lot of time, as the search of
+   '/u/user_x/**' includes '/u/user_x/work/**' and
+   '/u/user_x/work/release/**'.  So '/u/user_x/work/release/**' is searched
+   three and '/u/user_x/work/**' is searched two times.
+
+   In the above example you might want to set path to: >
+	:set path=**,/u/user_x/**
+<   This searches: >
+	/u/user_x/work/release/**
+	/u/user_x/**
+<   This searches the same directories, but in a different order.
+
 
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/evim-it.1

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+.TH EVIM 1 "16 febbraio 2002 "
+.SH NOME
+evim \- Vim "facile", Vim impostato in modo da poter essere usato
+facilmente per modificare file, anche da chi non abbia familiarità
+con i comandi.
+.SH SINTASSI
+.br
+.B evim
+[opzioni] [file ..]
+.br
+.B eview
+.SH DESCRIZIONE
+.B evim
+Inizia
+.B Vim
+e imposta le opzioni per farlo comportare come un editore "modeless".
+State sempre usando Vim, ma come un editore "posizionati-e-clicca".
+Simile all'uso di Notepad in MS-Windows.
+.B evim
+richiede la presenza della GUI, per avere a disposizione menu e barra
+strumenti.
+.PP
+Da usarsi solo da parte di chi non è in grado di lavorare con Vim nella
+maniera usuale.
+La modifica file sarà molto meno efficiente.
+.PP
+.B eview
+come sopra, ma parte in modalità "Sola Lettura".  Funziona come evim -R.
+.PP
+Vedere vim(1) per dettagli riguardo a Vim, opzioni, etc.
+.PP
+L'opzione 'insertmode' è impostata per poter immettere del testo direttamente.
+.br
+Sono definite delle mappature che consentono di usare COPIA e INCOLLA con i
+familiari tasti usati sotto MS-Windows.
+CTRL-X taglia testo, CTRL-C copia testo e CTRL-V incolla testo.
+Usate CTRL-Q per ottenere quello chs si ottierrebbe con CTRL-V in Vim nativo.
+.SH OPZIONI
+Vedere vim(1).
+.SH FILE
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/evim.vim
+Lo script caricato per inizializzare eVim.
+.SH NAC [NOTO ANCHE COME]
+Noto Anche Come "Vim per semplici".
+Quando usate evim si suppone che prendiate un fazzoletto,
+facciate un nodo ad ogni angolo e ve lo mettiate in testa.
+.SH VEDERE ANCHE
+vim(1)
+.SH AUTORE
+Buona parte di
+.B Vim
+è stato scritto da Bram Moolenaar, con molto aiuto da altri.
+Vedere il Menu "Aiuto/Crediti".

runtime/doc/fold.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 14
+*fold.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -190,11 +190,11 @@ and the level given by the marker:
 3. if a marker with a lower fold level is found, all folds up to and including
    this level end and a fold with the specified level starts.
 
-The number indicates the fold level.  A zero cannot be used.
-You can use "}}}" with a digit to indicate the level of the fold that
-ends.  The fold level of the following line will be one less than the
-indicated level.  Note that Vim doesn't look back to the level of the matching
-marker (that would take too much time).  Example: >
+The number indicates the fold level.  A zero cannot be used (a marker with
+level zero is ignored).  You can use "}}}" with a digit to indicate the level
+of the fold that ends.  The fold level of the following line will be one less
+than the indicated level.  Note that Vim doesn't look back to the level of the
+matching marker (that would take too much time).  Example: >
 
 	{{{1
 	fold level here is 1
@@ -279,7 +279,7 @@ zF		Create a fold for N lines.  Works like "zf".
 		Create a fold for the lines in {range}.  Works like "zf".
 
 							*zd* *E351*
-zd		Delete one fold at the cursor.  When the cursor is on folded
+zd		Delete one fold at the cursor.  When the cursor is on a folded
 		line, that fold is deleted.  Nested folds are moved one level
 		up.  In Visual mode all folds (partially) in the selected area
 		are deleted.  Careful: This easily deletes more folds than you
@@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ FOLDLEVEL						*fold-foldlevel*
 
 'foldlevel' is a number option: The higher the more folded regions are open.
 When 'foldlevel' is 0, all folds are closed.
-When 'foldlevel' is positive, some folds closed.
+When 'foldlevel' is positive, some folds are closed.
 When 'foldlevel' is very high, all folds are open.
 'foldlevel' is applied when it is changed.  After that manually folds can be
 opened and closed.

runtime/doc/gui.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 15
+*gui.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -52,7 +52,8 @@ When the GUI starts up initializations are carried out, in this order:
 	:let bmenu_max_pathlen = 50
 - If the "-U {gvimrc}" command-line option has been used when starting Vim,
   the {gvimrc} file will be read for initializations.  The following
-  initializations are skipped.
+  initializations are skipped.  When {gvimrc} is "NONE" no file will be read
+  for initializations.
 - For Unix and MS-Windows, if the system gvimrc exists, it is sourced.  The
   name of this file is normally "$VIM/gvimrc".  You can check this with
   ":version".  Also see |$VIM|.
@@ -143,7 +144,7 @@ window Vim is running in with this command: >
 ==============================================================================
 2. Scrollbars						*gui-scrollbars*
 
-There are vertical scrollbars and a horizontal scrollbars.  You may
+There are vertical scrollbars and a horizontal scrollbar.  You may
 configure which ones appear with the 'guioptions' option.
 
 The interface looks like this (with ":set guioptions=mlrb"):
@@ -202,11 +203,11 @@ scrolled as far as possible left and right.  The cursor is moved when
 necessary, it must remain on a visible character (unless 'virtualedit' is
 set).
 
-Computing the length of the longest visible takes quite a bit of computation,
-and it has to be done every time something changes.  If this takes too much
-time or you don't like the cursor jumping to another line, include the 'h'
-flag in 'guioptions'.  Then the scrolling is limited by the text of the
-current cursor line.
+Computing the length of the longest visible line takes quite a bit of
+computation, and it has to be done every time something changes.  If this
+takes too much time or you don't like the cursor jumping to another line,
+include the 'h' flag in 'guioptions'.  Then the scrolling is limited by the
+text of the current cursor line.
 
 							*athena-intellimouse*
 If you have an Intellimouse and an X server that supports using the wheel,

runtime/doc/gui_w32.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 May 03
+*gui_w32.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -233,6 +233,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME/mswin.vim script.  You could add this line to your _vimrc file: >
 Since CTRL-C is used to copy the text to the clipboard, it can't be used to
 cancel an operation.  Use CTRL-Break for that.
 
+CTRL-Z is used for undo.  This means you can't suspend Vim.
+
 							*CTRL-V-alternative*
 Since CTRL-V is used to paste, you can't use it to start a blockwise Visual
 selection.  You can use CTRL-Q instead.  You can also use CTRL-Q in Insert

runtime/doc/gui_x11.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 02
+*gui_x11.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -437,6 +437,9 @@ command line argument).
 ==============================================================================
 7. KDE version					*gui-kde* *kde* *KDE* *KVim*
 
+NOTE: The KDE version is still under development.  It is not recommended for
+daily work.
+
 The KDE version of Vim works with KDE 2.x and KDE 3.x.
 KVim (name code for gui-kde) does not use traditional X settings for its
 configuration.

runtime/doc/help.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 05
+*help.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 30
 
 			VIM - main help file
 									 k
@@ -189,12 +189,6 @@ Standard plugins ~
 |pi_expl.txt|	File explorer
 
 LOCAL ADDITIONS:				*local-additions*
-|engspchk.txt|	English Spelling Checker   (v57)	May 25, 2004
-|example.txt|	Example for a locally added help file
-|matchit.txt|   Extended "%" matching
-|test.txt|	Testing the hélp cömmånd nôw
-|typecorr.txt|	Plugin for correcting typing mistakes
-|helpp.txt|	Dummy line to avoid an error message
 
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 *bars*		Bars example

runtime/doc/if_cscop.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 23
+*if_cscop.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 21
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Andy Kahn
@@ -245,8 +245,9 @@ results. This is a list of comma-separated values. Each item consists of
 '-' implies previous results clearance, '0' or command absence - don't use
 quickfix. Search is performed from start until first command occurrence.
 The default value is "" (don't use quickfix anyway). The following value
-seems to be useful: "s-,c-,d-,i-,t-,e-".
-
+seems to be useful: >
+	:set cscopequickfix=s-,c-,d-,i-,t-,e-
+<
 							*cscopetag* *cst*
 If 'cscopetag' set, the commands ":tag" and CTRL-] as well as "vim -t" will
 always use |:cstag| instead of the default :tag behavior.  Effectively, by

runtime/doc/if_mzsch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 05
+*if_mzsch.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 23
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Sergey Khorev
@@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ The MzScheme interface is available only if Vim was compiled with the
 |+mzscheme| feature.
 
 Based on the work of Brent Fulgham.
+Dynamic loading added by Sergey Khorev
 
 For downloading MzScheme and other info:
 	http://www.plt-scheme.org/software/mzscheme/

runtime/doc/if_ole.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2003 Jun 19
+*if_ole.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Paul Moore
@@ -158,5 +158,41 @@ Studio.  This is called "VisVim".  It is included in the archive that contains
 the OLE version.  The documentation can be found in the runtime directory, the
 README_VisVim.txt file.
 
+
+Using Vim with Visual Studio .Net~
+
+With .Net you no longer really need VisVim, since .Net studio has support for
+external editors.  Follow these directions:
+
+In .Net Studio choose from the menu Tools->External Tools...
+Add
+     Title     - Vim
+     Command   - c:\vim\vim63\gvim.exe
+     Arguments - --servername VS_NET --remote-silent "+call cursor($(CurLine), $(CurCol))" $(ItemPath)  
+     Init Dir  - Empty
+
+Now, when you open a file in .Net, you can choose from the .Net menu:
+Tools->Vim
+
+That will open the file in Vim.
+You can then add this external command as an icon and place it anywhere you
+like.  You might also be able to set this as your default editor.
+
+If you refine this further, please post back to the Vim maillist so we have a
+record of it.
+
+--servername VS_NET 
+This will create a new instance of vim called VS_NET.  So if you open multiple
+files from VS, they will use the same instance of Vim.  This allows you to
+have multiple copies of Vim running, but you can control which one has VS
+files in it.
+
+--remote-silent "+call cursor(10, 27)" 
+              - Places the cursor on line 10 column 27
+In Vim >
+   :h --remote-silent for mor details
+
+[.Net remarks provided by Dave Fishburn and Brian Sturk]
+
 ==============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/index.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 07
+*index.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -328,8 +328,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 				   characters, repeat the entered text N-1
 				   times
 |S|		["x]S		2  delete N lines [into buffer x] and start
-				   insert; synonym for "^cc" or "0cc",
-				   depending on autoindent
+				   insert; synonym for "cc".
 |T|		T{char}		1  cursor till after Nth occurrence of {char}
 				   to the left
 |U|		U		2  undo all latest changes on one line
@@ -425,7 +424,7 @@ tag		char	      note action in Normal mode	~
 |<Insert>|	<Insert>	2  same as "i"
 |<Left>|	<Left>		1  same as "h"
 |<LeftMouse>|	<LeftMouse>	1  move cursor to the mouse click position
-|<MiddleMouse>| <MiddleMouse>	2  same as "P" at the mouse click position
+|<MiddleMouse>| <MiddleMouse>	2  same as "gP" at the mouse click position
 |<PageDown>|	<PageDown>	   same as CTRL-F
 |<PageUp>|	<PageUp>	   same as CTRL-B
 |<Right>|	<Right>		1  same as "l"
@@ -808,6 +807,7 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 |v_CTRL-\_CTRL-N| CTRL-\ CTRL-N	   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-\_CTRL-G| CTRL-\ CTRL-G	   go to mode specified with 'insertmode'
+|v_CTRL-C|	CTRL-C		   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-G|	CTRL-G		   toggle between Visual mode and Select mode
 |v_<BS>|	<BS>		2  Select mode: delete highlighted area
 |v_CTRL-H|	CTRL-H		2  same as <BS>
@@ -815,6 +815,7 @@ tag		command	      note action in Visual mode	~
 				   command
 |v_CTRL-V|	CTRL-V		   make Visual mode blockwise or stop Visual
 				   mode
+|v_<Esc>|	<Esc>		   stop Visual mode
 |v_CTRL-]|	CTRL-]		   jump to highlighted tag
 |v_!|		!{filter}	2  filter the highlighted lines through the
 				   external command {filter}
@@ -1060,6 +1061,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:cabclear|	:cabc[lear]	clear all abbreviations for Command-line mode
 |:call|		:cal[l]		call a function
 |:catch|	:cat[ch]	part of a :try command
+|:cbuffer|	:cb[uffer]	parse error messages and jump to first error
 |:cc|		:cc		go to specific error
 |:cclose|	:ccl[ose]	close quickfix window
 |:cd|		:cd		change directory
@@ -1142,6 +1144,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:ex|		:ex		same as ":edit"
 |:execute|	:exe[cute]	execute result of expressions
 |:exit|		:exi[t]		same as ":xit"
+|:exusage|	:exu[sage]	overview of Ex commands
 |:file|		:f[ile]		show or set the current file name
 |:files|	:files		list all files in the buffer list
 |:filetype|	:filet[ype]	switch file type detection on/off
@@ -1400,6 +1403,7 @@ The commands are sorted on the non-optional part of their name.
 |:verbose|	:verb[ose]	execute command with 'verbose' set
 |:vertical|	:vert[ical]	make following command split vertically
 |:visual|	:vi[sual]	same as ":edit", but turns off "Ex" mode
+|:viusage|	:viu[sage]	overview of Normal mode commands
 |:view|		:vie[w]		edit a file read-only
 |:vmap|		:vm[ap]		like ":map" but for Visual mode
 |:vmapclear|	:vmapc[lear]	remove all mappings for Visual mode

runtime/doc/insert.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 04
+*insert.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 05
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -124,6 +124,9 @@ CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+:.-=}					*i_CTRL-R*
 			'-'	the last small (less than a line) delete
 			'='	the expression register: you are prompted to
 				enter an expression (see |expression|)
+				Note that 0x80 (128 decimal) is used for
+				special keys, use CTRL-R CTRL-R to insert it
+				literally.
 		See |registers| about registers.  {not in Vi}
 
 CTRL-R CTRL-R {0-9a-z"%#*+/:.-=}			*i_CTRL-R_CTRL-R*
@@ -972,7 +975,7 @@ These two commands will keep on asking for lines, until you type a line
 containing only a ".".  Watch out for lines starting with a backslash, see
 |line-continuation|.
 NOTE: ":append" and ":insert" don't work properly in between ":if" and
-":endif".
+":endif", ":for" and ":endfor", ":while" and ":endwhile".
 
 							*:start* *:startinsert*
 :star[tinsert][!]	Start Insert mode just after executing this command.

runtime/doc/intro.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 12
+*intro.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 16
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -226,12 +226,14 @@ Vim would never have become what it is now, without the help of these people!
 	Kayhan Demirel		sent me news in Uganda
 	Chris & John Downey	xvi (ideas for multi-windows version)
 	Henk Elbers		first VMS port
+	Daniel Elstner		GTK+ 2 port
 	Eric Fischer		Mac port, 'cindent', and other improvements
 	Benji Fisher		Answering lots of user questions
 	Bill Foster		Athena GUI port
 	Loic Grenie		xvim (ideas for multi windows version)
 	Sven Guckes		Vim promotor and previous WWW page maintainer
 	Darren Hiebert		Exuberant ctags
+	Jason Hildebrand	GTK+ 2 port
 	Bruce Hunsaker		improvements for VMS port
 	Andy Kahn		Cscope support, GTK+ GUI port
 	Oezguer Kesim		Maintainer of Vim Mailing Lists
@@ -276,7 +278,7 @@ the ideas from all these people: They keep Vim alive!
 
 
 In this documentation there are several references to other versions of Vi:
-							*Vi*
+							*Vi* *vi*
 Vi	"the original".  Without further remarks this is the version
 	of Vi that appeared in Sun OS 4.x.  ":version" returns
 	"Version 3.7, 6/7/85".  Sometimes other versions are referred
@@ -348,7 +350,7 @@ and <> are part of what you type, the context should make this clear.
 		concatenated.  For example, {a-zA-Z0-9} is any alphanumeric
 		character.
 
-							*{motion}*
+						*{motion}* *movement*
 {motion}	A command that moves the cursor.  These are explained in
 		|motion.txt|.  Examples:
 			w		to start of next word

runtime/doc/map.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 May 21
+*map.txt*       For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -232,8 +232,6 @@ command line (not a search pattern) the mappings are disabled until a CTRL-^
 is typed.  The state last used is remembered for Insert mode and Search
 patterns separately.  The state for Insert mode is also used when typing a
 character as an argument to command like "f" or "t".
-   When adding a ":lmap" mapping the use of these mappings in Insert mode and
-for Search patterns will be switched on.
    Language mappings will never be applied to already mapped characters.  They
 are only used for typed characters.  This assumes that the language mapping
 was already done when typing the mapping.
@@ -615,7 +613,7 @@ Examples: ({CURSOR} is where you type a non-keyword character) >
 <		"#i{CURSOR}"	  is expanded to "#include"
 		">#i{CURSOR}"	  is not expanded
 >
-   :ab ;; <endofline>"
+   :ab ;; <endofline>
 <		"test;;"	  is not expanded
 		"test ;;"	  is expanded to "test <endofline>"
 
@@ -737,7 +735,7 @@ You see:    ab esc ^V^V^[
 	how it should appear in your .exrc file, if you choose to go that
 	route.  The first ^V is there to quote the second ^V; the :ab
 	command uses ^V as its own quote character, so you can include quoted
-	whitespace or the | character in the abbreviation.   The :ab command
+	whitespace or the | character in the abbreviation.  The :ab command
 	doesn't do anything special with the ^[ character, so it doesn't need
 	to be quoted.  (Although quoting isn't harmful; that's why typing 7
 	[but not 8!] ^Vs works.)
@@ -752,7 +750,7 @@ Stored as:  esc     ^V^[
 	Later, when the abbreviation is expanded because the user typed in
 	the word "esc", the long form is subjected to the same type of
 	^V interpretation as keyboard input.  So the ^V protects the ^[
-	character from being interpreted as the "exit input-mode" character.
+	character from being interpreted as the "exit Insert mode" character.
 	Instead, the ^[ is inserted into the text.
 
 Expands to: ^[
@@ -780,7 +778,7 @@ make it local to the script.  But when a mapping is executed from outside of
 the script, it doesn't know in which script the function was defined.  To
 avoid this problem, use "<SID>" instead of "s:".  The same translation is done
 as for mappings.  This makes it possible to define a call to the function in
-mapping.
+a mapping.
 
 When a local function is executed, it runs in the context of the script it was
 defined in.  This means that new functions and mappings it defines can also
@@ -1056,7 +1054,7 @@ Examples >
 	 Replace <line1>-pu_|<line1>,<line2>d|r <args>|<line1>d
 
    " Count the number of lines in the range
-   :com! -range -nargs=0 Lines :echo <line2> - <line1> + 1 "lines"
+   :com! -range -nargs=0 Lines  echo <line2> - <line1> + 1 "lines"
 
    " Call a user function (example of <f-args>)
    :com -nargs=* Mycmd call Myfunc(<f-args>)

runtime/doc/mbyte.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 05
+*mbyte.txt*     For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 19
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -328,6 +328,8 @@ u   unicode	same as ucs-2
 u   ucs2be	same as ucs-2 (big endian)
 u   ucs-2be	same as ucs-2 (big endian)
 u   ucs-4be	same as ucs-4 (big endian)
+    default     stands for the default value of 'encoding', depends on the
+    		environment
 
 For the UCS codes the byte order matters.  This is tricky, use UTF-8 whenever
 you can.  The default is to use big-endian (most significant byte comes

runtime/doc/message.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Aug 26
+*message.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ or view a list of recent messages with: >
 LIST OF MESSAGES
 			*E222* *E228* *E232* *E256* *E293* *E298* *E304* *E317*
 			*E318* *E356* *E438* *E439* *E440* *E316* *E320* *E322*
-			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570*  >
+			*E323* *E341* *E473* *E570* *E685* >
   Add to read buffer
   makemap: Illegal mode
   Cannot create BalloonEval with both message and callback
@@ -74,6 +74,7 @@ LIST OF MESSAGES
   line number out of range: {N} past the end
   line count wrong in block {N}
   Internal error
+  Internal error: {function}
   fatal error in cs_manage_matches
 
 This is an internal error.  If you can reproduce it, please send in a bug

runtime/doc/motion.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 07
+*motion.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 08
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -814,8 +814,8 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 			area in the current buffer.  {not in Vi}.
 
 							*''* *``*
-''  ``			To the position before latest jump, or where the last
-			"m'" or "m`" command was given.  Not set when the
+''  ``			To the position before the latest jump, or where the
+			last "m'" or "m`" command was given.  Not set when the
 			|:keepjumps| command modifier was used.
 			Also see |restore-position|.
 
@@ -831,8 +831,8 @@ was made yet in the current file.
 
 							*'^* *`^*
 '^  `^			To the position where the cursor was the last time
-			when Insert mode was stopped  This is used by the |gi|
-			command.  Not set when the |:keepjumps| command
+			when Insert mode was stopped.  This is used by the
+			|gi| command.  Not set when the |:keepjumps| command
 			modifier was used.  {not in Vi}
 
 							*'.* *`.*
@@ -938,7 +938,9 @@ These commands are not marks themselves, but jump to a mark:
 <
 			Note that ":keepjumps" must be used for every command.
 			When invoking a function the commands in that function
-			can still change the jumplist.
+			can still change the jumplist.  Also, for 
+			":keepjumps exe 'command '" the "command" won't keep
+			jumps.  Instead use: ":exe 'keepjumps command'"
 
 ==============================================================================
 8. Jumps					*jump-motions*
@@ -1240,7 +1242,7 @@ L			To line [count] from bottom of window (default: Last
 			Cursor is adjusted for 'scrolloff' option.
 
 <LeftMouse>		Moves to the position on the screen where the mouse
-			click is |inclusive|.  See also |<LeftMouse>|.  If the
+			click is |exclusive|.  See also |<LeftMouse>|.  If the
 			position is in a status line, that window is made the
 			active window and the cursor is not moved.  {not in Vi}
 

runtime/doc/netbeans.txt

@@ -417,6 +417,12 @@ guard off len
 initDone	Mark the buffer as ready for use.  Implicitly makes the buffer
 		the current buffer.  Fires the BufReadPost autocommand event.
 
+insertDone
+		Sent by NetBeans to tell vim an initial file insert is done.
+		This triggers a read message being printed. Prior to version
+		2.3, no read messages were displayed after opening a file.
+		New in version 2.3.
+
 moveAnnoToFront serNum
 		Not implemented.
 
@@ -450,6 +456,12 @@ save		Save the buffer when it was modified.  The other side of the
 		- 'buftype' disallows writing
 		New in version 2.2.
 
+saveDone
+		Sent by NetBeans to tell vim a save is done. This triggers
+		a save message being printed. Prior to version 2.3, no save
+		messages were displayed after a save.
+		New in version 2.3.
+
 setAsUser	Not implemented.
 
 setBufferNumber pathname
@@ -473,6 +485,7 @@ setExitDelay seconds
 		This delay is used to give the IDE a chance to handle things
 		before really exiting.  The default delay is two seconds.
 		New in version 2.1.
+		Obsolete in version 2.3.
 
 setFullName pathname
 		Set the file name to be used for a buffer to "pathname", a
@@ -490,7 +503,14 @@ setModified modified
 		When the boolean argument "modified" is "T" mark the buffer as
 		modified, when it is "F" mark it as unmodified.
 
-setReadOnly	Not implemented.
+setModtime time
+		Update a buffers modification time after NetBeans saves the
+		file.
+		New in version 2.3.
+
+setReadOnly
+		Passed by NetBeans to tell vim a file is readonly.
+		Implemented in verion 2.3.
 
 setStyle	Not implemented.
 
@@ -508,7 +528,11 @@ showBalloon text
 		disappear when the mouse is moved more than a few pixels.
 		New in version 2.1.
 
-specialKeys	Not implemented.
+specialKeys
+		Map a set of keys (mostly function keys) to be passed back
+		to NetBeans for processing. This lets NetBeans hotkeys be
+		used from vim.
+		Implemented in version 2.3.
 
 startAtomic	Begin an atomic operation.  The screen will not be updated
 		until "endAtomic" is given.
@@ -620,6 +644,11 @@ buttonRelease button lnum col
 		in the sign area.
 		New in version 2.2.
 
+disconnect
+		Tell NetBeans that vim is exiting and not to try and read or
+		write more commands.
+		New in version 2.3.
+
 fileClosed	Not implemented.
 
 fileModified	Not implemented.

runtime/doc/options.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 07
+*options.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 14
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -139,6 +139,9 @@ example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
 (the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
 The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.
 
+The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+security reasons.
+
 The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi.  Long string options are put
 at the end of the list.  The number of options is quite large.  The output of
 "set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
@@ -288,10 +291,11 @@ For buffer-local and window-local options:
 
 Global options with a local value			*global-local*
 
-Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers.  For some
-global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.  You can
-set the local value with ":setlocal".  That buffer will then use the local
-value, while other buffers continue using the global value.
+Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.
+For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.
+You can set the local value with ":setlocal".  That buffer or window will then
+use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global
+value.
 
 For example, you have two windows, both on C source code.  They use the global
 'makeprg' option.  If you do this in one of the two windows: >
@@ -918,7 +922,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
 	- A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
 	  as the edited file.
-	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
+	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
 	  put the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The
 	  leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
 	  ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
@@ -953,6 +957,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
 	prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
 	".bak" that you want to keep.
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
 	If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
 	autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
@@ -1062,7 +1067,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	break if 'linebreak' is on.
 
 						*'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
-'browsedir' 'bsdir'	string	(default for "last")
+'browsedir' 'bsdir'	string	(default: "last")
 			global
 			{not in Vi} {only for Motif and Win32 GUI}
 	Which directory to use for the file browser:
@@ -1091,6 +1096,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
 			|:bwipeout|
 
+	CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
+	are lost without a warning.
 	This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
 	special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.
 
@@ -1835,7 +1842,13 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
 			paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
 			there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
-								*cpo-star*
+			This flag is also used for other features, such as
+			C-indenting.
+								*cpo-+*
+		+	When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
+			'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
+			itself may still be different from its file.
+			 					cpo-star*
 		*	Use ":*" in the same way as ":@".  When not included,
 			":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
 								*cpo-<*
@@ -1956,6 +1969,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
 	after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
 	name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
+	This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
 	Where to find a list of words?
 	- On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
 	- In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
@@ -2046,7 +2060,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	  the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
 	  it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
 	  attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
-	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et.al.) means to
+	- A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
 	  put the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
 	  "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
 	- For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators, the
@@ -2121,7 +2135,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	with.  See |encoding-names| for the possible values.
 
 	NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
-	existing text in Vim.  It may cause multi-byte text to become invalid.
+	existing text in Vim.  It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid.
 	It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
 	starts up.  See |multibyte|.
 
@@ -2187,10 +2201,11 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			global
 			{not in Vi}
 	When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
-	splitting or closing a window.  When off, splitting a window will
-	reduce the size of the current window and leave the other windows the
-	same.  When closing a window the extra lines are given to the window
-	next to it (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
+	splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
+	option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
+	size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
+	closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
+	(depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
 	When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
 	is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
 	'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
@@ -2331,8 +2346,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.
 
 					*'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
-'fileencodings' 'fencs'	string (default: "ucs-bom", "ucs-bom,utf-8,latin1"
-				    when 'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
+'fileencodings' 'fencs'	string (default: "ucs-bom",
+				    "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when
+				    'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
 			global
 			{only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
 			feature}
@@ -2366,6 +2382,10 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
 	because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
 	accepted.
+	The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
+	environment.  This is the default value for 'encoding'.  It is useful
+	when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a
+	non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.
 	WRONG VALUES:			WHAT'S WRONG:
 		latin1,utf-8		"latin1" will always be used
 		utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1	BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
@@ -2478,6 +2498,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	type that is actually stored with the file.
 	This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
 	'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
 						*'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
 'fillchars' 'fcs'	string	(default "vert:|,fold:-")
@@ -2710,6 +2731,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
 	set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
 
+					*'formatlistpat'* *'flp'*
+'formatlistpat' 'flp'	string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")
+			local to buffer
+			{not in Vi}
+	A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
+	the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
+	The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
+	the line below it.  You can use |\ze| to mark the end of the match
+	while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
+	following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
+	like there is no match.
+	The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
+	character and white space.
+
 						*'formatprg'* *'fp'*
 'formatprg' 'fp'	string (default "")
 			global
@@ -2724,6 +2759,20 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
 	security reasons.
 
+							*'fsync'* *'fs'*
+'fsync' 'fs'		boolean	(default on)
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+	When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a
+	file.  This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely
+	written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling.  This
+	will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop
+	mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations.  Be warned that
+	turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash.  On
+	systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
+	off.
+	Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.
+
 				   *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
 'gdefault' 'gd'		boolean	(default off)
 			global
@@ -2763,7 +2812,9 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
 	also work well with a single file: >
 		:set grepprg=grep\ -nH
-<	See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
+<	Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the ":grep" works
+	like ":vimgrep".
+	See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
 	apply equally to 'grepprg'.
 	For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
 	otherwise it's "grep -n".
@@ -2790,6 +2841,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	the height of the cursor can be changed.  This can be done by
 	specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
 	horizontal cursor.
+	For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.
 
 	The option is a comma separated list of parts.  Each part consist of a
 	mode-list and an argument-list:
@@ -3685,6 +3737,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
 	setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
 	'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
 					*'keymodel'* *'km'*
 'keymodel' 'km'		string	(default "")
@@ -3776,6 +3829,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	matter what $LANG is set to: >
 		:set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
 <	When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 	If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
 	the English menus: >
 		:set langmenu=none
@@ -4426,6 +4480,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
 	end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
 	recognized as a compressed file.
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
 					*'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347*
 'path' 'pa'		string	(default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
@@ -4536,6 +4591,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 			feature}
 	The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|.
 	See |pdev-option|.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 
 						*'printencoding'* *'penc'*
 'printencoding' 'penc'	String	(default empty, except for some systems)
@@ -4965,7 +5022,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	   folds	manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
 			fold options
 	   globals	global variables that start with an uppercase letter
-			and contain at least one lowercase letter.
+			and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
+			String and Number types are stored.
 	   help		the help window
 	   localoptions	options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
 			global values for local options)
@@ -5449,7 +5507,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 
 			   *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E541* *E542*
 'statusline' 'stl'	string	(default empty)
-			global
+			global or local to window |global-local|
 			{not in Vi}
 			{not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
 			feature}
@@ -5646,6 +5704,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	systems the swap file will not be written at all.  For a unix system
 	setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
 	fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
+	The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.
 
 						*'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
 'switchbuf' 'swb'	string	(default "")
@@ -5686,6 +5745,7 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
 	This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
 	'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
+	Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
 
 					*'tabstop'* *'ts'*
 'tabstop' 'ts'		number	(default 8)
@@ -6064,6 +6124,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
 	original title cannot be restored.  Only happens if 'title' is on or
 	'titlestring' is not empty.
+	This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
+	security reasons.
 						*'titlestring'*
 'titlestring'		string	(default "")
 			global
@@ -6352,7 +6414,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 	!	When included, save and restore global variables that start
 		with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
 		letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
-		and "_K_L_M" are not.
+		and "_K_L_M" are not.  Only String and Number types are
+		stored.
 	"	Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
 		the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
 		backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
@@ -6629,6 +6692,21 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		:set wildmode=longest,list
 <	Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
 
+						*'wildoptions'* *'wop'*
+'wildoptions' 'wop'	string	(default "")
+			global
+			{not in Vi}
+			{not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
+			feature}
+	A list of words that change how command line completion is done.
+	Currently only one word is allowed:
+	  tagfile	When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
+	   		tag and the file of the tag is listed.  Only one match
+			is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
+				d	#define
+				f	function
+	Also see |cmdline-completion|.
+
 						*'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
 'winaltkeys' 'wak'	string	(default "menu")
 			global
@@ -6648,8 +6726,8 @@ A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.
 		keys can be mapped.
 	If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
 	key is never used for the menu.
-	In the Win32 version, the <F10> key is handled like this too, since
-	Windows uses it to select a menu.
+	This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will
+	select the menu, unless it has been mapped.
 
 						*'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
 'winheight' 'wh'	number	(default 1)

runtime/doc/os_mac.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 19
+*os_mac.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 13
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar et al.
@@ -71,6 +71,12 @@ Q: I can't enter non-ASCII character in Apple Terminal.
 A: Under Window Settings, Emulation, make sure that "Escape non-ASCII
    characters" is not checked.
 
+Q: How do I start the GUI from the command line?
+A: Assuming that Vim.app is located in /Applications:
+	open /Applications/Vim.app
+   Or:
+   	/Applications/Vim.app/Contents/MacOS/Vim -g  {arguments}
+
 ==============================================================================
 4. Mac Lack						*mac-lack*
 

runtime/doc/pattern.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 07
+*pattern.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 24
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -153,6 +153,7 @@ The offset gives the cursor position relative to the found match:
     s[-num]	[num] characters to the left of the start of the match
     b[+num]	[num] identical to s[+num] above (mnemonic: begin)
     b[-num]	[num] identical to s[-num] above (mnemonic: begin)
+    ;{pattern}  perform another searcn, see |//;|
 
 If a '-' or '+' is given but [num] is omitted, a count of one will be used.
 When including an offset with 'e', the search becomes inclusive (the
@@ -216,7 +217,7 @@ To clear the last used search pattern: >
 This will not set the pattern to an empty string, because that would match
 everywhere.  The pattern is really cleared, like when starting Vim.
 
-The search usual skips matches that don't move the cursor.  Whether the next
+The search usually skips matches that don't move the cursor.  Whether the next
 match is found at the next character or after the skipped match depends on the
 'c' flag in 'cpoptions'.  See |cpo-c|.
 	   with 'c' flag:   "/..." advances 1 to 3 characters
@@ -224,6 +225,10 @@ match is found at the next character or after the skipped match depends on the
 The unpredictability with the 'c' flag is caused by starting the search in the
 first column, skipping matches until one is found past the cursor position.
 
+When searching backwards, searching starts at the start of the line, using the
+'c' flag in 'cpoptions' as described above.  Then the last match before the
+cursor position is used.
+
 In Vi the ":tag" command sets the last search pattern when the tag is searched
 for.  In Vim this is not done, the previous search pattern is still remembered,
 unless the 't' flag is present in 'cpoptions'.  The search pattern is always

runtime/doc/pi_expl.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_expl.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2002 Nov 08
+*pi_expl.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by M A Aziz Ahmed
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ splitting horizontally, use the variable: >
 The default for this is the setting of splitbelow at the time the plugin is
 loaded.
 
-To control where the windows goes relative to the explorer window when
+To control where the window goes relative to the explorer window when
 splitting vertically, use the variable: >
   let g:explSplitRight=1    " Put new window to the right of the explorer
   let g:explSplitRight=0    " Put new window to the left of the explorer
@@ -77,14 +77,14 @@ To use a different split method for the explorer window, use: >
 			    " current window
   let g:explStartRight=0    " Put new explorer window to the left of the
 			    " current window
-The default for this set to g:explSplitRight at the time the plugin is loaded.
+The default is the value of g:explSplitRight at the time the plugin is loaded.
 
 To use a different split method for the explorer window, use: >
   let g:explStartBelow=1    " Put new explorer window below the
 			    " current window
   let g:explStartBelow=0    " Put new explorer window above the
 			    " current window
-The default for this set to g:explSplitBelow at the time the plugin is loaded.
+The default is the value of g:explSplitBelow at the time the plugin is loaded.
 
 The start splits allow for the explorer window to be placed in a file browser
 type arrangement, where the directories are shown on the left and the contents

runtime/doc/pi_netrw.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*pi_netrw.txt  For Vim version 6.2.  Last change: Sep 13, 2004
+*pi_netrw.txt*  For Vim version 6.3.  Last change: Oct 08, 2004
 
 
 		VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
@@ -536,11 +536,13 @@ from <netrw.vim> itself:
      <c-l>......Refreshing the Listing..................|netrw-ctrl-l|
      o..........Browsing with a Horizontal Split........|netrw-o|
      p..........Preview Window..........................|netrw-p|
-     q..........Listing Bookmarks.......................|netrw-q|
+     q..........Listing Bookmarks and History...........|netrw-q|
      r..........Reversing Sorting Order.................|netrw-r|
      R..........Renaming Files or Directories...........|netrw-R|
      s..........Selecting Sorting Style.................|netrw-s|
      S..........Editing the Sorting Sequence............|netrw-S|
+     u..........Changing to a Predecessor Directory.....|netrw-u|
+     U..........Changing to a Successor Directory.......|netrw-U|
      v..........Browsing with a Vertical Split..........|netrw-v|
      x..........Customizing Browsing....................|netrw-x|
 
@@ -751,7 +753,7 @@ EDIT FILE OR DIRECTORY HIDING LIST				*netrw-h*
 The "<ctrl-h>" map brings up a requestor allowing the user to change the
 file/directory hiding list.  The hiding list consists of one or more patterns
 delimited by commas.  Files and/or directories satisfying these patterns will
-be hidden (ie. not shown).
+either be hidden (ie. not shown) or be the only ones displayed (see |netrw-a|).
 
 
 BROWSING WITH A HORIZONTALLY SPLIT WINDOW			*netrw-o*
@@ -802,6 +804,22 @@ One may toggle between normal and reverse sorting order by pressing the
 "r" key.
 
 
+CHANGING TO A PREDECESSOR DIRECTORY				*netrw-u*
+
+Every time you change to a new directory (new for the current session),
+netrw will save the directory in a recently-visited directory history
+list (unless g:netrw_dirhistmax is zero; by default, its ten).  With the
+"u" map, one can change to an earlier directory (predecessor).  To do
+the opposite, see |netrw-U|.
+
+
+CHANGING TO A SUCCESSOR DIRECTORY				*netrw-U*
+
+With the "U" map, one can change to a later directory (successor).
+This map is the opposite of the "u" map. (see |netrw-u|)  Use the
+q map to list both the bookmarks and history. (see |netrw-q|)
+
+
 BROWSING WITH A VERTICALLY SPLIT WINDOW				*netrw-v*
 
 Normally one enters a file or directory using the <cr>.  However, the "v"
@@ -854,7 +872,8 @@ One may easily "bookmark" a directory by using
 	{cnt}b
 
 Any count may be used.  One may use viminfo's "!" option to retain bookmarks
-between vim sessions.
+between vim sessions.  See |netrw-B| for how to return to a bookmark and
+|netrw-q| for how to list them.
 
 
 CHANGING TO A BOOKMARKED DIRECTORY				*netrw-B*
@@ -863,12 +882,14 @@ To change directory back to a bookmarked directory, use
 
 	{cnt}B
 
-Any count may be used.
+Any count may be used to reference any of the bookmarks.  See |netrw-b|
+for how to bookmark a directory and |netrw-q| for how to list them.
 
 
-LISTING BOOKMARKS						*netrw-q*
+LISTING BOOKMARKS AND HISTORY					*netrw-q*
 
-Pressing "q" will list the bookmarked directories. (query)
+Pressing "q" will list the bookmarked directories and directory traversal
+history (query). (see |netrw-b|, |netrw-B|, |netrw-u|, and |netrw-U|)
 
 
 IMPROVING DIRECTORY BROWSING				*netrw-list-hack*
@@ -991,11 +1012,26 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 	   attempting to read/write your file over the network.  Please
 	   send that information to <netrw.vim>'s maintainer,
 
-		drchipNOSPAM at campbellfamily.biz - NOSPAM
+		NdrOchip at ScampbellPfamily.AbizM - NOSPAM
 
 ==============================================================================
 10. History						*netrw-history*
 
+	v52: * nonumber'ing now set for browsing buffers
+	     * when the hiding list hid all files, error messages ensued. Fixed
+	     * when browsing, swf is set, but directory is not set, when netrw
+	       was attempting to restore options, vim wanted to save a swapfile
+	       to a local directory using an url-style path.  Fixed
+	v51: * cygwin detection now automated (using windows and &shell is bash)
+	     * customizable browser "file" rejection patterns
+	     * directory history
+	     * :[range]w url  now supported (ie. netrw has a FileWriteCmd event)
+	     * error messages have a "Press <cr> to continue" to allow them
+	       to be seen
+	     * directory browser displays no longer bother the swapfile
+	     * u/U commands to go up and down the history stack
+	     * history stack may be saved with viminfo with its "!" option
+	     * bugfixes associated with unwanted [No Files] entries
 	v50: * directories now displayed using buftype=nofile; should keep the
 	       directory names as-is
 	     * attempts to remove empty "[No File]" buffers leftover
@@ -1003,8 +1039,8 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 	     * bugfix: a "caps-lock" editing difficulty left in v49 was fixed
 	     * syntax highlighting for "Showing:" the hiding list included
 	     * bookmarks can now be retained if "!" is in the viminfo option
-	v49: * will use ftp for http://.../ browsing v48: * One may use ftp to
-	       do remote host file browsing
+	v49: * will use ftp for http://.../ browsing v48:
+	     * One may use ftp to do remote host file browsing
 	     * (windows and !cygwin) remote browsing with ftp can now use
 	       the "dir" command internally to provide listings
 	     * g:netrw_keepdir now allows one to keep the initial current
@@ -1032,9 +1068,9 @@ which is loaded automatically at startup (assuming :set nocp).
 	       listings
 	     * improved unusual file and directory name handling preview
 	     * window support
-	v47: * now handles local directory browsing.  v46: * now handles
-	remote directory browsing
-	     * g:netrw_silent (if 1) will cause all transfers to be silent'd
+	v47: * now handles local directory browsing.
+	v46: * now handles remote directory browsing
+	     * g:netrw_silent (if 1) will cause all transfers to be silent
 	v45: * made the [user@]hostname:path form a bit more restrictive to
 	       better handle errors in using protocols (e.g. scp:usr@host:file
 	       was being recognized as an rcp request) v44: * changed from

runtime/doc/quickfix.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 16
+*quickfix.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -105,6 +105,14 @@ The following quickfix commands can be used:
 			Read the error file.  Just like ":cfile" but don't
 			jump to the first error.
 
+						*:cb* *:cbuffer* *E681*
+:cb[uffer] [bufnr]	Read the error list from the current buffer.
+			When [bufnr] is given it must be the number of a
+			loaded buffer.  That buffer will then be used instead
+			of the current buffer.
+			A range can be specified for the lines to be used.
+			Otherwise all lines in the buffer are used.
+
 							*:cl* *:clist*
 :cl[ist] [from] [, [to]]
 			List all errors that are valid |quickfix-valid|.
@@ -266,7 +274,58 @@ If 'shellpipe' is empty, the {errorfile} part will be omitted.  This is useful
 for compilers that write to an errorfile themselves (e.g., Manx's Amiga C).
 
 ==============================================================================
-5. Using :grep						*grep* *lid*
+5. Using :vimgrep and :grep				*grep* *lid*
+
+Vim has two ways to find matches for a pattern: Internal and external.  The
+advantage of the internal grep is that it works on all systems and uses the
+powerful Vim search patterns.  An external grep program can be used when the
+Vim grep does not do what you want.
+
+The internal method will be slower, because files are read into memory.  The
+advantages are:
+- Line separators and encoding are automatically recognized, as if a file is
+  being edited.
+- Uses Vim search patterns.  Multi-line patterns can be used.
+- When plugins are enabled: compressed and remote files can be searched.
+	|gzip| |netrw|
+- When 'hidden' is set the files are kept loaded, thus repeating a search is
+  much faster.  Uses a lot of memory though!
+
+
+5.1 using Vim's internal grep
+
+					*:vim* *:vimgrep* *E682* *E683*
+:vim[grep][!] /{pattern}/ {file} ...
+			Search for {pattern} in the files {file} ... and set
+			the error list to the matches.
+			{pattern} if a Vim search pattern.  Instead of
+			enclosing it in / any non-ID character |'isident'|
+			can be used, so long as it does not appear in
+			{pattern}.
+			'ignorecase' applies.  To overrule it use |/\c| to
+			ignore case or |/\C| to match case.  'smartcase' is
+			not used.
+			Every second or so the searched file name is displayed
+			to give you an idea of the progress made.
+			Examples: >
+				:vimgrep /an error/ *.c
+				:vimgrep /\<FileName\>/ *.h include/*
+
+:vim[grep][!] {pattern} {file} ...
+			Like above, but instead of enclosing the pattern in a
+			non-ID character use a white-separated pattern.  The
+			pattern must start with an ID character.
+			Example: >
+				:vimgrep Error *.c
+<
+						*:vimgrepa* *:vimgrepadd*
+:vimgrepa[dd][!] [/]{pattern}[/] {file} ...
+			Just like ":vimgrep", but instead of making a new list
+			of errors the matches are appended to the current
+			list.
+
+
+5.2 External grep
 
 Vim can interface with "grep" and grep-like programs (such as the GNU
 id-utils) in a similar way to its compiler integration (see |:make| above).
@@ -277,6 +336,9 @@ id-utils) in a similar way to its compiler integration (see |:make| above).
 							    *:gr* *:grep*
 :gr[ep][!] [arguments]	Just like ":make", but use 'grepprg' instead of
 			'makeprg' and 'grepformat' instead of 'errorformat'.
+			When 'grepprg' is "internal" this works like
+			|:vimgrep|.  Note that the pattern needs to be
+			enclosed in separator characters then.
 							*:grepa* *:grepadd*
 :grepa[dd][!] [arguments]
 			Just like ":grep", but instead of making a new list of
@@ -290,7 +352,7 @@ id-utils) in a similar way to its compiler integration (see |:make| above).
 			":grepadd" jumps to the first error, which is not
 			allowed with |:bufdo|.
 
-5.1 Setting up grep
+5.3 Setting up external grep
 
 If you have a standard "grep" program installed, the :grep command may work
 well with the defaults. The syntax is very similar to the standard command: >
@@ -322,7 +384,7 @@ error in |quickfix| mode.  You can then use the |:cnext|, |:clist|, etc.
 commands to see the other matches.
 
 
-5.2 Using :grep with id-utils
+5.4 Using :grep with id-utils
 
 You can set up :grep to work with the GNU id-utils like this: >
 
@@ -336,31 +398,31 @@ works just as you'd expect.
 (provided you remembered to mkid first :)
 
 
-5.3 Browsing source code with :grep
+5.5 Browsing source code with :vimgrep or :grep
 
 Using the stack of error lists that Vim keeps, you can browse your files to
 look for functions and the functions they call.  For example, suppose that you
 have to add an argument to the read_file() function.  You enter this command: >
 
-	:grep read_file *.c
+	:vimgrep /\<read_file\>/ *.c
 
 You use ":cn" to go along the list of matches and add the argument.  At one
 place you have to get the new argument from a higher level function msg(), and
 need to change that one too.  Thus you use: >
 
-	:grep msg *.c
+	:vimgrep /\<msg\>/ *.c
 
 While changing the msg() functions, you find another function that needs to
-get the argument from a higher level.  You can again use ":grep" to find these
-functions.  Once you are finished with one function, you can use >
+get the argument from a higher level.  You can again use ":vimgrep" to find
+these functions.  Once you are finished with one function, you can use >
 
 	:colder
 
 to go back to the previous one.
 
-This works like browsing a tree: ":grep" goes one level deeper, creating a
+This works like browsing a tree: ":vimgrep" goes one level deeper, creating a
 list of branches.  ":colder" goes back to the previous level.  You can mix
-this use of ":grep" and "colder" to browse all the locations in a tree-like
+this use of ":vimgrep" and "colder" to browse all the locations in a tree-like
 way.  If you do this consistently, you will find all locations without the
 need to write down a "todo" list.
 

runtime/doc/russian.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*russian.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 09
+*russian.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 22
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Vassily Ragosin
@@ -70,14 +70,5 @@ In order to use the Russian documentation, make sure you have set the
    is related to a bug in GNU gettext library and may be fixed in the future
    releases of gettext.
 
--- When using the Win32 console version of Vim you may experience a problem
-   with many Cyrillic glyphs being replaced by whitespaces for some unknown
-   reason.  Sergey Khorev suggested a registry hack to avoid this:
-
-   REGEDIT4
-
-   [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Nls\CodePage]
-   "1252"="c_1251.nls"
-
 ===============================================================================
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/starting.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 13
+*starting.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -423,8 +423,8 @@ a slash.  Thus "-R" means recovery and "-/R" readonly.
 							*-U* *E230*
 -U {gvimrc}	The file "gvimrc" is read for initializations when the GUI
 		starts.  Other GUI initializations are skipped. When {gvimrc}
-		is equal to "NONE", no file is read for initializations at
-		all.
+		is equal to "NONE", no file is read for GUI initializations at
+		all.  |gui-init|
 		Exception: Reading the system-wide menu file is always done.
 		{not in Vi}
 
@@ -1033,6 +1033,7 @@ CTRL-Z			Suspend Vim, like ":stop".
 			Command-line mode, the CTRL-Z is inserted as a normal
 			character.  In Visual mode Vim goes back to Normal
 			mode.
+			Note: if CTRL-Z undoes a change see |mswin.vim|.
 
 
 :sus[pend][!]	or			*:sus* *:suspend* *:st* *:stop*
@@ -1192,7 +1193,7 @@ This saves the current Session, and starts off the command to load another.
 			When [file] is omitted or is a number from 1 to 9, a
 			name is generated and 'viewdir' prepended.  When last
 			directory name in 'viewdir' does not exist, this
-			directory is created.
+			directory is created.			*E739*
 			An existing file is always overwritten then.  Use
 			|:loadview| to load this view again.
 			When [file] is the name of a file ('viewdir' is not
@@ -1264,7 +1265,7 @@ The viminfo file is used to store:
 - The command line history.
 - The search string history.
 - The input-line history.
-- Contents of registers.
+- Contents of non-empty registers.
 - Marks for several files.
 - File marks, pointing to locations in files.
 - Last search/substitute pattern (for 'n' and '&').

runtime/doc/syntax.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Sep 18
+*syntax.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 09
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -393,6 +393,9 @@ Force to omit the line numbers by using a zero value: >
 Go back to the default to use 'number' by deleting the variable: >
    :unlet html_number_lines
 
+Closed folds are put in the HTML as they are displayed.  If you don't want
+this, use the "zR" command before invoking 2html.
+
 By default, HTML optimized for old browsers is generated.  If you prefer using
 cascading style sheets (CSS1) for the attributes (resulting in considerably
 shorter and valid HTML 4 file), use: >
@@ -417,6 +420,16 @@ To go back to the automatic mechanism, delete the g:html_use_encoding
 variable: >
    :unlet html_use_encoding
 <
+Closed folds are kept as they are displayed.  If you don't want closed folds
+in the HTML use the |zR| command before converting.
+
+For diff mode a sequence of more than 3 filler lines is displayed as three
+lines with the middle line mentioning the total number of inserted lines.  If
+you prefer to see all the inserted lines use: >
+    :let html_whole_filler = 1
+And to go back to displaying up to three lines again: >
+    :unlet html_whole_filler
+
 					    *convert-to-XML* *convert-to-XHTML*
 An alternative is to have the script generate XHTML (XML compliant HTML).  To
 do this set the "use_xhtml" variable: >
@@ -627,6 +640,10 @@ c_no_if0		don't highlight "#if 0" blocks as comments
 c_no_cformat		don't highlight %-formats in strings
 c_no_c99		don't highlight C99 standard items
 
+When 'foldmethod' is set to "syntax" then /* */ comments and { } blocks will
+become a fold.  If you don't want comments to become a fold use: >
+	:let c_no_comment_fold = 1
+
 If you notice highlighting errors while scrolling backwards, which are fixed
 when redrawing with CTRL-L, try setting the "c_minlines" internal variable
 to a larger number: >
@@ -2115,6 +2132,9 @@ By default only R5RS keywords are highlighted and properly indented.
 
 MzScheme-specific stuff will be used if b:is_mzscheme or g:is_mzscheme
 variables are defined.
+ 
+Also scheme.vim supports keywords of the Chicken Scheme->C compiler.  Define
+b:is_chicken or g:is_chicken, if you need them.
 
 
 SDL						*sdl.vim* *sdl-syntax*

runtime/doc/tags

@@ -210,6 +210,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'fkmap'	options.txt	/*'fkmap'*
 'fl'	vi_diff.txt	/*'fl'*
 'flash'	vi_diff.txt	/*'flash'*
+'flp'	options.txt	/*'flp'*
 'fml'	options.txt	/*'fml'*
 'fmr'	options.txt	/*'fmr'*
 'fo'	options.txt	/*'fo'*
@@ -226,9 +227,12 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'foldnestmax'	options.txt	/*'foldnestmax'*
 'foldopen'	options.txt	/*'foldopen'*
 'foldtext'	options.txt	/*'foldtext'*
+'formatlistpat'	options.txt	/*'formatlistpat'*
 'formatoptions'	options.txt	/*'formatoptions'*
 'formatprg'	options.txt	/*'formatprg'*
 'fp'	options.txt	/*'fp'*
+'fs'	options.txt	/*'fs'*
+'fsync'	options.txt	/*'fsync'*
 'ft'	options.txt	/*'ft'*
 'gcr'	options.txt	/*'gcr'*
 'gd'	options.txt	/*'gd'*
@@ -756,6 +760,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 't_CV'	term.txt	/*'t_CV'*
 't_Co'	term.txt	/*'t_Co'*
 't_DL'	term.txt	/*'t_DL'*
+'t_EI'	term.txt	/*'t_EI'*
 't_F1'	term.txt	/*'t_F1'*
 't_F2'	term.txt	/*'t_F2'*
 't_F3'	term.txt	/*'t_F3'*
@@ -789,6 +794,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 't_KL'	term.txt	/*'t_KL'*
 't_RI'	term.txt	/*'t_RI'*
 't_RV'	term.txt	/*'t_RV'*
+'t_SI'	term.txt	/*'t_SI'*
 't_Sb'	term.txt	/*'t_Sb'*
 't_Sf'	term.txt	/*'t_Sf'*
 't_WP'	term.txt	/*'t_WP'*
@@ -944,6 +950,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'wildignore'	options.txt	/*'wildignore'*
 'wildmenu'	options.txt	/*'wildmenu'*
 'wildmode'	options.txt	/*'wildmode'*
+'wildoptions'	options.txt	/*'wildoptions'*
 'wim'	options.txt	/*'wim'*
 'winaltkeys'	options.txt	/*'winaltkeys'*
 'window'	vi_diff.txt	/*'window'*
@@ -958,6 +965,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 'wmh'	options.txt	/*'wmh'*
 'wmnu'	options.txt	/*'wmnu'*
 'wmw'	options.txt	/*'wmw'*
+'wop'	options.txt	/*'wop'*
 'wrap'	options.txt	/*'wrap'*
 'wrapmargin'	options.txt	/*'wrapmargin'*
 'wrapscan'	options.txt	/*'wrapscan'*
@@ -1717,6 +1725,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :call	eval.txt	/*:call*
 :cat	eval.txt	/*:cat*
 :catch	eval.txt	/*:catch*
+:cb	quickfix.txt	/*:cb*
+:cbuffer	quickfix.txt	/*:cbuffer*
 :cc	quickfix.txt	/*:cc*
 :ccl	quickfix.txt	/*:ccl*
 :cclose	quickfix.txt	/*:cclose*
@@ -1873,6 +1883,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :emenu	gui.txt	/*:emenu*
 :en	eval.txt	/*:en*
 :endf	eval.txt	/*:endf*
+:endfo	eval.txt	/*:endfo*
+:endfor	eval.txt	/*:endfor*
 :endfunction	eval.txt	/*:endfunction*
 :endif	eval.txt	/*:endif*
 :endt	eval.txt	/*:endt*
@@ -1888,6 +1900,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :execute	eval.txt	/*:execute*
 :exi	editing.txt	/*:exi*
 :exit	editing.txt	/*:exit*
+:exu	various.txt	/*:exu*
+:exusage	various.txt	/*:exusage*
 :f	editing.txt	/*:f*
 :fi	editing.txt	/*:fi*
 :file	editing.txt	/*:file*
@@ -1922,6 +1936,7 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :folddoopen	fold.txt	/*:folddoopen*
 :foldo	fold.txt	/*:foldo*
 :foldopen	fold.txt	/*:foldopen*
+:for	eval.txt	/*:for*
 :fu	eval.txt	/*:fu*
 :function	eval.txt	/*:function*
 :g	repeat.txt	/*:g*
@@ -2021,12 +2036,16 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :lefta	windows.txt	/*:lefta*
 :leftabove	windows.txt	/*:leftabove*
 :let	eval.txt	/*:let*
+:let+=	eval.txt	/*:let+=*
 :let-$	eval.txt	/*:let-$*
+:let-=	eval.txt	/*:let-=*
 :let-@	eval.txt	/*:let-@*
 :let-environment	eval.txt	/*:let-environment*
 :let-option	eval.txt	/*:let-option*
 :let-register	eval.txt	/*:let-register*
 :let-star	eval.txt	/*:let-star*
+:let-unpack	eval.txt	/*:let-unpack*
+:let.=	eval.txt	/*:let.=*
 :list	various.txt	/*:list*
 :lm	map.txt	/*:lm*
 :lmap	map.txt	/*:lmap*
@@ -2266,6 +2285,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :sa	windows.txt	/*:sa*
 :sal	windows.txt	/*:sal*
 :sall	windows.txt	/*:sall*
+:san	eval.txt	/*:san*
+:sandbox	eval.txt	/*:sandbox*
 :sargument	windows.txt	/*:sargument*
 :sav	editing.txt	/*:sav*
 :saveas	editing.txt	/*:saveas*
@@ -2506,8 +2527,14 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 :vi	editing.txt	/*:vi*
 :vie	editing.txt	/*:vie*
 :view	editing.txt	/*:view*
+:vim	quickfix.txt	/*:vim*
+:vimgrep	quickfix.txt	/*:vimgrep*
+:vimgrepa	quickfix.txt	/*:vimgrepa*
+:vimgrepadd	quickfix.txt	/*:vimgrepadd*
 :visual	editing.txt	/*:visual*
 :visual_example	visual.txt	/*:visual_example*
+:viu	various.txt	/*:viu*
+:viusage	various.txt	/*:viusage*
 :vm	map.txt	/*:vm*
 :vmap	map.txt	/*:vmap*
 :vmap_l	map.txt	/*:vmap_l*
@@ -2692,6 +2719,8 @@ $VIMRUNTIME	starting.txt	/*$VIMRUNTIME*
 <amatch>	cmdline.txt	/*<amatch>*
 <args>	map.txt	/*<args>*
 <bang>	map.txt	/*<bang>*
+<buffer=N>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=N>*
+<buffer=abuf>	autocmd.txt	/*<buffer=abuf>*
 <cfile>	cmdline.txt	/*<cfile>*
 <character>	intro.txt	/*<character>*
 <count>	map.txt	/*<count>*
@@ -2910,6 +2939,9 @@ DOS	os_dos.txt	/*DOS*
 DOS-format	editing.txt	/*DOS-format*
 DOS-format-write	editing.txt	/*DOS-format-write*
 DPMI	os_msdos.txt	/*DPMI*
+Dictionaries	eval.txt	/*Dictionaries*
+Dictionary	eval.txt	/*Dictionary*
+Dictionary-function	eval.txt	/*Dictionary-function*
 Digraphs	digraph.txt	/*Digraphs*
 E	motion.txt	/*E*
 E10	message.txt	/*E10*
@@ -3544,12 +3576,72 @@ E677	eval.txt	/*E677*
 E678	pattern.txt	/*E678*
 E679	syntax.txt	/*E679*
 E68	pattern.txt	/*E68*
+E680	autocmd.txt	/*E680*
+E681	quickfix.txt	/*E681*
+E682	quickfix.txt	/*E682*
+E683	quickfix.txt	/*E683*
+E684	eval.txt	/*E684*
+E685	message.txt	/*E685*
+E686	eval.txt	/*E686*
+E687	eval.txt	/*E687*
+E688	eval.txt	/*E688*
+E689	eval.txt	/*E689*
 E69	pattern.txt	/*E69*
+E690	eval.txt	/*E690*
+E691	eval.txt	/*E691*
+E692	eval.txt	/*E692*
+E693	eval.txt	/*E693*
+E694	eval.txt	/*E694*
+E695	eval.txt	/*E695*
+E696	eval.txt	/*E696*
+E697	eval.txt	/*E697*
+E698	eval.txt	/*E698*
+E699	eval.txt	/*E699*
 E70	pattern.txt	/*E70*
+E700	eval.txt	/*E700*
+E701	eval.txt	/*E701*
+E702	eval.txt	/*E702*
+E703	eval.txt	/*E703*
+E704	eval.txt	/*E704*
+E705	eval.txt	/*E705*
+E706	eval.txt	/*E706*
+E707	eval.txt	/*E707*
+E708	eval.txt	/*E708*
+E709	eval.txt	/*E709*
 E71	pattern.txt	/*E71*
+E710	eval.txt	/*E710*
+E711	eval.txt	/*E711*
+E712	eval.txt	/*E712*
+E713	eval.txt	/*E713*
+E714	eval.txt	/*E714*
+E715	eval.txt	/*E715*
+E716	eval.txt	/*E716*
+E717	eval.txt	/*E717*
+E718	eval.txt	/*E718*
+E719	eval.txt	/*E719*
 E72	message.txt	/*E72*
+E720	eval.txt	/*E720*
+E721	eval.txt	/*E721*
+E722	eval.txt	/*E722*
+E723	eval.txt	/*E723*
+E724	eval.txt	/*E724*
+E725	eval.txt	/*E725*
+E726	eval.txt	/*E726*
+E727	eval.txt	/*E727*
+E728	eval.txt	/*E728*
+E729	eval.txt	/*E729*
 E73	tagsrch.txt	/*E73*
+E730	eval.txt	/*E730*
+E731	eval.txt	/*E731*
+E732	eval.txt	/*E732*
+E733	eval.txt	/*E733*
+E735	eval.txt	/*E735*
+E736	eval.txt	/*E736*
+E737	eval.txt	/*E737*
+E738	eval.txt	/*E738*
+E739	starting.txt	/*E739*
 E74	message.txt	/*E74*
+E740	eval.txt	/*E740*
 E75	vi_diff.txt	/*E75*
 E76	pattern.txt	/*E76*
 E77	message.txt	/*E77*
@@ -3608,6 +3700,7 @@ FocusGained	autocmd.txt	/*FocusGained*
 FocusLost	autocmd.txt	/*FocusLost*
 Folding	fold.txt	/*Folding*
 FuncUndefined	autocmd.txt	/*FuncUndefined*
+Funcref	eval.txt	/*Funcref*
 G	motion.txt	/*G*
 GNOME	gui_x11.txt	/*GNOME*
 GTK	gui_x11.txt	/*GTK*
@@ -3634,6 +3727,7 @@ KVim	gui_x11.txt	/*KVim*
 Korean	mbyte.txt	/*Korean*
 L	motion.txt	/*L*
 Linux-backspace	options.txt	/*Linux-backspace*
+List	eval.txt	/*List*
 M	motion.txt	/*M*
 MDI	starting.txt	/*MDI*
 MS-DOS	os_msdos.txt	/*MS-DOS*
@@ -3907,6 +4001,9 @@ a'	motion.txt	/*a'*
 a(	motion.txt	/*a(*
 a)	motion.txt	/*a)*
 a4	print.txt	/*a4*
+a:0	eval.txt	/*a:0*
+a:000	eval.txt	/*a:000*
+a:1	eval.txt	/*a:1*
 a:firstline	eval.txt	/*a:firstline*
 a:lastline	eval.txt	/*a:lastline*
 a:var	eval.txt	/*a:var*
@@ -3925,6 +4022,7 @@ abel.vim	syntax.txt	/*abel.vim*
 active-buffer	windows.txt	/*active-buffer*
 ada-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ada-syntax*
 ada.vim	syntax.txt	/*ada.vim*
+add()	eval.txt	/*add()*
 add-filetype-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*add-filetype-plugin*
 add-global-plugin	usr_05.txt	/*add-global-plugin*
 add-local-help	usr_05.txt	/*add-local-help*
@@ -3989,6 +4087,9 @@ auto-format	change.txt	/*auto-format*
 auto-setting	options.txt	/*auto-setting*
 auto-shortname	editing.txt	/*auto-shortname*
 autocmd-<>	tips.txt	/*autocmd-<>*
+autocmd-buffer-local	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-buffer-local*
+autocmd-buflocal	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-buflocal*
+autocmd-changes	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-changes*
 autocmd-define	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-define*
 autocmd-events	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-events*
 autocmd-execute	autocmd.txt	/*autocmd-execute*
@@ -4052,6 +4153,7 @@ book	intro.txt	/*book*
 boolean	options.txt	/*boolean*
 break-finally	eval.txt	/*break-finally*
 browse()	eval.txt	/*browse()*
+browsedir()	eval.txt	/*browsedir()*
 browsefilter	editing.txt	/*browsefilter*
 bufexists()	eval.txt	/*bufexists()*
 buffer-hidden	windows.txt	/*buffer-hidden*
@@ -4147,6 +4249,7 @@ c_CTRL-^	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-^*
 c_CTRL-_	cmdline.txt	/*c_CTRL-_*
 c_digraph	cmdline.txt	/*c_digraph*
 c_wildchar	cmdline.txt	/*c_wildchar*
+call()	eval.txt	/*call()*
 carriage-return	intro.txt	/*carriage-return*
 case	change.txt	/*case*
 catch-all	eval.txt	/*catch-all*
@@ -4158,6 +4261,7 @@ cc	change.txt	/*cc*
 ch-syntax	syntax.txt	/*ch-syntax*
 ch.vim	syntax.txt	/*ch.vim*
 change-list-jumps	motion.txt	/*change-list-jumps*
+change-tabs	change.txt	/*change-tabs*
 change.txt	change.txt	/*change.txt*
 changed-5.1	version5.txt	/*changed-5.1*
 changed-5.2	version5.txt	/*changed-5.2*
@@ -4248,11 +4352,13 @@ conversion-server	mbyte.txt	/*conversion-server*
 convert-to-HTML	syntax.txt	/*convert-to-HTML*
 convert-to-XHTML	syntax.txt	/*convert-to-XHTML*
 convert-to-XML	syntax.txt	/*convert-to-XML*
+copy()	eval.txt	/*copy()*
 copy-diffs	diff.txt	/*copy-diffs*
 copy-move	change.txt	/*copy-move*
 copying	uganda.txt	/*copying*
 copyright	uganda.txt	/*copyright*
 count	intro.txt	/*count*
+count()	eval.txt	/*count()*
 count-bytes	tips.txt	/*count-bytes*
 count-items	tips.txt	/*count-items*
 count-variable	eval.txt	/*count-variable*
@@ -4261,6 +4367,7 @@ cp-default	version5.txt	/*cp-default*
 cpo-!	options.txt	/*cpo-!*
 cpo-$	options.txt	/*cpo-$*
 cpo-%	options.txt	/*cpo-%*
+cpo-+	options.txt	/*cpo-+*
 cpo-<	options.txt	/*cpo-<*
 cpo-A	options.txt	/*cpo-A*
 cpo-B	options.txt	/*cpo-B*
@@ -4294,7 +4401,6 @@ cpo-o	options.txt	/*cpo-o*
 cpo-p	options.txt	/*cpo-p*
 cpo-r	options.txt	/*cpo-r*
 cpo-s	options.txt	/*cpo-s*
-cpo-star	options.txt	/*cpo-star*
 cpo-t	options.txt	/*cpo-t*
 cpo-u	options.txt	/*cpo-u*
 cpo-v	options.txt	/*cpo-v*
@@ -4380,6 +4486,7 @@ debugger-integration	debugger.txt	/*debugger-integration*
 debugger-support	debugger.txt	/*debugger-support*
 debugger.txt	debugger.txt	/*debugger.txt*
 dec-mouse	options.txt	/*dec-mouse*
+deepcopy()	eval.txt	/*deepcopy()*
 definition-search	tagsrch.txt	/*definition-search*
 definitions	intro.txt	/*definitions*
 delete()	eval.txt	/*delete()*
@@ -4407,6 +4514,7 @@ diW	motion.txt	/*diW*
 dialog	gui_w32.txt	/*dialog*
 dialogs-added	version5.txt	/*dialogs-added*
 dib	motion.txt	/*dib*
+dict-modification	eval.txt	/*dict-modification*
 did_filetype()	eval.txt	/*did_filetype()*
 diff	diff.txt	/*diff*
 diff-diffexpr	diff.txt	/*diff-diffexpr*
@@ -4414,6 +4522,8 @@ diff-mode	diff.txt	/*diff-mode*
 diff-options	diff.txt	/*diff-options*
 diff-patchexpr	diff.txt	/*diff-patchexpr*
 diff.txt	diff.txt	/*diff.txt*
+diff_filler()	eval.txt	/*diff_filler()*
+diff_hlID()	eval.txt	/*diff_hlID()*
 digraph-arg	change.txt	/*digraph-arg*
 digraph-encoding	digraph.txt	/*digraph-encoding*
 digraph-table	digraph.txt	/*digraph-table*
@@ -4480,6 +4590,7 @@ eiffel.vim	syntax.txt	/*eiffel.vim*
 emacs-keys	tips.txt	/*emacs-keys*
 emacs-tags	tagsrch.txt	/*emacs-tags*
 emacs_tags	tagsrch.txt	/*emacs_tags*
+empty()	eval.txt	/*empty()*
 encoding-names	mbyte.txt	/*encoding-names*
 encoding-table	mbyte.txt	/*encoding-table*
 encoding-values	mbyte.txt	/*encoding-values*
@@ -4507,6 +4618,7 @@ escape	intro.txt	/*escape*
 escape()	eval.txt	/*escape()*
 escape-bar	version4.txt	/*escape-bar*
 eval	eval.txt	/*eval*
+eval()	eval.txt	/*eval()*
 eval-examples	eval.txt	/*eval-examples*
 eval-sandbox	eval.txt	/*eval-sandbox*
 eval.txt	eval.txt	/*eval.txt*
@@ -4579,11 +4691,14 @@ expr->=	eval.txt	/*expr->=*
 expr->=#	eval.txt	/*expr->=#*
 expr->=?	eval.txt	/*expr->=?*
 expr->?	eval.txt	/*expr->?*
+expr-[:]	eval.txt	/*expr-[:]*
 expr-[]	eval.txt	/*expr-[]*
 expr-barbar	eval.txt	/*expr-barbar*
+expr-entry	eval.txt	/*expr-entry*
 expr-env	eval.txt	/*expr-env*
 expr-env-expand	eval.txt	/*expr-env-expand*
 expr-function	eval.txt	/*expr-function*
+expr-is	eval.txt	/*expr-is*
 expr-nesting	eval.txt	/*expr-nesting*
 expr-number	eval.txt	/*expr-number*
 expr-option	eval.txt	/*expr-option*
@@ -4607,6 +4722,7 @@ expression	eval.txt	/*expression*
 expression-commands	eval.txt	/*expression-commands*
 expression-syntax	eval.txt	/*expression-syntax*
 exrc	starting.txt	/*exrc*
+extend()	eval.txt	/*extend()*
 extension-removal	cmdline.txt	/*extension-removal*
 extensions-improvements	todo.txt	/*extensions-improvements*
 f	motion.txt	/*f*
@@ -4641,6 +4757,7 @@ filetypedetect-changed	version6.txt	/*filetypedetect-changed*
 filetypes	filetype.txt	/*filetypes*
 filewritable()	eval.txt	/*filewritable()*
 filter	change.txt	/*filter*
+filter()	eval.txt	/*filter()*
 find-manpage	usr_12.txt	/*find-manpage*
 find-replace	usr_10.txt	/*find-replace*
 finddir()	eval.txt	/*finddir()*
@@ -4688,6 +4805,7 @@ foldlevel()	eval.txt	/*foldlevel()*
 foldlevel-variable	eval.txt	/*foldlevel-variable*
 foldstart-variable	eval.txt	/*foldstart-variable*
 foldtext()	eval.txt	/*foldtext()*
+foldtextresult()	eval.txt	/*foldtextresult()*
 font-sizes	gui_x11.txt	/*font-sizes*
 fontset	mbyte.txt	/*fontset*
 foreground()	eval.txt	/*foreground()*
@@ -4712,6 +4830,7 @@ ftplugin-name	usr_05.txt	/*ftplugin-name*
 ftplugin-overrule	filetype.txt	/*ftplugin-overrule*
 ftplugin-special	usr_41.txt	/*ftplugin-special*
 ftplugins	usr_05.txt	/*ftplugins*
+function()	eval.txt	/*function()*
 function-argument	eval.txt	/*function-argument*
 function-key	intro.txt	/*function-key*
 function-list	usr_41.txt	/*function-list*
@@ -4787,12 +4906,14 @@ g`a	motion.txt	/*g`a*
 ga	various.txt	/*ga*
 gd	pattern.txt	/*gd*
 ge	motion.txt	/*ge*
+get	eval.txt	/*get*
 getbufvar()	eval.txt	/*getbufvar()*
 getchar()	eval.txt	/*getchar()*
 getcharmod()	eval.txt	/*getcharmod()*
 getcmdline()	eval.txt	/*getcmdline()*
 getcmdpos()	eval.txt	/*getcmdpos()*
 getcwd()	eval.txt	/*getcwd()*
+getfontname()	eval.txt	/*getfontname()*
 getfperm()	eval.txt	/*getfperm()*
 getfsize()	eval.txt	/*getfsize()*
 getftime()	eval.txt	/*getftime()*
@@ -4915,6 +5036,7 @@ hangul	hangulin.txt	/*hangul*
 hangulin.txt	hangulin.txt	/*hangulin.txt*
 has()	eval.txt	/*has()*
 has-patch	eval.txt	/*has-patch*
+has_key()	eval.txt	/*has_key()*
 haskell-syntax	syntax.txt	/*haskell-syntax*
 haskell.vim	syntax.txt	/*haskell.vim*
 hasmapto()	eval.txt	/*hasmapto()*
@@ -4922,6 +5044,7 @@ hebrew	hebrew.txt	/*hebrew*
 hebrew.txt	hebrew.txt	/*hebrew.txt*
 help	various.txt	/*help*
 help-context	help.txt	/*help-context*
+help-tags	tags	1
 help-translated	various.txt	/*help-translated*
 help-xterm-window	various.txt	/*help-xterm-window*
 help.txt	help.txt	/*help.txt*
@@ -5149,6 +5272,7 @@ indent-expression	indent.txt	/*indent-expression*
 indent.txt	indent.txt	/*indent.txt*
 indentkeys-format	indent.txt	/*indentkeys-format*
 index	index.txt	/*index*
+index()	eval.txt	/*index()*
 index.txt	index.txt	/*index.txt*
 info-message	starting.txt	/*info-message*
 inform-syntax	syntax.txt	/*inform-syntax*
@@ -5168,6 +5292,7 @@ ins-special-keys	insert.txt	/*ins-special-keys*
 ins-special-special	insert.txt	/*ins-special-special*
 ins-textwidth	insert.txt	/*ins-textwidth*
 insert	insert.txt	/*insert*
+insert()	eval.txt	/*insert()*
 insert-index	index.txt	/*insert-index*
 insert.txt	insert.txt	/*insert.txt*
 insert_expand	insert.txt	/*insert_expand*
@@ -5197,6 +5322,7 @@ java-cinoptions	indent.txt	/*java-cinoptions*
 java-indenting	indent.txt	/*java-indenting*
 java-syntax	syntax.txt	/*java-syntax*
 java.vim	syntax.txt	/*java.vim*
+join()	eval.txt	/*join()*
 jsbterm-mouse	options.txt	/*jsbterm-mouse*
 jtags	tagsrch.txt	/*jtags*
 jump-motions	motion.txt	/*jump-motions*
@@ -5210,11 +5336,13 @@ key-codes	intro.txt	/*key-codes*
 key-codes-changed	version4.txt	/*key-codes-changed*
 key-mapping	map.txt	/*key-mapping*
 key-notation	intro.txt	/*key-notation*
+key-variable	eval.txt	/*key-variable*
 keycodes	intro.txt	/*keycodes*
 keymap-file-format	mbyte.txt	/*keymap-file-format*
 keymap-hebrew	mbyte.txt	/*keymap-hebrew*
 keypad-0	intro.txt	/*keypad-0*
 keypad-9	intro.txt	/*keypad-9*
+keypad-comma	term.txt	/*keypad-comma*
 keypad-divide	intro.txt	/*keypad-divide*
 keypad-end	intro.txt	/*keypad-end*
 keypad-enter	intro.txt	/*keypad-enter*
@@ -5225,6 +5353,7 @@ keypad-page-down	intro.txt	/*keypad-page-down*
 keypad-page-up	intro.txt	/*keypad-page-up*
 keypad-plus	intro.txt	/*keypad-plus*
 keypad-point	intro.txt	/*keypad-point*
+keys()	eval.txt	/*keys()*
 known-bugs	todo.txt	/*known-bugs*
 l	motion.txt	/*l*
 l:var	eval.txt	/*l:var*
@@ -5237,6 +5366,7 @@ last-position-jump	eval.txt	/*last-position-jump*
 last_buffer_nr()	eval.txt	/*last_buffer_nr()*
 lc_time-variable	eval.txt	/*lc_time-variable*
 left-right-motions	motion.txt	/*left-right-motions*
+len()	eval.txt	/*len()*
 less	various.txt	/*less*
 letter	print.txt	/*letter*
 lex-syntax	syntax.txt	/*lex-syntax*
@@ -5255,6 +5385,9 @@ linewise	motion.txt	/*linewise*
 linewise-register	change.txt	/*linewise-register*
 linewise-visual	visual.txt	/*linewise-visual*
 lispindent()	eval.txt	/*lispindent()*
+list-identity	eval.txt	/*list-identity*
+list-index	eval.txt	/*list-index*
+list-modification	eval.txt	/*list-modification*
 list-repeat	windows.txt	/*list-repeat*
 lite-syntax	syntax.txt	/*lite-syntax*
 lite.vim	syntax.txt	/*lite.vim*
@@ -5266,6 +5399,7 @@ local-additions	help.txt	/*local-additions*
 local-function	eval.txt	/*local-function*
 local-options	options.txt	/*local-options*
 local-variable	eval.txt	/*local-variable*
+local-variables	eval.txt	/*local-variables*
 locale	mbyte.txt	/*locale*
 locale-name	mbyte.txt	/*locale-name*
 localtime()	eval.txt	/*localtime()*
@@ -5298,6 +5432,7 @@ make-syntax	syntax.txt	/*make-syntax*
 make.vim	syntax.txt	/*make.vim*
 man-plugin	filetype.txt	/*man-plugin*
 manual-copyright	usr_01.txt	/*manual-copyright*
+map()	eval.txt	/*map()*
 map-<SID>	map.txt	/*map-<SID>*
 map-ambiguous	map.txt	/*map-ambiguous*
 map-backtick	tips.txt	/*map-backtick*
@@ -5335,6 +5470,7 @@ match-highlight	pattern.txt	/*match-highlight*
 matchend()	eval.txt	/*matchend()*
 matchit-install	usr_05.txt	/*matchit-install*
 matchstr()	eval.txt	/*matchstr()*
+max()	eval.txt	/*max()*
 mbyte-IME	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-IME*
 mbyte-XIM	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-XIM*
 mbyte-conversion	mbyte.txt	/*mbyte-conversion*
@@ -5358,6 +5494,7 @@ message-history	message.txt	/*message-history*
 message.txt	message.txt	/*message.txt*
 messages	message.txt	/*messages*
 meta	intro.txt	/*meta*
+min()	eval.txt	/*min()*
 minimal-features	os_msdos.txt	/*minimal-features*
 missing-commands	vi_diff.txt	/*missing-commands*
 missing-options	vi_diff.txt	/*missing-options*
@@ -5377,11 +5514,13 @@ moo-syntax	syntax.txt	/*moo-syntax*
 moo.vim	syntax.txt	/*moo.vim*
 more-compatible	version5.txt	/*more-compatible*
 more-prompt	message.txt	/*more-prompt*
+more-variables	eval.txt	/*more-variables*
 motion.txt	motion.txt	/*motion.txt*
 mouse-mode-table	term.txt	/*mouse-mode-table*
 mouse-overview	term.txt	/*mouse-overview*
 mouse-swap-buttons	term.txt	/*mouse-swap-buttons*
 mouse-using	term.txt	/*mouse-using*
+movement	intro.txt	/*movement*
 ms-dos	os_msdos.txt	/*ms-dos*
 msdos	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos*
 msdos-arrows	os_msdos.txt	/*msdos-arrows*
@@ -5453,6 +5592,7 @@ netrw-B	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-B*
 netrw-D	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-D*
 netrw-R	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-R*
 netrw-S	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-S*
+netrw-U	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-U*
 netrw-activate	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-activate*
 netrw-b	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-b*
 netrw-bookmark	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-bookmark*
@@ -5498,6 +5638,7 @@ netrw-ref	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-ref*
 netrw-rename	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-rename*
 netrw-s	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-s*
 netrw-transparent	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-transparent*
+netrw-u	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-u*
 netrw-uidpass	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-uidpass*
 netrw-urls	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-urls*
 netrw-v	pi_netrw.txt	/*netrw-v*
@@ -5523,7 +5664,6 @@ new-cmdwin	version6.txt	/*new-cmdwin*
 new-color-schemes	version6.txt	/*new-color-schemes*
 new-commands	version5.txt	/*new-commands*
 new-commands-5.4	version5.txt	/*new-commands-5.4*
-new-data-types	version7.txt	/*new-data-types*
 new-debug-itf	version6.txt	/*new-debug-itf*
 new-debug-mode	version6.txt	/*new-debug-mode*
 new-diff-mode	version6.txt	/*new-diff-mode*
@@ -5544,6 +5684,7 @@ new-indent-flex	version6.txt	/*new-indent-flex*
 new-items-6	version6.txt	/*new-items-6*
 new-items-7	version7.txt	/*new-items-7*
 new-line-continuation	version5.txt	/*new-line-continuation*
+new-manpage-trans	version7.txt	/*new-manpage-trans*
 new-multi-byte	version5.txt	/*new-multi-byte*
 new-multi-lang	version6.txt	/*new-multi-lang*
 new-network-files	version6.txt	/*new-network-files*
@@ -5565,7 +5706,9 @@ new-user-defined	version5.txt	/*new-user-defined*
 new-user-manual	version6.txt	/*new-user-manual*
 new-utf-8	version6.txt	/*new-utf-8*
 new-vertsplit	version6.txt	/*new-vertsplit*
+new-vim-script	version7.txt	/*new-vim-script*
 new-vim-server	version6.txt	/*new-vim-server*
+new-vimgrep	version7.txt	/*new-vimgrep*
 new-virtedit	version6.txt	/*new-virtedit*
 news	intro.txt	/*news*
 nextnonblank()	eval.txt	/*nextnonblank()*
@@ -5579,6 +5722,7 @@ notepad	gui_w32.txt	/*notepad*
 nr2char()	eval.txt	/*nr2char()*
 nroff-syntax	syntax.txt	/*nroff-syntax*
 nroff.vim	syntax.txt	/*nroff.vim*
+numbered-function	eval.txt	/*numbered-function*
 o	insert.txt	/*o*
 o_CTRL-V	motion.txt	/*o_CTRL-V*
 o_V	motion.txt	/*o_V*
@@ -5681,6 +5825,7 @@ phtml-syntax	syntax.txt	/*phtml-syntax*
 phtml.vim	syntax.txt	/*phtml.vim*
 pi_expl.txt	pi_expl.txt	/*pi_expl.txt*
 pi_gzip.txt	pi_gzip.txt	/*pi_gzip.txt*
+pi_netrw.txt	pi_netrw.txt	/*pi_netrw.txt*
 pi_spec.txt	pi_spec.txt	/*pi_spec.txt*
 plugin	usr_05.txt	/*plugin*
 plugin-details	filetype.txt	/*plugin-details*
@@ -5794,6 +5939,7 @@ quotes.txt	quotes.txt	/*quotes.txt*
 quotestar	gui.txt	/*quotestar*
 quote~	change.txt	/*quote~*
 r	change.txt	/*r*
+range()	eval.txt	/*range()*
 raw-terminal-mode	term.txt	/*raw-terminal-mode*
 rcp	pi_netrw.txt	/*rcp*
 read-messages	insert.txt	/*read-messages*
@@ -5822,6 +5968,7 @@ remote_foreground()	eval.txt	/*remote_foreground()*
 remote_peek()	eval.txt	/*remote_peek()*
 remote_read()	eval.txt	/*remote_read()*
 remote_send()	eval.txt	/*remote_send()*
+remove()	eval.txt	/*remove()*
 remove-filetype	filetype.txt	/*remove-filetype*
 remove-option-flags	options.txt	/*remove-option-flags*
 rename()	eval.txt	/*rename()*
@@ -5836,6 +5983,7 @@ restore-position	tips.txt	/*restore-position*
 restricted-mode	starting.txt	/*restricted-mode*
 retab-example	change.txt	/*retab-example*
 rethrow	eval.txt	/*rethrow*
+reverse()	eval.txt	/*reverse()*
 rexx-syntax	syntax.txt	/*rexx-syntax*
 rexx.vim	syntax.txt	/*rexx.vim*
 rgb.txt	gui_w32.txt	/*rgb.txt*
@@ -5907,6 +6055,7 @@ save-settings	starting.txt	/*save-settings*
 scheme-syntax	syntax.txt	/*scheme-syntax*
 scheme.vim	syntax.txt	/*scheme.vim*
 scp	pi_netrw.txt	/*scp*
+script	usr_41.txt	/*script*
 script-here	if_perl.txt	/*script-here*
 script-local	map.txt	/*script-local*
 script-variable	eval.txt	/*script-variable*
@@ -5931,10 +6080,12 @@ search-commands	pattern.txt	/*search-commands*
 search-offset	pattern.txt	/*search-offset*
 search-pattern	pattern.txt	/*search-pattern*
 search-range	pattern.txt	/*search-range*
+search-replace	change.txt	/*search-replace*
 searchpair()	eval.txt	/*searchpair()*
 section	motion.txt	/*section*
 sed-syntax	syntax.txt	/*sed-syntax*
 sed.vim	syntax.txt	/*sed.vim*
+self	eval.txt	/*self*
 send-money	sponsor.txt	/*send-money*
 send-to-menu	gui_w32.txt	/*send-to-menu*
 sendto	gui_w32.txt	/*sendto*
@@ -5977,6 +6128,7 @@ sniff	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff*
 sniff-commands	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-commands*
 sniff-compiling	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-compiling*
 sniff-intro	if_sniff.txt	/*sniff-intro*
+sort()	eval.txt	/*sort()*
 space	intro.txt	/*space*
 spec-customizing	pi_spec.txt	/*spec-customizing*
 spec-how-to-use-it	pi_spec.txt	/*spec-how-to-use-it*
@@ -5987,6 +6139,7 @@ spec_chglog_prepend	pi_spec.txt	/*spec_chglog_prepend*
 spec_chglog_release_info	pi_spec.txt	/*spec_chglog_release_info*
 special-buffers	windows.txt	/*special-buffers*
 speed-up	tips.txt	/*speed-up*
+split()	eval.txt	/*split()*
 splitfind	windows.txt	/*splitfind*
 splitview	windows.txt	/*splitview*
 sponsor	sponsor.txt	/*sponsor*
@@ -6015,6 +6168,7 @@ status-line	windows.txt	/*status-line*
 statusmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*statusmsg-variable*
 strftime()	eval.txt	/*strftime()*
 stridx()	eval.txt	/*stridx()*
+string()	eval.txt	/*string()*
 string-match	eval.txt	/*string-match*
 strlen()	eval.txt	/*strlen()*
 strpart()	eval.txt	/*strpart()*
@@ -6074,6 +6228,7 @@ t_CS	term.txt	/*t_CS*
 t_CV	term.txt	/*t_CV*
 t_Co	term.txt	/*t_Co*
 t_DL	term.txt	/*t_DL*
+t_EI	term.txt	/*t_EI*
 t_F1	term.txt	/*t_F1*
 t_F2	term.txt	/*t_F2*
 t_F3	term.txt	/*t_F3*
@@ -6107,6 +6262,7 @@ t_KK	term.txt	/*t_KK*
 t_KL	term.txt	/*t_KL*
 t_RI	term.txt	/*t_RI*
 t_RV	term.txt	/*t_RV*
+t_SI	term.txt	/*t_SI*
 t_Sb	term.txt	/*t_Sb*
 t_Sf	term.txt	/*t_Sf*
 t_WP	term.txt	/*t_WP*
@@ -6289,6 +6445,8 @@ term.txt	term.txt	/*term.txt*
 termcap	term.txt	/*termcap*
 termcap-changed	version4.txt	/*termcap-changed*
 termcap-colors	term.txt	/*termcap-colors*
+termcap-cursor-color	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-color*
+termcap-cursor-shape	term.txt	/*termcap-cursor-shape*
 termcap-syntax	syntax.txt	/*termcap-syntax*
 termcap-title	term.txt	/*termcap-title*
 terminal-colors	os_unix.txt	/*terminal-colors*
@@ -6417,6 +6575,7 @@ v:foldend	eval.txt	/*v:foldend*
 v:foldlevel	eval.txt	/*v:foldlevel*
 v:foldstart	eval.txt	/*v:foldstart*
 v:insertmode	eval.txt	/*v:insertmode*
+v:key	eval.txt	/*v:key*
 v:lang	eval.txt	/*v:lang*
 v:lc_time	eval.txt	/*v:lc_time*
 v:lnum	eval.txt	/*v:lnum*
@@ -6429,6 +6588,7 @@ v:statusmsg	eval.txt	/*v:statusmsg*
 v:termresponse	eval.txt	/*v:termresponse*
 v:this_session	eval.txt	/*v:this_session*
 v:throwpoint	eval.txt	/*v:throwpoint*
+v:val	eval.txt	/*v:val*
 v:var	eval.txt	/*v:var*
 v:version	eval.txt	/*v:version*
 v:warningmsg	eval.txt	/*v:warningmsg*
@@ -6438,6 +6598,7 @@ v_:	cmdline.txt	/*v_:*
 v_<	change.txt	/*v_<*
 v_<BS>	change.txt	/*v_<BS>*
 v_<Del>	change.txt	/*v_<Del>*
+v_<Esc>	visual.txt	/*v_<Esc>*
 v_=	change.txt	/*v_=*
 v_>	change.txt	/*v_>*
 v_C	change.txt	/*v_C*
@@ -6531,6 +6692,7 @@ v_v	visual.txt	/*v_v*
 v_x	change.txt	/*v_x*
 v_y	change.txt	/*v_y*
 v_~	change.txt	/*v_~*
+val-variable	eval.txt	/*val-variable*
 variables	eval.txt	/*variables*
 various	various.txt	/*various*
 various-cmds	various.txt	/*various-cmds*
@@ -6556,6 +6718,7 @@ version4.txt	version4.txt	/*version4.txt*
 version5.txt	version5.txt	/*version5.txt*
 version6.txt	version6.txt	/*version6.txt*
 version7.txt	version7.txt	/*version7.txt*
+vi	intro.txt	/*vi*
 vi-differences	vi_diff.txt	/*vi-differences*
 vi:	options.txt	/*vi:*
 vi_diff.txt	vi_diff.txt	/*vi_diff.txt*
@@ -6632,6 +6795,7 @@ w:var	eval.txt	/*w:var*
 warningmsg-variable	eval.txt	/*warningmsg-variable*
 white-space	pattern.txt	/*white-space*
 whitespace	pattern.txt	/*whitespace*
+wildcard	editing.txt	/*wildcard*
 win16-!start	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-!start*
 win16-clipboard	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-clipboard*
 win16-colors	gui_w16.txt	/*win16-colors*
@@ -6805,6 +6969,7 @@ zz	scroll.txt	/*zz*
 {	motion.txt	/*{*
 {Visual}	intro.txt	/*{Visual}*
 {address}	cmdline.txt	/*{address}*
+{arglist}	editing.txt	/*{arglist}*
 {char1-char2}	intro.txt	/*{char1-char2}*
 {event}	autocmd.txt	/*{event}*
 {file}	editing.txt	/*{file}*

runtime/doc/tagsrch.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 23
+*tagsrch.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 02
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ tag, you will get the telnet prompt instead.  Most versions of telnet allow
 changing or disabling the default escape key.  See the telnet man page.  You
 can 'telnet -E {Hostname}' to disable the escape character, or 'telnet -e
 {EscapeCharacter} {Hostname}' to specify another escape character.  If
-possible, try to use "rsh" instead of "telnet" to avoid this problem.
+possible, try to use "ssh" instead of "telnet" to avoid this problem.
 
 							*tag-priority*
 When there are multiple matches for a tag, this priority is used:

runtime/doc/term.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jan 09
+*term.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 07
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -275,6 +275,8 @@ Added by Vim (there are no standard codes for these):
 	t_IE	set icon text end				*t_IE* *'t_IE'*
 	t_WP	set window position (Y, X) in pixels		*t_WP* *'t_WP'*
 	t_WS	set window size (height, width) in characters	*t_WS* *'t_WS'*
+	t_SI    start insert mode (bar cursor shape)            *t_SI* *'t_SI'*
+	t_EI    end insert mode (block cursor shape)            *t_EI* *'t_EI'*
 	t_RV	request terminal version string (for xterm)	*t_RV* *'t_RV'*
 		|xterm-8bit| |v:termresponse| |'ttymouse'| |xterm-codes|
 
@@ -372,9 +374,13 @@ If your terminal supports both inversion and standout mode, you can see two
 different modes.  If your terminal supports only one of the modes, both will
 look the same.
 
+							*keypad-comma*
 The keypad keys, when they are not mapped, behave like the equivalent normal
-key.
-							*xterm-codes*
+key.  There is one exception: if you have a comma on the keypad instead of a
+decimal point, Vim will use a dot anyway.  Use these mappings to fix that: >
+	:noremap <kPoint> ,
+	:noremap! <kPoint> ,
+<							*xterm-codes*
 There is a special trick to obtain the key codes which currently only works
 for xterm.  When |t_RV| is defined and a response is received which indicates
 an xterm with patchlevel 141 or higher, Vim uses special escape sequences to
@@ -391,6 +397,19 @@ When it is non-zero, the 't_AB' and 't_AF' options are used to set the color.
 If one of these is not available, 't_Sb' and 't_Sf' are used.  't_me' is used
 to reset to the default colors.
 
+				*termcap-cursor-shape* *termcap-cursor-color*
+When Vim enters Insert mode the 't_SI' escape sequence is sent.  When leaving
+Insert mode 't_EI' is used.  But only if both are defined.  This can be used
+to change the shape or color of the cursor in Insert mode.  These are not
+standard termcap/terminfo entries, you need to set them yourself.
+Example for an xterm, this changes the color of the cursor: >
+    if &term =~ "xterm"
+	let &t_SI = "\<Esc>]12;purple\x7"
+	let &t_EI = "\<Esc>]12;blue\x7"
+    endif
+NOTE: When Vim exits the shape for Normal mode will remain.  The shape from
+before Vim started will not be restored.
+
 							*termcap-title*
 The 't_ts' and 't_fs' options are used to set the window title if the terminal
 allows title setting via sending strings.  They are sent before and after the

runtime/doc/todo.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 07
+*todo.txt*      For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL	  by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -30,95 +30,241 @@ be worked on, but only if you sponsor Vim development.  See |sponsor|.
 							*known-bugs*
 -------------------- Known bugs and current work -----------------------
 
-Add browsedir(): like browse() but for directories.
-    For GTK it already sort-of works when the default name is empty.
+Searching backwards with \zs gets stuck. (Brett Stahlman, Jan 23)
 
-When ":file" sets the alternate file name and it's empty this doesn't make
-sense.  Could skip it, but would that break scripts that rely on the buffer to
-exist?
+netrw plugin: "i" remembers last action but not per window.
 
-Folding support for 2html. (Carl Osterwisch, Oct 4)
-How to evaluate an expression in the sandbox?
+List data type performance:
+- Cache the length of a List?
+- Cache the last used index?
+- Use blocks of items, so that finding an item by index is faster?
 
-Aborting at the ATTENTION prompt causes trouble:
-    buffer remains active, nwindows isn't closed (fixed in buffer.c)
-    alternate buffer gets "read error" flag.
-    ":sbuf" and ":ball" leave an empty window behind.
-Change in handle_swap_exists() also in 6.3?
-Add enter_cleanup() and leave_cleanup() also in 6.3?
-    buffer.c
-    ex_eval.c
-    proto/ex_eval.pro
-    structs.h
-    vim.h
+Can ":grep" made faster somehow?  Do profiling.
+":vimgrep pat %" doesn't work.
 
-Win32: When the path to a file has Russian characters, ":cd %:p:h" doesn't
-work. (Valery Kondakoff)
-Solved in os_mswin.c.  Add to 6.3?
+Sanity check of eval.c:
+- Go through the code for magic braces.
+- Check use of v_type for VAR_FUNC, VAR_LIST ad VAR_DICT.
 
-Patch for Win32 textdomain: NAKADAIRA Yukihiro, Sept 17.
+Mention Rsync command on runtime.php page:
+    rsync -avzcP --delete --exclude="dos" --delete-excluded ftp.nluug.nl::Vim/runtime/ vim63-runtime
 
-GTK 2 error message with this sequence (Namsh Oct 7):
-	- start gvim with French locale
-	- set enc=utf-8
-	- :aunmenu *
-	- :unlet  did_install_default_menus
-	- :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
+netrw plugin:
+- provide :Explore and :Sexplore like the old file explorer?
+- alignment of long listing isn't very good.
 
-Valencia: executable("xxd.exe") returns true while "!xxd" doesn't work.
-Works fine for me.  Only in specific environment?
+Better way to get temp file for tcltags and vimspell scripts. (javier Pena)
+Possibly leave out code for temp directory.
 
-netrw plugin: When coming back to the same directory a scratch buffer appears.
-Only on Win32. (Charles Campbell, Sept 15)
+patch for QuickFixCmdPre and QuickFixCmdPost autocommands. (Ciaran McCreesh,
+2005 Jan 1)
 
-New Eiffel indent script from Jocelyn Fiat.  OK with David Clarke.
+When 'nowrap' is set and selecting text with the mouse, moving the mouse right
+of the text area doesn't cause a horizontal scroll. (Dave Ewart)
 
-Win32: not using 'tenc' in GUI causes problems on Win 98?  (Jiri Jezdinsky)
-Try out with Russian input method.
+New Motif toolbar button from Marcin Dalecki:
+- add remark in version7.txt
+- check if it works for pixmap loaded from a file.
 
-After "Y" '[ and '] are not at start/end of the yanked text. (Ken Clark)
+Explain Lists, Dicts, |:for| etc. in the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
+Add more tests for all List and Dict related functionality.
 
-Patch for adding 'fsync' option: disable using fsync() on file write. (Sept.
-26, Ciaran McCreesh)
-
-Folding for C syntax: (Olaf Dabrunz 27 sept 2004)
-
-Add remark about using Vim with VS .net to Visvim docs. (David Fishburn, Sept
-27)
-
-Vim icon for documents associated with Vim? (Rahul Kulkarni, sept 28)
-
-Add a function to test if a font name actually works.
-
-When using "set laststatus=2 cmdheight=2" in the .gvimrc you only get one line
-for the cmdline. (Christian Robinson)  When the Vim window is resized (e.g.,
-xterm with many lines) it's OK.
+Awaiting response:
+-   Patch for mch_FullName() also in Vim 6.3?  os_mswin.c
+-   Win32: "gvim -V100" should use dialog with scrollbar.  Using
+    gui_mch_dialog() would be good, but need to move display_errors() to after
+    creating the window, so that s_hwnd is valid.
+    How to add a scrollbar to the dialog?
+-   Win32: tearoff menu window should have a scrollbar when it's taller than
+    the screen.
+-   Included NetBeans patches (Gordon Prieur, Oct 20)
+	See two messages for list of changed files.  Additionally:
+	    doc/eval.txt
+	Docs for message E680.
+	Docs for ":nbkey".
+	Asked Gordon to send the differences again, some parts apparently are
+	missing.
 
 
-For version 7.0:
+PLANNED FOR VERSION 7.0:
 
--   Include many PATCHES:
-    7   Add 'taglistfiles' option, show file name and type when listing matching
-	tags name with CTRL-D completion.  Patch from Yegappan Lakshmanan.
-	2004 Jul 11
-    7   For Visual mode: Command to do a search for the string in the marked
-	area.  Only when fewer than two lines. Use "g/" and "gb".  Patch from
-	Yegappan Lakshmanan. 2004 Jul 11
-	When more than two lines: perform a search in the Visual area only.
-    8   Make 'statusline' local, so that each window can have a different
-	value.  But should it also be local to a buffer? (Yegappan Lakshmanan
-	has a patch, 2004 Jul 11)
-    8   Add buffer-local autocommands?  Reduces overhead for autocommands that
-	trigger often (inserting a character, switching mode).
-	    :au Event <buffer> do-something
-	E.g.:
-	    :au BufEnter <buffer> menu enable ...
-	    :au BufLeave <buffer> menu disable ...
-	Patch from Yakov Lerner, including test (2004 Jan 7).
-	VimResized	    - When the Vim window has been resized (SIGWINCH)
-	  patch from Yakov Lerner, 2003 July 24.
-	Patch for specifying an expression for numbered lists. (Hugo Haas,
-	2004 Aug 7)
+-   For string variables, use length instead of NUL termination?
+	+ can include NUL characters
+	- setline() will have problems with NL vs NUL.
+    Can use list of numbers instead (inefficient though).
+    Also: for strings up to 3 bytes don't allocate memory, VAR_STRINGX.
+-   new DATA TYPES:
+	- None?  (or use empty string?)
+    See ~/vim/ideas.txt.
+-   Add SPELLCHECKER, with easy to add support for many languages.
+    8   Add spell checking.  Use "ispell -a" somehow.
+	~/vim/patches/wm_vim-5_4d.zip  can be used as an example (includes
+	ispell inside Vim).  Gautam Iyer has an example with "aspell".
+	"engspchk" from Charles Campbell is a good way.  Support for
+	approximate-regexps will help (agrep http://www.tgries.de/agrep/).
+	- Charles Campbell asks for method to add "contained" groups to
+	  existing syntax items (to add @Spell).  Add ":syntax contains
+	  {pattern} add=@Spell" command?  A bit like ":syn cluster" but change
+	  the contains list directly for matching syntax items.
+        - Keep wordlist in syntax group, load it only once and use it several
+	  times later.  Sort of global syntax items.
+	- Use wordlists from openoffice (myspell).  Work together with them to
+	  update the wordlist.  (Adri Verhoef, Aad Nales)
+	- Patch from Marcin Dalecki. (2004 Dec)  Uses ispell
+	  implements "undercurl" attribute.  But how to set its color?
+	  Perhaps use "guicurl=Red" instead?
+	  If underline and undercurl are both there use undercurl only.
+-   REFACTORING: The main() function is very long.  Move parts to separate
+    functions, especially loops.  Ideas from Walter Briscoe (2003 Apr 3, 2004
+    Feb 9).
+    Move the printing stuff to hardcopy.c.
+-   Improve the interface between the generic GUI code and the system-specific
+    code.  Generic code handles text window with scrollbars, system-specific
+    code menu, toolbar, etc.
+-   Support using "**" in filename for ":next", ":vimgrep", etc., so that a
+    directory tree can be searched.
+-   Store messages to allow SCROLLING BACK for all commands.  And other "less"
+    like commands.
+-   "INTELLISENSE".  First cleanup the Insert-mode completion.
+	http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=747
+	http://sourceforge.net/projects/insenvim
+	    of http://insenvim.sourceforge.net
+	http://cedet.sourceforge.net/intellisense.shtml (for Emacs)
+	Ivan Villanueva has something for Java.
+    Can't call it Intellisense, it is a trademark by Microsoft.
+    Ideas from the Vim 7 BOF at SANE:
+    - It's not possible to have one solution for all languages.  Design an
+      interface for completion plugins.  The matches can be done in a
+      Vim-script list.
+    - For interpreted languages, use the interpreter to obtain information.
+      Should work for Java (Eclipse does this), Python, Tcl, etc.
+    - Check Readline for its completion interface.
+    - Use ctags for other languages.  Writing a file could trigger running
+      ctags, merging the tags of the changed file.
+    Also see "Visual Assist" http://www.wholetomato.com/products:
+    - Put the list of choices right under the place where they would be
+      inserted.
+    - Pre-expand abbreviations, show which abbrevs would match?
+-   UNDO TREE: keep all states of the text, don't delete undo info.
+    When making a change, instead of clearing any future undo (thus redo)
+    info, make a new branch.
+    To navigate through the undo tree number the states of the text
+    sequentially and make it possible to go through the tree in that order.
+    Use "g+++" to go forward, "g---" to go backward.  Can mix - and +.
+    Could also use timestamps (to show the time and/or jump to a state five
+    minutes ago). (David Schweikert)
+    To go from one state to another: backtrack to a common state, then forward
+    again.
+    Only difficult thing: When going back in time, how to find the previous
+    text state in the tree?
+    Show the list of changes in a window to be able to select a version?
+-   PERSISTENT UNDO: store undo in a file.
+    Use timestamps, so that a version a certain time ago can be found and info
+    before some time/date can be flushed. 'undopersist' gives maximum time to
+    keep undo: "3h", "1d", "2w", "1y", etc.  For the file use dot and
+    extension: ".filename.un~" (like swapfile but "un~" instead of "swp").
+7   Support WINDOW TABS.  Works like several pages, each with their own
+    split windows.  Patch for GTK 1.2 passed on by Christian Michon, 2004 Jan 6.
+    Don't forget to provide an "X" to close a tab.
+    Also for the console!
+    In Emacs these are called frames.  Could also call them "pages".
+    Use "1gt" - "99gt" to switch to a tab?
+    Simple patch for GTK by Luis M (nov 7).
+-   EMBEDDING: Make it possible to run Vim inside a window of another program.
+    For Xwindows this can be done with XReparentWindow().
+    For GTK Neil Bird has a patch to use Vim like a widget.
+-   Add COLUMN NUMBERS to ":" commands ":line1,line2[col1,col2]cmd".  Block
+    can be selected with CTRL-V.  Allow '$' (end of line) for col2.
+-   Add DEBUGGER INTERFACE.  Implementation for gdb by Xavier de Gaye,
+    assisted by Mikolaj Machowski.  Should work like an IDE.  Try to keep it
+    generic.  Also found here: http://skawina.eu.org/mikolaj/vimgdb
+    To be able to start the debugger from inside Vim: For GUI run a program
+    with a netbeans connection; for console: start a program that splits the
+    terminal, runs the debugger in one window and reconnect Vim I/O to the
+    other window.
+    Wishes for NetBeans commands:
+    - make it possible to have 'defineAnnoType' also handle terminal colors.
+    - send 'balloonText' events for the cursor position (using CursorHold ?)
+      in terminal mode.
+-   ECLIPSE plugin.  Problem is: the interface is very complicated.  Need to
+    implement part in Java and then connect to Vim.  Some hints from Alexandru
+    Roman, 2004 Dec 15.  Should then also work with Oracle Jdeveloper, see JSR
+    198 standard http://www.jcp.org/en/jsr/detail?id=198.
+-   STICKY CURSOR: Add a way of scrolling that leaves the cursor where it is.
+    Especially when using the scrollbar.  Typing a cursor-movement command
+    scrolls back to where the cursor is.
+-   Execute a function with standard option values.  No need to save and
+    restore option values.  Especially useful for new options.  Problem: how
+    to avoid a performance penalty (esp. for string options)?
+8   Support four composing/combining characters, needed for Hebrew. (Ron Aaron)
+    Add the 'maxcombining' option to set the nr. of composing characters.
+    At the same time support more colors (use two bytes when necessary).
+-   Add a few more things to 'diffopt': "horizontal", "vertical",
+    "foldcolumn". (Benji Fisher, 2004 Jun 21)
+-   FileChangedShellPost autocommand event: after (not) reloading a changed
+    file.  Can be used to update statusline oslt.
+-   VimResized autocmd event: When the Vim window has been resized (SIGWINCH)
+    patch from Yakov Lerner, 2003 July 24.
+	It's not clear that this doesn't cause problems when the executed
+	commands do something like changing 'lines'.  Esp. because the 
+	screen has not yet been allocated with the new size.
+-   Running a shell command from the GUI still has limitations.  Look into how
+    the Vim shell project can help: http://vimshell.wana.at
+8   When a file is change outside of Vim and unmodified in Vim there is no
+    simple way to automatically reload the file.  Either add an option for
+    this or make it simple to have the FileChangedShell invoke the normal
+    action, telling it what to do.
+-   Displaying size of Visual area: use 24-33 column display.
+-   Mac: Unicode input and display (Eckehard Berns, 2004 June 27)
+    Other patch from Da Woon Jung, 2005 Jan 16.
+8   Add patch from Muraoka Taro (Mar 16) to support input method on Mac?
+    New patch 2004 Jun 16
+9   Add cursor-column highlighting.  Enable it with 'cursorcolumn' option,
+    set highlighting with "CursorColumn" group.  Useful for aligning text.
+    Also cursor-row highlighting.  Patch from Yasuhiro Matsumoto for
+    underlining the cursor line: 2004 Jun 17.  Should use highlight group
+    instead.
+    Alternative: when 'number' is set highlight the number of the current
+    line.
+7   Make ":startinsert" command work directly for functions and scripts?
+    Also make it possible to append (it's difficult at end of line).
+-   When using 'incsearch" CTRL-R CTRL-W gets the word under the cursor, but
+    the part that already matched is doubled then.  Remove the part of the
+    word that would be doubled.  Make it work line CTRL-N in Insert mode.
+-   Add Lua interface? (Wolfgang Oertl)
+-   "onemore" flag in 'virtualedit': move cursor past end of line.  Patch by
+    Mattias Flodin (2004 Jul 30)
+-   In a :s command multi-byte characters should also be upper/lower cased
+    with \u, \U, etc.
+
+Support ":set syntax=cpp.doxygen"?  Suggested patch by Michael Geddes (9 Aug
+2004).  Should also work for 'filetype'.
+
+For manipulating buffers without opening a new window, support Virtual
+windows.  Example:
+    :virtwin let l = GetBufLine(4, 10)
+    :fun GetBufLine(bufnr, lnum)
+    :  exe "buffer " . a:bufnr
+    :  return getline(lnum)
+    :endfun
+The getline() and setline() functions could work for other buffers, using a
+Virtual window.
+A Virtual window only exists for one command.  There can be several (for
+nested commands).  The window works as if it comes after the last window, size
+is the Vim window size, but it's never displayed.
+
+Win32: In the generated batch files, use $VIMRUNTIME if it's set.  Examples by
+Mathias Michaelis (2004 Sep 6)
+Also place vimtutor.bat in %windir%?
+
+Add gui_mch_browsedir() for Motif, KDE and Mac OS/X.
+
+HTML indenting can be slow, find out why.  Any way to do some kind of
+profiling for Vim script?
+
+Updated Ruby interface. (Ryan Paul)
+
+Awaiting updated patches:
     --- awaiting updated patch ---
     7   Add patch from Wall for this one ( ~/Mail/oldmail/wall/in.00019 ):
 	'flipcase' variable: upper/lowercase pairs.
@@ -126,8 +272,8 @@ For version 7.0:
 	'isfname'.  E.g. ":set flipcase=a-zA-Z,xX,23-33:143-153".  The colon to
 	separate the from and to part is optional.
 	Resp: no time now.
-    8   Add GTK 2.3 file dialog support.  Patch by Grahame Bowland, 2004 Mar 15,
-	but it doesn't use "initdir" or "dflt". (will update patch)
+    8   Add GTK 2.3 file dialog support.  Patch by Grahame Bowland, 2004 Mar
+	15, but it doesn't use "initdir" or "dflt". (will update patch)
     8   Add ":n" to fnamemodify(): normalize path, remove "../" when possible.
 	Aric Blumer has a patch for this.
 	He will update the patch for 6.3.
@@ -140,13 +286,12 @@ For version 7.0:
 			More docs.  Search in 'runtimepath'?
 			How to get the messages into the .po files?
     --- did not respond (yet) --
+    -	Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
+	Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13, fix Oct 31)
+	Asked for improvements 2004 Dec 20.
     7   Make "5dd" on last-but-one-line not delete anything (Vi compatible).
 	Add flag in 'cpoptions' for this.  When not present, "2dd" in the last
 	line should delete the last line.  Patch from greenx 2002 Apr 11.
-    8   Accelerators don't work in a dialog.  Include patch from Martin Dalecki
-	(Jan 3, tested by David Harrison).  Should work with Alt-o then.
-    7   Use accelerators for the Motif file selection dialog.  Patch from
-	Martin Dalecki 2002 Jan 11.
     8   Add a few more command names to the menus.  Patch from Jiri Brezina
 	(28 feb 2002).
     7   ATTENTION dialog choices are more logical when "Delete it' appears
@@ -160,8 +305,8 @@ For version 7.0:
 	Add section in help files for these highlight groups?
     8   "fg" and "bg" don't work in an xterm.  Get default colors from xterm
 	with an ESC sequence.  Ideas in: ~/vim/patches/vikas.xtermcolors .
-    7   Add "DefaultFG" and "DefaultBG" for the colors of the menu. (Martin
-	Dalecki has a patch for Motif)
+    7   Add "DefaultFG" and "DefaultBG" for the colors of the menu. (Marcin
+	Dalecki has a patch for Motif and Carbon)
     -   Add possibility to highlight specific columns (for Fortran).  Or put a
 	line in between columns (e.g. for 'textwidth').
 	Patch to add 'hlcolumn' from Vit Stradal, 2004 May 20.
@@ -177,9 +322,8 @@ For version 7.0:
 				Tcl implementation ~/vim/HierAssist/ )
     7   Add patch from Benoit Cerrina to integrate Vim and Perl functions
 	better.  Now also works for Ruby (2001 Nov 10)
-    7   Motif: use the menu font consistently.  Patch from Martin Dalecki 2002
-	Jan 11.
-    -   Motif: add 3D shading for the menu entries?  Patch from Martin Dalecki.
+    -   Patch from Herculano de Lima Einloft Neto for better formatting of the
+	quickfix window (2004 dec 2)
     7   When 'rightleft' is set, the search pattern should be displayed right
 	to left as well?  See patch of Dec 26. (Nadim Shaikli)
     8   Lock all used memory so that it doesn't get swapped to disk (uncrypted).
@@ -209,168 +353,14 @@ For version 7.0:
 	runtime files?
 	Also: when the environment variable exists, use it.  If it doesn't
 	exist, set it.  Requires good names: $VIM_USER_VIMRC  $VIM_USER_DIR
+    -	The Replace dialog takes "\r" literal, unless "replace all" is used.
+	Need to escape backslashes.
+        Win32: the text to replace with isn't remembered.
+    -	For GUI Find/Replace dialog support using a regexp.  Patch for Motif
+	and GTK by degreneir (nov 10 and nov 18).
 
-
--   In the kvim/KDE source files fix the formatting.
--   KDE version is called "kvim".  Make it "gvim", like the others?
--   Better configure check for KDE include files from Dan Sharp.
--   KDE Input method patch. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto)
--   Change ga_room into ga_maxlen, so that it doesn't need to be
-    incremented/decremented each time.
--   For string variables, use length instead of NUL termination.
--   new DATA TYPES: lists, dictionaries and function references.
-	Check old patch from Robert Webb for array support.
-    Add type checking?  See ~/vim/ideas.txt.
--   Add SPELLCHECKER, with easy to add support for many languages.
-    8   Add spell checking.  Use "ispell -a" somehow.
-	~/vim/patches/wm_vim-5_4d.zip  can be used as an example (includes
-	ispell inside Vim).  Gautam Iyer has an example with "aspell".
-	"engspchk" from Charles Campbell is a good way.  Support for
-	approximate-regexps will help (agrep http://www.tgries.de/agrep/).
-	- Charles Campbell asks for method to add "contained" groups to
-	  existing syntax items (to add @Spell).  Add ":syntax contains
-	  {pattern} add=@Spell" command?  A bit like ":syn cluster" but change
-	  the contains list directly for matching syntax items.
-        - Keep wordlist in syntax group, load it only once and use it several
-	  times later.  Sort of global syntax items.
-	- Use wordlists from openoffice (myspell).  Work together with them to
-	  update the wordlist.  (Adri Verhoef, Aad Nales)
--   REFACTORING: The main() function is very long.  Move parts to separate
-    functions, especially loops.  Ideas from Walter Briscoe (2003 Apr 3, 2004
-    Feb 9).
--   Improve the interface between the generic GUI code and the system-specific
-    code.  Generic code handles text window with scrollbars, system-specific
-    code menu, toolbar, etc.
--   Store messages to allow SCROLLING BACK for all commands.  And other "less"
-    like commands.
--   "INTELLISENSE".  First cleanup the Insert-mode completion.
-	http://www.vim.org/scripts/script.php?script_id=747
-	http://sourceforge.net/projects/insenvim
-	http://cedet.sourceforge.net/intellisense.shtml (for Emacs)
-	Ivan Villanueva has something for Java.
-    Can't call it Intellisense, it is a trademark by Microsoft.
-    Ideas from the Vim 7 BOF at SANE:
-    - It's not possible to have one solution for all languages.  Design an
-      interface for completion plugins.  The matches can be done in a
-      Vim-script list.
-    - For interpreted languages, use the interpreter to obtain information.
-      Should work for Java (Eclipse does this), Python, Tcl, etc.
-    - Check Readline for its completion interface.
-    - Use ctags for other languages.  Writing a file could trigger running
-      ctags, merging the tags of the changed file.
--   UNDO TREE: keep all states of the text, don't delete undo info.
-    When making a change, instead of clearing any future undo (thus redo)
-    info, make a new branch.
-    To navigate through the undo tree number the states of the text
-    sequentially and make it possible to go through the tree in that order.
-    Could also use timestamps (to show the time and/or jump to a state five
-    minutes ago). (David Schweikert)
-    To go from one state to another: backtrack to a common state, then forward
-    again.
-    Only difficult thing: When going back in time, how to find the previous
-    text state in the tree?
-    Show the list of changes in a window to be able to select a version?
--   PERSISTENT UNDO: store undo in a file.
-    Use timestamps, so that a version a certain time ago can be found and info
-    before some time/date can be flushed. 'undopersist' gives maximum time to
-    keep undo: "3h", "1d", "2w", "1y", etc.  For the file use dot and
-    extension: ".filename.un~" (like swapfile but "un~" instead of "swp").
-7   SWAP FILE CHANGE: When a dos format file was edited with ":e ++ff=unix",
-    Vim is killed and trying to recover the file, 'ff' will be dos.  Same for
-    non-default fileencoding.  (Miroslaw Dobrzanski-Neumann, Jul 17)
-    Should store the values in block 0 of the swap file, but that is an
-    incompatible change.
-7   Support WINDOW TABS.  Works like several pages, each with their own
-    split windows.  Patch for GTK 1.2 from Christian Michon, 2004 Jan 6.
-    Also for the console!
--   EMBEDDING: Make it possible to run Vim inside a window of another program.
-    For Xwindows this can be done with XReparentWindow().
-    For GTK Neil Bird has a patch to use Vim like a widget.
--   Add COLUMN NUMBERS to ":" commands ":line1,line2[col1,col2]cmd".  Block
-    can be selected with CTRL-V.  Allow '$' (end of line) for col2.
--   Add DEBUGGER INTERFACE.  Implementation for gdb by Xavier de Gaye,
-    assisted by Mikolaj Machowski.  Should work like an IDE.  Try to keep it
-    generic.  Also found here: http://skawina.eu.org/mikolaj/vimgdb
-    To be able to start the debugger from inside Vim: For GUI run a program
-    with a netbeans connection; for console: start a program that splits the
-    terminal, runs the debugger in one window and reconnect Vim I/O to the
-    other window.
-    Wishes for NetBeans commands:
-    - make it possible to have 'defineAnnoType' also handle terminal colors.
-    - send 'balloonText' events for the cursor position (using CursorHold ?)
-      in terminal mode.
--   STICKY CURSOR: Add a way of scrolling that leaves the cursor where it is.
-    Especially when using the scrollbar.  Typing a cursor-movement command
-    scrolls back to where the cursor is.
--   Execute a function with standard option values.  No need to save and
-    restore option values.  Especially useful for new options.  Problem: how
-    to avoid a performance penalty (esp. for string options)?
-8   Support four composing/combining characters, needed for Hebrew. (Ron Aaron)
-    Add the 'maxcombining' option to set the nr. of composing characters.
-    At the same time support more colors (use two bytes when necessary).
--   Add a few more things to 'diffopt': "horizontal", "vertical",
-    "foldcolumn". (Benji Fisher, 2004 Jun 21)
--   FileChangedShellPost autocommand event: after (not) reloading a changed
-    file.  Can be used to update statusline oslt.
-8   When a file is change outside of Vim and unmodified in Vim there is no
-    simple way to automatically reload the file.  Either add an option for
-    this or make it simple to have the FileChangedShell invoke the normal
-    action, telling it what to do.
--   Displaying size of Visual area: use 24-33 column display.
--   Mac: Unicode input and display (Eckehard Berns, June 27)
-8   Add patch from Muraoka Taro (Mar 16) to support input method on Mac?
-    New patch 2004 Jun 16
-9   Add cursor-column highlighting.  Enable it with 'cursorcolumn' option,
-    set highlighting with "CursorColumn" group.  Useful for aligning text.
-    Also cursor-row highlighting.  Patch from Yasuhiro Matsumoto for
-    underlining the cursor line: 2004 Jun 17.  Should use highlight group
-    instead.
-    Alternative: when 'number' is set highlight the number of the current
-    line.
-7   Make ":startinsert" command work directly for functions and scripts?
-    Also make it possible to append (it's difficult at end of line).
--   When using 'incsearch" CTRL-R CTRL-W gets the word under the cursor, but
-    the part that already matched is doubled then.  Remove the part of the
-    word that would be doubled.  Make it work line CTRL-N in Insert mode.
--   Add Lua interface? (Wolfgang Oertl)
--   "onemore" flag in 'virtualedit': move cursor past end of line.  Patch by
-    Mattias Flodin (2004 Jul 30)
-
-The fsync() in buf_write() causes laptop harddisk spinup.  Add an option to
-avoid it?
-
-Support ":set syntax=cpp.doxygen"?  Suggested patch by Michael Geddes (9 Aug
-2004).  Should also work for 'filetype'.
-
-Patch for 'breakindent' option: repeat indent for wrapped line. (Vaclav
-Smilauer, 2004 Sep 13)
-
-Win32: In 'fileencodings' allow using "acp" for the active codepage.  Useful
-value: "ucs-bom,utf-8,acp,latin1"
-
-Win32: Cannot edit a file starting with # with --remote. (Giuseppe Bilotta,
-Oct 6 2004)
-
-For manipulating buffers without opening a new window, support Virtual
-windows.  Example:
-    :virtwin let l = GetBufLine(4, 10)
-    :fun GetBufLine(bufnr, lnum)
-    :  exe "buffer " . a:bufnr
-    :  return getline(lnum)
-    :endfun
-The getline() and setline() functions could work for other buffers, using a
-Virtual window.
-A Virtual window only exists for one command.  There can be several (for
-nested commands).  The window works as if it comes after the last window, size
-is the Vim window size, but it's never displayed.
-
-Win32: In the generated batch files, use $VIMRUNTIME if it's set.  Examples by
-Mathias Michaelis (2004 Sep 6)
-Also place vimtutor.bat in %windir%?
-
-Support ":enew filename" to edit a new buffer with a name.  It's like "enew |
-file filename" but without setting the alternate file to a buffer without a
-name. (Charles Campbell)
+Check if file explorer can handle directory names and links with a single
+quote. (Nieko Maatjes, 2005 Jan 4)
 
 
 Vi incompatibility:
@@ -466,8 +456,9 @@ GTK+ GUI known bugs:
 7   DND doesn't work with KDE (also with GTK 1).
 
 KDE GUI known bugs:
--   The default font is ugly.  bold text isn't displayed correctly.
-    (bold characters are half the width of normal characters)
+-   There is no active maintenance and "yzis" is supposed to replace it.
+-   With the default 'guifont' value bold text differs in size from normal
+    text, causing the display to be messed up.
 -   Error messages when starting up.  The "tip of the day" box is empty.
 -   Encoding of menu items needs to be converted. (Yasuhiro Matsumoto)
 
@@ -606,10 +597,8 @@ Athena GUI:
 
 
 Motif GUI:
-8   Popup menu ordering is wrong.
 7   Use XmStringCreateLocalized() instead of XmStringCreateSimple()?
     David Harrison says it's OK (it exists in Motif 1.2).
-8   The texts in the find/replace dialog don't use the right font.
 8   Lesstif: When deleting a menu that's torn off, the torn off menu becomes
     very small instead of disappearing.  When closing it, Vim crashes.
     (Phillipps)
@@ -941,11 +930,6 @@ Macintosh:
     swap file.  Then using ":write" (without making any changes) doesn't give
     a warning either.  Should check for an existing swap file without creating
     one.
-7   On MS-DOS or MS-Windows, when editing the same file over a network, the
-    drive letter is different, thus an existing swap file doesn't generate a
-    warning.  Use some flag to indicate the swap file is in the same directory
-    as the original file?  Could make b0_fname[] start with a special
-    character like ">".
 7   When 'showbreak' is set, the amount of space a Tab occupies changes.
     Should work like 'showbreak' is inserted without changing the Tabs.
 7   When there is a "help.txt" window in a session file, restoring that
@@ -975,10 +959,6 @@ Macintosh:
 9   dosinst.c: The DJGPP version can't uninstall the Uninstall registry key on
     Windows NT.  How to install a .inf file on Windows NT and how to detect
     that Windows NT is being used?
-8   When opening the same file on Unix and on MS-Windows, there is no
-    ATTENTION message, because the path in the swap file is different.  Using
-    a relative path name will cause no ATTENTION for Vim 5.8.
-    Somehow add a flag that the swap file is in the same dir as the file?
 8   When 'virtualedit' is "block,insert" and encoding is "utf-8", selecting a
     block of one double-wide character, then "d" deletes only half of it.
 8   When 'virtualedit' is set, should "I" in blockwise visual mode also insert
@@ -1023,6 +1003,9 @@ Macintosh:
 8   For xterm need to open a connection to the X server to get the window
     title, which can be slow.  Can also get the title with "<Esc>[21t", no
     need to use X11 calls.  This returns "<Esc>]l{title}<Esc>\".
+6   When the xterm reports the number of colors, a redraw occurs.  This is
+    annoying on a slow connection.  Wait for the xterm to report the number of
+    colors before drawing the screen.  With a timeout.
 8   When the builtin xterm termcap contains codes that are not wanted, need a
     way to avoid using the builtin termcap.
 8   Xterm sends ^[[H for <Home> and ^[[F for <End> in some mode.  Also
@@ -1112,11 +1095,15 @@ I can't reproduce these (if you can, let me know how!):
 9   NT 4.0 on NTFS file system: Editing ".bashrc" (drag and drop), file
     disappears.  Editing ".xyz" is OK.  Also, drag&drop only works for three
     files. (McCollister)
-8   Motif: Tear-off menu item crashes Vim on some machines.  (Netherton)  It
-    works fine for me, maybe it's a Motif problem.
 
 
 Problems that will (probably) not be solved:
+-   xterm title: The following scenario may occur (esp. when running the Vim
+    test script): Vim 1 sets the title to "file1", then restores the title to
+    "xterm" when exiting with an ESC sequence.  Vim 2 obtains the old title
+    with an X library call, this may result in "file1", because the window
+    manager hasn't processed the "xterm" title yet.  Can apparently only be
+    worked around with a delay.
 -   In a terminal with 'mouse' set such that the mouse is active when entering
     a command line, after executing a shell command that scrolls up the
     display and then pressing ":": Selecting text with the mouse works like
@@ -1204,6 +1191,8 @@ Problems that will (probably) not be solved:
 						    *extensions-improvements*
 
 Documentation:
+8   The GUI help should explain the Find and Find/Replace dialogs.  Add a link
+    to it from ":promptrepl" and ":promptfind".
 8   List of options should mention whether environment variables are expanded
     or not.
 8   Extend usr_27.txt a bit. (Adam Seyfarth)
@@ -1284,6 +1273,7 @@ Diff mode:
 Folding:
     (commands still available: zg zG zI zJ zK zp zP zq zQ zV zw zW zy zY;
     secondary: zB zS zT zZ)
+8   Add "z/" and "z?" for searching in not folded text only.
 8   Add different highlighting for a fold line depending on the fold level.
     (Noel Henson)
 8   When a closed fold is displayed open because of 'foldminlines', the
@@ -1293,12 +1283,11 @@ Folding:
     commands skip over a closed fold.
 8   "H" and "L" count buffer lines instead of window lines. (Servatius Brandt)
 8   Add a way to add fold-plugins.  Johannes Zellner has one for VB.
-7   When using 2html.vim, also reproduce folds as you can see them.  When
-    someone doesn't want the folds he can disable them before converting.
-    First attempt by Carl Osterwisch, 2004 May 10.
 7   When using manual folding, the undo command should also restore folds.
--   Allow completely hiding a closed fold.  Require showing a character in
-    'foldcolumn' to avoid the missing line goes unnoticed.
+-   Allow completely hiding a closed fold.  E.g., by setting 'foldtext' to an
+    empty string.  Require showing a character in 'foldcolumn' to avoid the
+    missing line goes unnoticed.
+    How to implement this?
 -   When pressing the down arrow of a scrollbar, a closed fold doesn't scroll
     until after a long time.  How to make scrolling with closed folds
     smoother?
@@ -1306,15 +1295,14 @@ Folding:
     using the wininfo in wi_folds.
 -   'foldmethod' "textobject": fold on sections and paragraph text objects.
 -   Add 'hidecomment' option: don't display comments in /* */ and after //.
+    Or is the conceal patch from Vince Negri a more generic solution?
 -   "zu": undo change in manual fold. "zU" redo change in manual fold.  How to
     implement this?
 -   "zJ" command: add the line or fold below the fold in the fold under the
     cursor.
 -   'foldmethod' "syntax": "fold=3": set fold level for a region.
--   Can set 'foldtext' to empty string: don't display any line.  How to
-    implement this?
 -   Apply a new foldlevel to a range of lines. (Steve Litt)
--   Have some way to restrict commands to not folded text.  Also commands like
+8   Have some way to restrict commands to not folded text.  Also commands like
     searches.
 
 
@@ -1333,7 +1321,8 @@ Multi-byte characters:
     the encoding. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>  Or "charset=UTF-8"?
 8   The quickfix file is read without conversion, thus in 'encoding'.  Add an
     option to specify the encoding of the errorfile and convert it.  Also for
-    ":grep".
+    ":grep" and ":helpgrep".
+    More generic solution: support a filter (e.g., by calling a function).
 8   When a file was converted from 'fileencoding' to 'encoding', a tag search
     should also do this on the search pattern. (Andrzej M. Ostruszka)
 7   When converting a file fails, mention which byte could not be converted,
@@ -1369,7 +1358,7 @@ Multi-byte characters:
     For Windows, the charset_pairs[] table could be used.  But how do we know
     if a font exists?
 -   Do keyboard conversion from 'termencoding' to 'encoding' with
-    convert_input() for Mac GUI, RiscOS GUI, BeOS GUI.
+    convert_input() for Mac GUI and RiscOS GUI.
 -   Add mnemonics from RFC1345 longer than two characters.
     Support CTRL-K _{mnemonic}_
 7   In "-- INSERT (lang) --" show the name of the keymap used instead of
@@ -1390,6 +1379,8 @@ Printing:
 -   Add "page width" to wrap long lines.
 -   Win32: use a font dialog for setting 'printfont'.  Can reuse the code for
     the 'guifont' dialog, put the common code in a separate function.
+-   Add the file timestamp to the page header (with an option). (George
+    Reilly)
 -   Win32: when 'printfont' is empty use 'guifont'.
 -   Unix: Use some dialog box to do the obvious settings (paper size, printer
     name, portrait/landscape, etc).
@@ -1415,9 +1406,6 @@ Syntax highlighting:
 8   Make conversion to HTML faster (Write it in C or pre-compile the script).
 9   There is still a redraw bug somewhere.  Probably because a cached state is
     used in a wrong way.  I can't reproduce it...
-7   Make syntax keyword table configurable.  Set number of bits used with
-    ":syn clear [hashbits]", so that we don't need to reallocate the table.
-    minimal 4 bits, maximal 16. (Campbell)
 7   Be able to change only the background highlighting.  Useful for Diff* and
     Search highlighting.
 8   Allow the user to add items to the Syntax menu sorted, without having to
@@ -1427,9 +1415,6 @@ Syntax highlighting:
 8   Add a "keepend-contained" argument: Don't change the end of an item this
     one is contained in.  Like "keepend" but specified on the contained item,
     instead of the containing item.
-8   For keywords, allow to define the size of the hash table with ":syn
-    clear".  Change KHASH_ defines into variables stored in buffer struct.
-    Use something else than linear linked list from the hash table. (Campbell)
 8   cpp.vim: In C++ it's allowed to use {} inside ().
 8   Some syntax files set 'iskeyword'.  When switching to another filetype
     this isn't reset.  Add a special keyword definition for the syntax rules?
@@ -1554,9 +1539,12 @@ Syntax highlighting:
 Built-in script language:
 8   Add referring to key options with "&t_xx".  Both for "echo &t_xx" and
     ":let &t_xx =".  Useful for making portable mappings.
-8   Allow range for ":exec".  Pass it on to the executed command. (Webb)
 8   exists("&&option") tests if 'option' is actually implemented.  Useful for
     'shellslash', for example.
+-   Add "{range}source": execute lines from a buffer.
+    Alternative: Allow range for ":exec", pass it on to the executed command.
+    (Webb)
+    You can already yank lines and use :@" to execute them.
 8   Have a look at VSEL.  Would it be useful to include? (Bigham)
 8   Add ":fungroup" command, to group function definitions together.  When
     encountered, all functions in the group are removed.  Suggest using an
@@ -1588,7 +1576,6 @@ Built-in script language:
 7   Add argument to winwidth() to subtract the space taken by 'foldcolumn',
     signs and/or 'number'.
 8   Add functions:
-	search()		Add optional offset argument.
 	realname()		Get user name (first, last, full)
 				user_fullname() patch by Nikolai Weibull, Nov
 				3 2002
@@ -1706,8 +1693,8 @@ Performance:
     this be improved?
 8   Set default for 'ttyscroll' to half a screen height?  Should speed up
     MS-DOS version. (Negri)
-7   C syntax highlighting gets a lot slower when adding a region for folding
-    from { to }. (Charles Campbell)  Inserting a "{" is very slow. (dman)
+7   C syntax highlighting gets a lot slower after ":set foldmethod=syntax".
+    (Charles Campbell)  Inserting a "{" is very slow. (dman)
 7   HTML syntax highlighting is slow for long lines.  Try displaying
     http://www.theregister.co.uk/content/4/22908.html. (Andre Pang)
 7   Check how performance of loading the wordlist can be improved (adding a
@@ -2009,8 +1996,7 @@ GUI:
     double-width. (Maeda)
 8   Should take font from xterm where gvim was started (if no other default).
 8   Selecting font names in X11 is difficult, make a script or something to
-    select one.  Martin Dalecki has a font selector for Motif, but it needs a
-    bit more work.
+    select one.
 8   Visual highlighting should keep the same font (bold, italic, etc.).
 8   Add flag to 'guioptions' to not put anything in the clipboard at all?
 8   Should support a way to use keys that we don't recognize yet.  Add a
@@ -2052,11 +2038,6 @@ GUI:
     things.
 7   Motif: For a confirm() dialog <Enter> should be ignored when no default
     button selected, <Esc> should close the dialog.
--   Motif steals <F10> from us, to pop up menus with the keyboard.  How do we
-    get it back if we want it?
--   Paste in Insert mode should not do autowrap etc.  Or maybe this should be
-    changeable with an option?
--   Put a nice picture in the icon (but how do we do that?).
 7   When using a pseudo-tty Vim should behave like some terminal (vt52 looks
     simple enough). Terminal codes to/from shell should be translated.
 -   Would it be useful to be able to quit the GUI and go back to the terminal
@@ -2071,9 +2052,10 @@ VMS:
 
 
 Autocommands:
-9   Make sure that side effects of autocommands are handled correctly.  Don't
-    execute autocommands when a buffer or window is halfway some changes.
-    Move all apply_autocmds() calls to a higher level where needed.
+7   For autocommand events that trigger multiple times per buffer (e.g.,
+    CursorHold), go through the list once and cache the result for a specific
+    buffer.  Invalidate the cache when adding/deleting autocommands or
+    changing the buffer name.
 8   Add ScriptReadCmd event: used to load remote Vim scripts, e.g.
     "vim -u http://mach/path/vimrc".
 8   Use another option than 'updatetime' for the CursorHold event.  The two
@@ -2434,6 +2416,8 @@ Java:
     like it's done when there is no code.  And there is no automatic wrapping.
     Recognize comments that come after code.  Should insert the comment leader
     when it's "#" or "//".
+    Other way around: when a C command starts with "* 4" the "*" is repeated
+    while it should not.  Use syntax HL comment recognition?
 7   When using "comments=fg:--", Vim inserts three spaces for a new line.
     When hitting a TAB, these spaces could be removed.
 7   The 'n'esting flag doesn't do the indenting of the last (rightmost) item.
@@ -2644,14 +2628,18 @@ Incsearch:
 
 
 Searching:
+7   Add "g/" and "gb" to search for a pattern in the Visually selected text?
+    "g?" is already used for rot13.
 8   Add a mechanism for recursiveness: "\(([^()]*\@@[^()]*)\)\@r".  \@@ stands
     for "go recursive here" and \@r marks the recursive atom.
-item stack to allow matching ().  One side is "push X on
+7   Add an item stack to allow matching ().  One side is "push X on
     the stack if previous atom matched".  Other side is "match with top of
     stack, pop it when it matches".  Use "\@pX" and "\@m"?
 	Example: \((\@p).\{-}\@m\)*
 7   Add an option to accept a match at the cursor position.  Also for
     search(). (Brett)
+7   Add a flag to "/pat/" to discard an error.  Useful to continue a mapping
+    when a search fails.  Could be "/pat/E" (e is already used for an offset).
 7   Add pattern item to use properties of Unicode characters.  In Perl it's
     "\p{L}" for a letter.  See Regular Expression Pocket Reference.
 8   Would it be possible to allow ":23,45/pat/flags" to search for "pat" in
@@ -2816,9 +2804,6 @@ Swap (.swp) files:
     twice (e.g. when using quickfix).  Also try to make the name of the backup
     file the same as the actual file?
     Use the code for resolve()?
-7   Store the options 'fileencoding', 'fileformat', etc. in the swapfile,
-    because they change what will be written to the file.  Requires adding
-    another block to the swapfile.
 7   When using 64 bit inode numbers, also store the top 32 bits.  Add another
     field for this, using part of bo_fname[], to keep it compatible.
 7   When editing a file on removable media, should put swap file somewhere
@@ -3098,6 +3083,9 @@ Debug mode:
 Various improvements:
 8   Add ":rename" command: rename the file of the current buffer and rename
     the buffer.  Buffer may be modified.
+-   Perhaps ":cexpr" could read errors from a list?
+    Add %b to 'errorformat': buffer number. (Yegappan Lakshmanan / Suresh
+    Govindachar)
 6   In the quickfix window statusline add the command used to get the list of
     errors, e.g. ":make foo", ":grep something *.c".
 7   Add a ":cstring" command.  Works like ":cfile" but reads from a string
@@ -3141,8 +3129,6 @@ Various improvements:
 7   Add ModeMsgVisual, ModeMsgInsert, etc. so that each mode message can be
     highlighted differently.
 8   Allow using "**" as a wildcard in commands like ":next" and ":args".
-8   Provide a way to avoid wildcard expansion.  Use double quotes, like in the
-    shell?  :edit "my[file].txt"  (currently works if there is no "myf.txt")
 7   Add a message area for the user.  Set some option to reserve space (above
     the command line?).  Use an ":echouser" command to display the message
     (truncated to fit in the space).
@@ -3251,11 +3237,11 @@ Various improvements:
 8   findmatchlimit() should be able to skip comments.  Solves problem of
     matching the '{' in /* if (foo) { */ (Fiveash)
 -   Add more redirecting of Ex commands:
-	:redir @> register  (append)
-	:redir #  bufname
-	:redir #> bufname   (append)
-	:redir =  variable
-	:redir => variable  (append)
+	:redir @r> register  (append)
+	:redir #>  bufname
+	:redir #>> bufname   (append)
+	:redir =>  variable
+	:redir =>> variable  (append)
 -   Setting of options, specifically for a buffer or window, with
     ":set window.option" or ":set buffer.option=val".  Or use ":buffer.set".
     Also: "buffer.map <F1> quit".
@@ -3329,11 +3315,6 @@ Various improvements:
     sufficient.  ":setflush" resets the option stack?
     How to handle an aborted mapping?  Remember position in tag stack when
     mapping starts, restore it when an error aborts the mapping?
--   Use a builtin grep command for ":grep"?  Makes it possible to add the
-    column number.  Can use the code of ":helpgrep".
-    Also support using "**" in filename, so that a directory tree can be
-    searched.
-    Also see the "minigrep.vim" script on www.vim.org.
 -   Change ":fixdel" into option 'fixdel', t_del will be adjusted each time
     t_bs is set? (Webb)
 -   "gc": goto character, move absolute character positions forward, also

runtime/doc/usr_05.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Aug 27
+*usr_05.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -150,12 +150,11 @@ it worked before Vim 5.0.  Otherwise the "Q" command starts Ex mode, but you
 will not need it.
 
 >
-	vnoremap p <Esc>:let current_reg = @"<CR>gvs<C-R>=current_reg<CR><Esc>
+	vnoremap _g y:exe "grep /" . escape(@", '\\/') . "/ *.c *.h"<CR>
 
-This is a complicated mapping.  It will not be explained how it works here.
-What it does is to make "p" in Visual mode overwrite the selected text with
-the previously yanked text.  You can see that mappings can be used to do quite
-complicated things.  Still, it is just a sequence of commands that are
+This mapping yanks the visually selected text and searches for it in C files.
+This is a complicated mapping.  You can see that mappings can be used to do
+quite complicated things.  Still, it is just a sequence of commands that are
 executed like you typed them.
 
 >

runtime/doc/usr_12.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 May 01
+*usr_12.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ program files, for example, enter the following command: >
 This causes Vim to search for the string "error_string" in all the specified
 files (*.c).  The editor will now open the first file where a match is found
 and position the cursor on the first matching line.  To go to the next
-matching line (no matter in what it is file), use the ":cnext" command.  To go
+matching line (no matter in what file it is), use the ":cnext" command.  To go
 to the previous match, use the ":cprev" command.  Use ":clist" to see all the
 matches and where they are.
    The ":grep" command uses the external commands grep (on Unix) or findstr

runtime/doc/usr_21.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 16
+*usr_21.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 10
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ a look at an overview:
 	:w !{program}		execute {program} and send text to its input
 	:[range]!{program}	filter text through {program}
 
-Notice that the presense of a range before "!{program}" makes a big
+Notice that the presence of a range before "!{program}" makes a big
 difference.  Without it executes the program normally, with the range a number
 of text lines is filtered through the program.
 

runtime/doc/usr_40.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_40.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Feb 13
+*usr_40.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -60,7 +60,8 @@ It looks a lot like the mapping for <F2> in Normal mode, only the start is
 different.  The <F2> mapping for Normal mode is still there.  Thus you can map
 the same key differently for each mode.
    Notice that, although this mapping starts in Insert mode, it ends in Normal
-mode.  If you want it to continue in Insert mode, append a "a" to the mapping.
+mode.  If you want it to continue in Insert mode, append an "a" to the
+mapping.
 
 Here is an overview of map commands and in which mode they work:
 

runtime/doc/usr_41.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 06
+*usr_41.txt*	For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 25
 
 		     VIM USER MANUAL - by Bram Moolenaar
 
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ script.  There are a lot of them, thus this is a long chapter.
 Table of contents: |usr_toc.txt|
 
 ==============================================================================
-*41.1*	Introduction					*vim-script-intro*
+*41.1*	Introduction				*vim-script-intro* *script*
 
 Your first experience with Vim scripts is the vimrc file.  Vim reads it when
 it starts up and executes the commands.  You can set options to values you
@@ -84,6 +84,19 @@ variable.
 	Note:
 	If you happen to write a while loop that keeps on running, you can
 	interrupt it by pressing CTRL-C (CTRL-Break on MS-Windows).
+	Note:
+	You can try out the examples by yanking the lines from the text here
+	and executing them with :@"
+
+The example was given to explain the commands, but you would really want to
+make such a loop it can be written much more compact: >
+
+	:for i in range(1, 4)
+	:  echo "count is" i
+	:endfor
+
+We won't explain how |:for| and |range()| work right now.  Follow the links if
+you are impatient.
 
 
 THREE KINDS OF NUMBERS
@@ -557,6 +570,49 @@ String manipulation:
 	type()			type of a variable
 	iconv()			convert text from one encoding to another
 
+List manipulation:
+	get()			get an item without error for wrong index
+	len()			number of items in a List
+	empty()			check if List is empty
+	insert()		insert an item somewhere in a List
+	add()			append an item to a List
+	extend()		append a List to a List
+	remove()		remove one or more items from a List
+	copy()			make a shallow copy of a List
+	deepcopy()		make a full copy of a List
+	filter()		remove selected items from a List
+	map()			change each List item
+	sort()			sort a List
+	reverse()		reverse the order of a List
+	split()			split a String into a List
+	join()			join List items into a String
+	string()		String representation of a List
+	call()			call a function with List as arguments
+	max()			maximum value in a List
+	min()			minimum value in a List
+	count()			count number of times a value appears in a List
+	getline()		get List with buffer lines
+	append()		append List of lines to the buffer
+
+Dictionary manipulation:
+	get()			get an entries without error for wrong key
+	len()			number of entries in a Dictionary
+	has_key()		check whether a key appears in a Dictionary
+	empty()			check if Dictionary is empty
+	remove()		remove an entry from a Dictionary
+	extend()		add entries from one Dictionary to another
+	filter()		remove selected entries from a Dictionary
+	map()			change each Dictionary entry
+	keys()			get List of Dictionary keys
+	values()		get List of Dictionary values
+	items()			get List of Dictionary key-value pairs
+	copy()			make a shallow copy of a Dictionary
+	deepcopy()		make a full copy of a Dictionary
+	string()		String representation of a Dictionary
+	max()			maximum value in a Dictionary
+	min()			minimum value in a Dictionary
+	count()			count number of times a value appears
+
 Working with text in the current buffer:
 	byte2line()		get line number at a specific byte count
 	line2byte()		byte count at a specific line

runtime/doc/various.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jul 05
+*various.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 20
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -387,10 +387,13 @@ N  *+X11*		Unix only: can restore window title |X11|
 :redi[r] @{a-zA-Z}	Redirect messages to register {a-z}.  Append to the
 			contents of the register if its name is given
 			uppercase {A-Z}.  {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @{a-z}>	Append messages to register {a-z}. {not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] @*		Redirect messages to the clipboard. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @*>		Append messages to the clipboard. {not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] @"		Redirect messages to the unnamed register. {not in Vi}
+:redi[r] @">		Append messages to the unnamed register. {not in Vi}
 
 :redi[r] END		End redirecting messages.  {not in Vi}
 
@@ -595,6 +598,13 @@ g CTRL-A		Only when Vim was compiled with MEM_PROFILING defined
 			compresses the help files).
 			{not in Vi}
 
+							*:exu* *:exusage*
+:exu[sage]		Show help on Ex commands.  Added to simulate the Nvi
+			command. {not in Vi}
+
+							*:viu* *:viusage*
+:viu[sage]		Show help on Normal mode commands.  Added to simulate
+			the Nvi command. {not in Vi}
 
 When no argument is given to |:help| the file given with the 'helpfile' option
 will be opened.  Otherwise the specified tag is searched for in all "doc/tags"

runtime/doc/version6.txt

@@ -1703,7 +1703,7 @@ GUI:
   is used.  Required for dead key support (and multi-byte input).
 - After a file selection dialog, check that the edited files were not changed
   or deleted.  The Win32 dialog allows deleting and renaming files.
-- Motif and Athena: Added support for "editres". (Martin Dalecki)
+- Motif and Athena: Added support for "editres". (Marcin Dalecki)
 - Motif and Athena: Added "menuFont" to be able to specify a font or fontset
   for the menus.  Can also be set with the "Menu" highlight group.  Useful
   when the locale is different from 'encoding'. (David Harrison)
@@ -1756,7 +1756,7 @@ GTK GUI: (partly by Marcin Dalecki)
 - When dropping a file on Vim, remove extra slashes from the start of the
   path.  Also shorten the file name if possible.
 
-Motif: (Martin Dalecki)
+Motif: (Marcin Dalecki)
 - Made the dialog layout better.
 - Added find and find/replace dialogs.
 - For the menus, change "iso-8859" to "iso_8859", Linux appears to need this.
@@ -3050,7 +3050,7 @@ Win32: Without scrollbars present, the MS mouse scroll wheel didn't work.
 Also handle the scrollbars when they are not visible.
 
 Motif: When there is no right scrollbar, the bottom scrollbar would still
-leave room for it.  (Martin Dalecki)
+leave room for it.  (Marcin Dalecki)
 
 When changing 'guicursor' and the value is invalid, some of the effects would
 still take place.  Now first check for errors and only make the new value
@@ -3136,7 +3136,7 @@ would crash.
 When doing ":view file" and it fails, the current buffer was made read-only.
 
 Motif: For some people the separators in the toolbar disappeared when resizing
-the Vim window. (Martin Dalecki)
+the Vim window. (Marcin Dalecki)
 
 Win32 GUI: when setting 'lines' to a huge number, would not compute the
 available space correctly.  Was counting the menu height twice.
@@ -3187,7 +3187,7 @@ second time it replaced all matches.  Removed the use of ":s///c".
 GTK: Similar problems with the find/replace dialog, moved the code to a common
 function.
 
-X11: Use shared GC's for text. (Martin Dalecki)
+X11: Use shared GC's for text. (Marcin Dalecki)
 
 "]i" found the match under the cursor, instead of the first one below it.
 Same for "]I", "] CTRL-I", "]d", "]D" and "] CTRL-D".

runtime/doc/version7.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Oct 07
+*version7.txt*  For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2005 Jan 25
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -17,8 +17,10 @@ INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES			|incompatible-7|
 
 NEW FEATURES				|new-7|
 
-New data types				|new-data-types|
+Vim script enhancements			|new-vim-script|
 KDE support				|new-KDE|
+Translated manual pages			|new-manpage-trans|
+Internal grep				|new-vimgrep|
 Various new items			|new-items-7|
 
 IMPROVEMENTS				|improvements-7|
@@ -35,6 +37,24 @@ run into a problem when upgrading from Vim 6.x to 7.0
 
 ":helpgrep" now uses a help window to display a match.
 
+In an argument list double quotes could be used to include spaces in a file
+name.  This caused a difference between ":edit" and ":next" for escaping
+double quotes and it is incompatible with some versions of Vi.
+	Command			Vim 6.x	file name	Vim 7.x file name ~
+	:edit foo\"888          'foo"888'         	'foo"888'
+	:next foo\"888          'foo888'          	'foo"888'
+	:next a\"b c\"d         'ab cd'           	'a"b' and 'c"d'
+
+A ":write file" command no longer resets the 'modified' flag of the buffer,
+unless the '+' flag is in 'cpoptions' |cpo-+|.  This was illogical, since the
+buffer is still modified compared to the original file.  And when undoing
+all changes the file would actually be marked modified.  It does mean that
+":quit" fails now.
+
+In a |literal-string| a single quote can be doubled to get one.
+":echo 'a''b'" would result in "a b", but now that two quotes stand for one it
+results in "a'b".
+
 
 Minor incompatibilities:
 
@@ -48,21 +68,48 @@ Removed the old and incomplete "VimBuddy" code.
 Buffers without a name report "No Name" instead of "No File".  It was
 confusing for buffers with a name and 'buftype' set to "nofile".
 
+When ":file xxx" is used in a buffer without a name, the alternate file name
+isn't set.  This avoids creating buffers without a name that are not useful.
+
+The "2html.vim" script now converts closed folds to HTML.  This means the HTML
+looks like its displayed, with the same folds open and closed.  Use "zR" if no
+folds should appear in the HTML. (partly by Carl Osterwisch)
+Diff mode now is also converted as it is displayed.
+
+Win32: The effect of the <F10> key depended on 'winaltkeys'.  Now it depends
+on whether <F10> has been mapped or not.  This allows mapping <F10> without
+changing 'winaltkeys'.
+
+When 'octal' is in 'nrformats' and using CTRL-A on "08" it became "018", which
+is illogical.  Now it becomes "9".  The leading zero(s) is(are) removed to
+avoid the number becoming octal after incrementing "009" to "010".
+
+When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, the value for 'fileencodings'
+now includes "default" before "latin1".  This means that for files with 8-bit
+encodings the default is to use the encoding specified by the environment, if
+possible.  Previously latin1 would always be used, which is wrong in a
+non-latin1 environment, such as Russian.
+
 ==============================================================================
 NEW FEATURES						*new-7*
 
-New data types						*new-data-types*
---------------
+Vim script enhancements					*new-vim-script*
+-----------------------
 
 In Vim scripts the following types have been added:
 
-	list		ordered list of items
-	dictionary	associative array of items
-	function	reference to a function
+	List		ordered list of items |List|
+	Dictionary	associative array of items |Dictionary|
+	Funcref		reference to a function |Funcref|
 
 Many functions and commands have been added to support the new types.
 
-NOT IMPLEMENTED YET!
+The |string()| function can be used to get a string representation of a
+variable.  Works for Numbers, Strings and composites of them.  Then |eval()|
+can be used to turn the string back into the variable value.
+
+The |:let| command can now use ":let var += expr" like using ":let var = var +
+expr".  "-=" and ".=" works in a similar way.
 
 
 KDE support						*new-KDE*
@@ -79,6 +126,7 @@ The MzScheme interpreter is supported. |MzScheme|
 The |:mzscheme| command can be used to execute MzScheme commands.
 The |:mzfile| command can be used to execute an MzScheme script file.
 
+
 Printing multi-byte text				*new-print-multi-byte*
 ------------------
 
@@ -87,6 +135,25 @@ The 'printmbcharset' and 'printmbfont' options are used for this.
 Also see |postscript-cjk-printing|.  (Mike Williams)
 
 
+Translated manual pages					*new-manpage-trans*
+-----------------------
+
+The manual page of Vim and associated programs is now also available in
+Italian (translated by Antonio Colombo).  More languages will follow.
+
+The Unix Makefile installs the Italian manual pages in .../man/it/man1/.
+
+
+Internal grep						*new-vimgrep*
+-------------
+
+The ":vimgrep" command can be used to search for a pattern in a list of files.
+This is like the ":grep" command, but no external program is used.  Besides
+better portability, handling of different file encodings and using multi-line
+patterns, this also allows grepping in compressed and remote files.
+|:vimgrep|.
+
+
 Various new items					*new-items-7*
 -----------------
 
@@ -107,6 +174,13 @@ Options: ~
 'mzquantum'		Time in msec to schedule MzScheme threads.
 'printmbcharset'	CJK character set to be used for :hardcopy
 'printmbfont'		font names to be used for CJK output of :hardcopy
+'fsync'			Whether fsync() is called after writing a file.
+			(Ciaran McCreesh)
+'wildoptions'		"tagfile" value enables listing the file name of
+			matching tags for CTRL-D command line completion.
+			(based on an idea from Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+'formatlistpat'		pattern to recognize a numbered list for formatting.
+			(idea by Hugo Haas)
 
 
 Ex commands: ~
@@ -124,21 +198,56 @@ Win32: The ":winpos" command now also works in the console. (Vipin Aravind)
 
 |:delmarks|		Delete marks.
 
+|:sandbox|		Command modifier: execute the argument in the sandbox.
+
+|:exusage|		Help for Ex commands (Nvi command).
+
+|:viusage|		Help for Vi commands (Nvi command).
+
+|:cbuffer|		Read error lines from a buffer. (partly by Yegappan
+			Lakshmanan)
 
 New functions: ~
 
-byteidx(expr, nr)	|byteidx()| 	Index of a character. (Ilya Sher)
-finddir(name)		|finddir()|	Find a directory in 'path'.
-findfile(name)		|findfile()|	Find a file in 'path'. (Johannes
-					Zellner)
-getfperm(fname)		|getfperm()|	Get file permission string. (Nikolai
-					Weibull)
-getftype(fname)		|getftype()|	Get type of file. (Nikolai Weibull)
-repeat(expr, count)	|repeat()| 	Repeat "expr" "count" times.
-					(Christophe Poucet)
-tr(expr, from, to)	|tr()|		Translate characters. (Ron Aaron)
-system(cmd, input)	|system()|	Filters {input} through a shell
-					command.
+|add()|			append an item to a List
+|append()|		append List of lines to the buffer
+|browsedir()|		Dialog to select a directory.
+|byteidx()| 		Index of a character. (Ilya Sher)
+|call()|		call a function with List as arguments
+|copy()|		make a shallow copy of a List or Dictionary
+|count()|		count nr of times a value is in a List or Dictionary
+|deepcopy()|		make a full copy of a List or Dictionary
+|empty()|		check if List or Dictionary is empty
+|extend()|		append one List to another or add items from one
+			Dictionary to another
+|filter()|		remove selected items from a List or Dictionary
+|finddir()|		Find a directory in 'path'.
+|findfile()|		Find a file in 'path'. (Johannes Zellner)
+|foldtextresult()|  	The text displayed for a closed fold at line "lnum".
+|function()|		make a Funcref out of a function name
+|get()|			get an item from a List or Dictionary
+|getfontname()| 	Get actual font name being used.
+|getfperm()|		Get file permission string. (Nikolai Weibull)
+|getftype()|		Get type of file. (Nikolai Weibull)
+|getline()|		get List with buffer lines
+|has_key()|		check whether a key appears in a Dictionary
+|insert()|		insert an item somewhere in a List
+|items()|		get List of Dictionary key-value pairs
+|join()|		join List items into a String
+|keys()|		get List of Dictionary keys
+|len()|			number of items in a List or Dictionary
+|map()|			change each List or Dictionary item
+|max()|			maximum value in a List or Dictionary
+|min()|			minimum value in a List or Dictionary
+|remove()|		remove one or more items from a List or Dictionary
+|repeat()| 		Repeat "expr" "count" times.  (Christophe Poucet)
+|reverse()|		reverse the order of a List
+|sort()|		sort a List
+|split()|		split a String into a List
+|string()|		String representation of a List or Dictionary
+|system()|		Filters {input} through a shell command.
+|tr()|			Translate characters. (Ron Aaron)
+|values()|		get List of Dictionary values
 
 
 New autocommand events: ~
@@ -174,6 +283,13 @@ SQL-Informix syntax file. (Dean L Hill)
 
 PHP compiler plugin. (Doug Kearns)
 
+Sive syntax file. (Nikolai Weibull)
+
+
+New Keymaps: ~
+
+Sinhala (Sri Lanka) (Harshula Jayasuriya)
+
 
 New message translations: ~
 
@@ -189,9 +305,25 @@ Also fixes the problem that setting 'clipboard' to "unnamed" breaks using
 
 Mac: GUI font selector. (Peter "Rain Dog" Cucka)
 
+GUI font selector for Motif. (Marcin Dalecki)
+
+Mnemonics for the Motif find/replace dialog. (Marcin Dalecki)
+
+Mac: better integration with Xcode.  Post a fake mouse-up event after the odoc
+event and the drag receive handler to work around a stall after Vim loads a
+file.  Fixed an off-by-one line number error. (Da Woon Jung)
+
 The netrw plugin now also supports viewing a directory, when "scp://" is used.
 Deleting and renaming files is possible.  (Charles Campbell)
 
+Added the t_SI and t_EI escape sequences for starting and ending Insert mode.
+To be used to set the cursor shape to a bar or a block.  No default values,
+they are not supported by termcap/terminfo.
+
+Autocommands can be defined local to a buffer.  This means they will also work
+when the buffer does not have a name or no specific name.  See
+|autocmd-buflocal|.  (Yakov Lerner)
+
 ==============================================================================
 IMPROVEMENTS						*improvements-7*
 
@@ -243,15 +375,67 @@ upper case.  Add color support to the builtin vt320 terminal codes.
 For the '%' item in 'viminfo', allow a number to set a maximum for the number
 of buffers.
 
+The 'statusline' option can be local to the window, so that each window can
+have a different value.  (partly by Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+
 When a file looks like a shell script, check for an "exec" command that starts
 the tcl interpreter. (suggested by Alexios Zavras)
 
 Support conversion between utf-8 and latin9 (iso-8859-15) internally, so that
 digraphs still work when iconv is not available.
 
+When a session file is loaded while editing an unnamed, empty buffer that
+buffer is wiped out.  Avoids that there is an unused buffer in the buffer
+list.
+
+Win32: When libintl.dll supports bind_textdomain_codeset(), use it.
+(NAKADAIRA Yukihiro)
+
+When foldtext() finds no text after removing the comment leader, use the
+second line of the fold.  Helps for C-style /* */ comments where the first
+line is just "/*".
+
+When editing the same file from two systems (e.g., Unix and MS-Windows) there
+mostly was no warning for an existing swap file, because the name of the
+edited file differs (e.g., y:\dir\file vs /home/me/dir/file).  Added a flag to
+the swap file to indicate it is in the same directory as the edited file.  The
+used path then doesn't matter and the check for editing the same file is much
+more reliable.
+
+Client-server communication now supports 'encoding'.  When setting 'encoding'
+in a Vim server to "utf-8", and using "vim --remote fname" in a console,
+"fname" is converted from the console encoding to utf-8.  Also allows Vims
+with different 'encoding' settings to exchange messages.
+
+Internal: Changed ga_room into ga_maxlen, so that it doesn't need to be
+incremented/decremented each time.
+
+Included a few improvements for Motif from Marcin Dalecki.  Draw label
+contents ourselves to make them handle fonts in a way configurable by Vim and
+a bit less dependent on the X11 font management.
+
+When a register is empty it is not stored in the viminfo file.
+
+Removed the tcltags script, it's obsolete.
+
+":redir @*>" and ":redir @+>" append to the clipboard.  Better check for
+invalid characters after the register name.
+
+":let g:" lists global variables.
+":let b:" lists buffer-local variables.
+":let w:" lists window-local variables.
+":let v:" lists Vim variables.
+
+The stridx() funcion takes a third argument, where to start searching.
+(Yegappan Lakshmanan)
+
 ==============================================================================
 COMPILE TIME CHANGES					*compile-changes-7*
 
+Dropped the support for the BeOS and Amiga GUI.  They were not maintained and
+probably didn't work.  If you want to work on this: get the Vim 6.x version
+and merge it back in.
+
 Mac: "make" now creates the Vim.app directory and "make install" copies it to
 its final destination. (Raf)
 
@@ -396,4 +580,132 @@ console version.
 Win32 GUI: latin9 text (iso-8859-15) was not displayed correctly, because
 there is no codepage for latin9.  Do our own conversion from latin9 to UCS2.
 
+When two versions of GTK+ 2 are installed it was possible to use the header
+files from one and the library from the other.  Use GTK_LIBDIR to put the
+directory for the library early in the link flags.
+
+With the GUI find/replace dialog a replace only worked if the pattern was
+literal text.  Now it works for any pattern.
+
+When 'equalalways' is set and 'eadirection' is "hor", ":quit" would still
+cause equalizing window heights in the vertical direction.
+
+When ":emenu" is used in a startup script the command was put in the typeahead
+buffer, causing a prompt for the crypt key to be messed up.
+
+Mac OS/X: The default for 'isprint' included characters 128-160, causes
+problems for Terminal.app.
+
+When a syntax item with "containedin" is used, it may match in the start or
+end of a region with a matchgroup, while this doesn't happen for a "contains"
+argument.
+
+When a transparent syntax items matches in another item where the highlighting
+has already stopped (because of a he= argument), the highlighting would come
+back.
+
+When cscope is used to set the quickfix error list, it didn't get set if there
+was only one match. (Sergey Khorev)
+
+When 'confirm' is set and using ":bdel" in a modified buffer, then selecting
+"cancel", would still give an error message.
+
+The PopUp menu items that started Visual mode didn't work when not in Normal
+mode.  Switching between selecting a word and a line was not possible.
+
+Win32: The keypad decimal point always resulted in a '.', while on some
+keyboards it's a ','.  Use MapVirtualKey(VK_DECIMAL, 2).
+
+Removed unused function DisplayCompStringOpaque() from gui_w32.c
+
+In Visual mode there is not always an indication whether the line break is
+selected or not.  Highlight the character after the line when the line break
+is included, e.g., after "v$o".
+
+GTK: The <F10> key can't be mapped, it selects the menu.  Disable that with a
+GTK setting and do select the menu when <F10> isn't mapped. (David Necas)
+
+After "Y" '[ and '] were not at start/end of the yanked text.
+
+When a telnet connection is dropped Vim preserves files and exits.  While
+doing that a SIGHUP may arrive and disturbe us, thus ignore it. (Scott
+Anderson)  Also postpone SIGHUP, SIGQUIT and SIGTERM until it's safe to
+handle.  Added handle_signal().
+
+When using "set laststatus=2 cmdheight=2" in the .gvimrc you may only get one
+line for the cmdline. (Christian Robinson)  Invoke command_height() after the
+GUI has started up.
+
+When completing a file name on the command line backslashes are required for
+white space.  Was only done for a space, not for a Tab.
+
+When configure could not find a terminal library, compiling continued for a
+long time before reporting the problem.  Added a configure check for tgetent()
+being found in a library.
+
+When the cursor is on the first char of the last line a ":g/pat/s///" command
+may cause the cursor to be displayed below the text.
+
+Win32: Editing a file with non-ASCII characters doesn't work when 'encoding'
+is "utf-8".  use _wfullpath() instead of _fullpath(). (Yu-sung Moon)
+
+When recovering the 'fileformat' and 'fileencoding' were taken from the
+original file instead of from the swapfile.  When the file didn't exist, was
+empty or the option was changed (e.g., with ":e ++fenc=cp123 file") it could
+be wrong.  Now store 'fileformat' and 'fileencoding' in the swapfile and use
+the values when recovering.
+
+":bufdo g/something/p" overwrites each last printed text line with the file
+message for the next buffer.  Temporarily clear 'shortmess' to avoid that.
+
+Win32: Cannot edit a file starting with # with --remote.  Do escape % and #
+when building the ":drop" command.
+
+A comment or | just after a expresion-backtick argument was not recognized.
+E.g. in :e `="foo"`"comment.
+
+"(" does not stop at an empty sentence (single dot and white space) while ")"
+does.  Also breaks "das" on that dot.
+
+When doing "yy" with the cursor on a TAB the ruler could be wrong and "k"
+moved the cursor to another column.
+
+When 'commentstring' is '"%s' and there is a double quote in the line a double
+quote before the fold marker isn't removed in the text displayed for a  closed
+fold.
+
+In Visual mode, when 'bin' and 'eol' set, g CTRL-G counted the last line
+break, resulting in "selected 202 of 201 bytes".
+
+Motif: fonts were not used for dialog components. (Marcin Dalecki)
+
+Motif: After using a toolbar button the keyboard focus would be on the toolbar
+(Lesstif problem). (Marcin Dalecki)
+
+When using "y<C-V>`x" where mark x is in the first column, the last line was
+not included.
+
+Not all test scripts work properly on MS-Windows when checked out from CVS.
+Use a Vim command to fix all fileformats to dos before executing the tests.
+
+When using ":new" and the file fits in the window, lines could still be above
+the window.  Now remove empty lines instead of keeping the relative position.
+
+Cmdline completion didn't work after ":let var1 var<Tab>".
+
+When using ":startinsert" or ":startreplace" when already in Insert mode
+(possible when using CTRL-R =), pressing Esc would directly restart Insert
+mode. (Peter Winters)
+
+"2daw" didn't work at end of file if the last word is a single character.
+
+Completion for ":next a'<Tab>" put a backslash before single quote, but it was
+not removed when editing a file.  Now halve backslashes in save_patterns().
+Also fix expanding a file name with the shell that contains "\'".
+
+When doing "1,6d|put" only "fewer lines" was reported.  Now a following "more
+lines" overwrites the message.
+
+Configure could not handle "-Dfoo=long\ long" in the TCL config output.
+
  vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl:

runtime/doc/vim-it.1

@@ -0,0 +1,558 @@
+.TH VIM 1 "22 febbraio 2002"
+.SH NOME
+vim \- VI Migliorato, un editor di testi per programmatori
+.SH SINTASSI
+.br
+.B vim
+[opzioni] [file ..]
+.br
+.B vim
+[opzioni] -
+.br
+.B vim
+[opzioni] \-t tag
+.br
+.B vim
+[opzioni] \-q [file_errori]
+.PP
+.br
+.B ex
+.br
+.B view
+.br
+.B gvim
+.B gview
+.B evim
+.B eview
+.br
+.B rvim
+.B rview
+.B rgvim
+.B rgview
+.SH DESCRIZIONE
+.B Vim
+Un editore di testi, compatibile con, e migliore di, Vi.
+Può essere usato per editare qualsiasi file di testo.
+Particolarmente utile per editare programmi.
+.PP
+Ci sono parecchi miglioramenti rispetto a Vi: undo multipli,
+finestre e buffer multipli, evidenziazione sintattica, possibilità
+di modificare la linea di comando, completamento nomi file, help
+in linea, selezione testi in modalità visuale, etc..
+Vedere ":help vi_diff.txt" per un sommario delle differenze fra
+.B Vim
+e Vi.
+.PP
+Mentre usate
+.B Vim
+potete ricevere molto aiuto dal sistema di help online, col comando ":help".
+Vedere qui sotto la sezione AIUTO ONLINE.
+.PP
+Quasi sempre
+.B Vim
+viene invocato, per modificare un file, col comando
+.PP
+	vim file
+.PP
+Più in generale
+.B Vim
+viene invocato con:
+.PP
+	vim [opzioni] [lista_file]
+.PP
+Se lista_file non è presente, l'editor inizia aprendo un buffer vuoto.
+Altrimenti, una e una sola delle quattro maniere indicate qui sotto può
+essere usata per scegliere uno o più file da modificare.
+.TP 12
+file ..
+Una lista di nomi di file.
+Il primo di questi sarà il file corrente, e verrà letto nel buffer.
+Il cursore sarà posizionato sulla prima linea del buffer.
+Potete arrivare agli altri file col comando ":next".
+Per editare un file il cui nome inizia per "-" premettete "--" alla
+lista_file.
+.TP
+-
+Il file da editare è letto dallo "stdin" [di solito, ma non
+necessriamente, il terminale - NdT].  I comandi sono letti da "stderr",
+che dovrebbe essere un terminale [tty].
+.TP
+-t {tag}
+Il file da editare e la posizione iniziale del cursore dipendono da "tag",
+una specie di "etichetta" a cui saltare.
+{tag} viene cercata nel file tags, ed il file ad essa associato diventa
+quello corrente, ed il comando ad essa associato viene eseguito.
+Di solito si usa per programmi C, nel qual caso {tag} potrebbe essere un
+nome di funzione.
+L'effetto è che il file contenente quella funzione diventa il file corrente
+e il cursore è posizionato all'inizio della funzione.
+Vedere ":help tag-commands".
+.TP
+-q [file_errori]
+Inizia nella modalità quickFix [correzione veloce].
+Il file [file_errori] è letto e il primo errore è visualizzato.
+Se [file_errori] non è indicato, il suo nome è ottenuto dal valore
+dell'opzione 'errorfile' (che, se non specificata, vale "AztecC.Err"
+per l'Amiga, "errors.err" su altri sistemi).
+Si può saltare all'errore successivo col comando ":cn".
+Vedere ":help quickfix".
+.PP
+.B Vim
+si comporta in modo diverso se invocato con nomi differenti (il programma
+eseguibile "sottostante" può essere sempre lo stesso).
+.TP 10
+vim
+Modalità "Normal", comportamento normale.
+.TP
+ex
+Inizia in modalità "Ex".
+Si può passare in modalità "Normal" col comandi ":vi".
+Si può invocare la modalità "Ex" anche con l'argomento "-e".
+.TP
+view
+Inizia in modalità "Sola Lettura".  Non potete modificare i file.
+Si può invocare la modalità "Sola Lettura" anche con l'argomento "-R".
+.TP
+gvim gview
+La versione GUI [Graphical User Interface].
+Apre una nuova finestra.
+Si può invocare la modalità "GUI" anche con l'argomento "-g".
+.TP
+evim eview
+La versione GUI in modalità "Facile" (semplificata).
+Apre una nuova finestra.
+Si può invocare la modalità "Facile" anche con l'argomento "-y".
+.TP
+rvim rview rgvim rgview
+Come sopra, ma con restrizioni ai comandi.  Non si potrnno eseguire comandi
+dello shell o sospendere
+.B Vim.
+Si può invocare la modalità "Ristretta" anche con l'argomento "-Z".
+.SH OPZIONI
+Le opzioni possono essere in un ordine qualsiasi, prima o dopo i nomi di
+file.  Opzioni che non necessitano un argomento possono essere raggruppate
+dietro a un solo "-".
+.TP 12
++[numero]
+Per il primo file il cursore sarà posizionato sulla linea "numero".
+Se "numero" manca, il cursore sarà posizionato sull'ultima linea del file.
+.TP
++/{espressione}
+Per il primo file il cursore sarà posizionato alla
+prima occorrenza di {espressione}.
+Vedere ":help search-pattern" per come specificare l'espressione.
+.TP
++{comando}
+.TP
+-c {comando}
+{comando} sarà eseguito dopo che il
+primo file è stato letto.
+{comando} è interpretato come un comando Ex.
+Se il {comando} contiene spazi deve essere incluso fra doppi apici
+(o altro delimitatore, a seconda dello shell che si sta usando).
+Esempio: Vim "+set si" main.c
+.br
+Note: Si possono avere fino a 10 comandi "+" o "-c".
+.TP
+-S {file}
+I comandi contenuti in {file} sono eseguiti dopo la lettura del primo file.
+Equivalente a -c "source {file}".
+{file} non può avere un nome che inizia per '-'.
+Se {file} è omesso si usa "Session.vim" (funziona solo se -S è l'ultimo
+argomento specificato).
+.TP
+--cmd {comando}
+Come "-c", ma il comando è eseguito PRIMA
+di eseguire qualsiasi file vimrc.
+Si possono usare fino a 10 di questi comandi, indipendentemente dai comandi
+"-c".
+.TP
+-A
+Se
+.B Vim
+è stato compilato con supporto ARABIC per editare file con orientamento
+destra-sinistra e tastiera con mappatura Araba, questa opzione inizia
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Arabic", cioè impostando 'arabic'.
+Altrimenti viene dato un messaggio di errore e
+.B Vim
+termina in modo anormale.
+.TP
+-b
+Modalità "Binaria".
+Vengono impostate alcune opzioni che permettono di modificare un file
+binario o un programma eseguibile.
+.TP
+-C
+Compatibile.  Imposta l'opzione 'compatible'.
+In questo modo
+.B Vim
+ha quasi lo stesso comportamento di Vi, anche in presenza di un file
+di configurazione .vimrc [proprio di Vim - NdT].
+.TP
+-d
+Inizia in modalità "Diff" [differenze].
+Dovrebbero esserci come argomenti due o tre nomi di file.
+.B Vim
+aprirà tutti i file evidenziando le differenze fra gli stessi.
+Funziona come vimdiff(1).
+.TP
+-d {dispositivo}
+Apre {dispositivo} per usarlo come terminale.
+Solo per l'Amiga.
+Esempio:
+"\-d con:20/30/600/150".
+.TP
+-D
+Debugging.  Vim si mette in modalità "debugging" a partire
+dall'esecuzione del primo comando da uno script.
+.TP
+-e
+Eseguire
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Ex", come se il programma eseguito sia "ex".
+.TP
+-E
+Eseguire
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Ex" migliorata, come se il programma eseguito sia "exim".
+.TP
+-f
+Direttamente [Foreground].  Per la versione GUI,
+.B Vim
+non crea [fork] una nuova finestra, indipendente dallo shell di invocazione.
+Per l'Amiga,
+.B Vim
+non è fatto ripartire per aprire una nuova finestra.
+Opzione da usare quando
+.B Vim
+è eseguito da un programma che attende la fine della
+sessione di edit (ad es. mail).
+Sull'Amiga i comandi ":sh" e ":!" non sono disponibili.
+.TP
+--nofork
+Direttamente [Foreground].  Per la versione GUI,
+.B Vim
+non crea [fork] una nuova finestra, indipendente dallo shell di invocazione.
+.TP
+-F
+Se
+.B Vim
+è stato compilato con supporto FKMAP per editare file con orientamento
+destra-sinistra e tastiera con mappatura Farsi, questa opzione inizia
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Farsi", cioè impostando 'fkmap' e 'rightleft'.
+Altrimenti viene dato un messaggio di errore e
+.B Vim
+termina in modo anormale.
+.TP
+-g
+Se
+.B Vim
+è stato compilato con supporto GUI, questa opzione chiede di usarla.
+Se Vim è stato compilato senza supporto GUI viene dato un messaggio di errore e
+.B Vim
+termina in modo anormale.
+.TP
+-h
+Un po' di aiuto su opzioni e argomenti che si possono dare invocando Vim.
+Subito dopo
+.B Vim
+esce.
+.TP
+-H
+Se
+.B Vim
+è stato compilato col supporto RIGHTLEFT per editare file con orientamento
+destra-sinistra e tastiera con mappatura Ebraica, questa opzione inizia
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Ebraica", cioè impostando 'hkmap' e 'rightleft'.
+Altrimenti viene dato un messaggio di errore e
+.B Vim
+termina in modo anormale.
+.TP
+-i {viminfo}
+Se è abilitato l'uso di un file viminfo, questa opzione indica il nome
+del file da usare invece di quello predefinito "~/.viminfo".
+Si può anche evitare l'uso di un file .viminfo, dando come nome "NONE".
+.TP
+-L
+Equivalente a -r.
+.TP
+-l
+Modalità Lisp.
+Imposta le opzini 'lisp' e 'showmatch'.
+.TP
+-m
+Inibisce modifica file.
+Annulla l'opzione 'write'.
+E' ancora possibile modificare un buffer [in memoria - Ndt], ma non scriverlo.
+.TP
+-M
+Modifiche non permesse.  Le opzioni 'modifiable' e 'write' sono annullate,
+in modo da impedire sia modifiche che riscritture.  Da notare che queste
+opzioni possono essere abilitate in seguito, permettendo così modifiche.
+.TP
+-N
+Modalità "Non-compatibile".  Annulla l'opzione 'compatible'.
+Così
+.B Vim
+va un po' meglio, ma è meno compatibile con Vi, anche in assenza di un
+file .vimrc.
+.TP
+-n
+Inibisce l'uso di un file di swap.
+Il recupero dopo una caduta di macchina diventa impossibile.
+Utile per editare un file su un supporto molto lento (ad es. floppy).
+Il comando ":set uc=0" ha lo stesso effetto.
+Per abilitare il recupero usare ":set uc=200".
+.TP
+-nb
+Diviene un Editor server per NetBeans.  Vedere la documentazione per dettagli.
+.TP
+-o[N]
+Apri N finestre in orizzontale.
+Se N manca, apri una finestra per ciascun file.
+.TP
+-O[N]
+Apri N finestre, in verticale.
+Se N manca, apri una finestra per ciascun file.
+.TP
+-R
+Modalità "Sola Lettura".
+Imposta l'opzione 'readonly'.
+Si può ancora modificare il buffer, ma siete protetti da una riscrittura
+involontaria.
+Se volete davvero riscrivere il file, aggiungete un punto esclamativo
+al comando "Ex", come in ":w!".
+L'opzione -R implica anche l'opzione -n (vedere sotto).
+L'opzione 'readonly' può essere annullata con ":set noro".
+Vedere ":help 'readonly'".
+.TP
+-r
+Lista file di swap, assieme a dati utili per un recupero.
+.TP
+-r {file}
+Modalità "Recovery".
+Il file di swap è usato per recuperare una sessione di edit finita male.
+Il file di swap è un file con lo stesso nome file del file di testo
+editato, col suffisso ".swp".
+Vedere ":help recovery".
+.TP
+-s
+Modalità silenziosa.  Solo quando invocato come "Ex" o quando l'opzione
+"-e" è stata data prima dell'opzione "-s".
+.TP
+-s {scriptin}
+Lo script file {scriptin} è letto.
+I caratteri nel file sono interpretati come se immessi da voi.
+Lo stesso si può ottenere col comando ":source! {scriptin}".
+Se la fine del file di input viene raggiunta prima che Vim termini,
+l'ulteriore input viene preso dalla tastiera.
+.TP
+-T {terminale}
+Dice a
+.B Vim
+quale tipo di terminale state usando.
+Utile solo se il terminale non viene riconosciuto correttamente da Vim.
+Dovrebbe essere un terminale noto a
+.B Vim
+(internamente) o definito nel file termcap o terminfo.
+.TP
+-u {vimrc}
+Usa i comandi nel file {vimrc} per inizializzazioni.
+Tutte le altre inizializzazioni non sono eseguite.
+Usate questa opzione per editare qualche file di tipo speciale.
+Può anche essere usato per non fare alcuna inizializzazione dando 
+come nome "NONE".
+Vedere ":help initialization" da vim per ulteriori dettagli.
+.TP
+-U {gvimrc}
+Usa i comandi nel file {gvimrc} per inizializzazioni GUI.
+Tutte le altre inizializzazioni GUI non sono eseguite.
+Può anche essere usata per non fare alcuna inizializzazione GUI dando 
+come nome "NONE".
+Vedere ":help gui-init" da vim per ulteriori dettagli.
+.TP
+-V[N]
+Verboso.  Vim manda messaggi relativi agli script file che esegue
+e quando legge o scrive un file viminfo.  Il numero opzionale N è il valore
+dell'opzione 'verbose'.
+Il valore predefinito è 10.
+.TP
+-v
+Inizia
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Vi", come se il programma eseguibile fosse "vi".  Questo ha
+effetto solo quando Vim viene invocato con il nome "ex".
+.TP
+-w {scriptout}
+Ogni carattere immesso viene registrato nel file {scriptout},
+finché non uscite da
+.B Vim.
+Utile se si vuole creare uno script file da usare con "vim -s" o
+":source!".
+Se il file {scriptout} esiste, quel che immettete viene aggiunto in fondo.
+.TP
+-W {scriptout}
+Come -w, ma uno script file esistente viene sovrascritto.
+.TP
+-x
+Uso di cifratura nella scrittura dei file.  E' necessario immettere
+una chiave di cifratura.
+.TP
+-X
+Non connetterti al server X.  Vim parte più rapidamente,
+ma il titolo della finestra e la clipboard non sono disponibili.
+.TP
+-y
+Eseguire
+.B Vim
+in modalità "Facile" (semplificata), come se l'eseguibile invocato
+sia "evim" o "eview".
+Fa sì che
+.B Vim
+si comporti come un editor che usa solo il mouse e i caratteri.
+.TP
+-Z
+Modalità "Ristretta".  Vim si comporta come se invocato con un nome
+che inizia per "r".
+.TP
+--
+Specifica la fine delle opzioni.
+Argomenti specificati dopo questo sono considerati nomi file.
+Si può usare per editare un file il cui nome inizi per '-'.
+.TP
+--echo-wid
+Solo con GUI GTK: Visualizza Window ID su "stdout".
+.TP
+--help
+Vim dà un messaggio ed esce, come con l'argomento "-h".
+.TP
+--literal
+Considera i nomi passati come argomenti letterai, senza espandere
+metacaratteri.  Non necessario in Unix, lo shell espande i metacaratteri.
+.TP
+--noplugin
+Non caricare plugin.  Implicito se si specifica -u NONE.
+.TP
+--remote
+Connettersi a un server Vim e chiedere di editare i file elencati come altri
+argomenti.  Se non si trova un server viene dato un messaggio e i file sono
+editati nel Vim corrente.
+.TP
+--remote-expr {expr}
+Connettersi a un server Vim, valutare ivi {expr} e stampare il risultatoi
+su "stdout".
+.TP
+--remote-send {chiavi}
+Connettersi a un server Vim e spedirgli {chiavi}.
+.TP
+--remote-silent
+Come --remote, ma senza avvisare se non si trova un server.
+.TP
+--remote-wait
+Come --remote, ma Vim non termina finché i file non sono stati editati.
+.TP
+--remote-wait-silent
+Come --remote-wait, ma senza avvisare se non si trova un server.
+.TP
+--serverlist
+Lista i nomi di tutti i server Vim disponibili.
+.TP
+--servername {nome}
+Usa {nome} come nome server.  Usato per il Vim corrente, a meno che sia
+usato con l'argomento --remote, nel qual caso indica il server a cui
+connettersi.
+.TP
+--socketid {id}
+Solo con GUI GTK: Usa il meccanismo GtkPlug per eseguire gvim in un'altra
+finestra.
+.TP
+--version
+Stampa la versione di Vim ed esci.
+.SH AIUTO ONLINE
+Battere ":help" in
+.B Vim
+per iniziare.
+Battere ":help argomento" per ricevere aiuto su uno specifico argomento.
+Per esempio: ":help ZZ" per ricevere aiuto sul comando "ZZ".
+Usare <Tab> e CTRL-D per completare gli argomenti
+(":help cmdline-completion").
+Ci sono "tag" nei file di help per saltare da un argomento a un altro
+(simili a legami ipertestuali, vedere ":help").
+Tutti i file di documentazione possono essere navigati così.  Ad es.:
+":help syntax.txt".
+.SH FILE
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
+I file di cocumentaziona di
+.B Vim
+.
+Usate ":help doc-file-list" per avere la lista completa.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
+Il file di tags usato per trovare informazioni nei file di documentazione.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
+Inizializzazioni sintattiche a livello di sistema.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/*.vim
+File di colorazione sintattica per vari linguaggi.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/vimrc
+Inizializzazioni
+.B Vim
+a livello di sistema.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/gvimrc
+Inizializzazioni gvim a livello di sistema.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
+Script Vim usato dal comando ":options", un modo semplice
+per visualizzare e impostare opzioni.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
+Inzializzazioni del menu gvim a livello di sistema.
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/bugreport.vim
+Script Vim per generare una segnalazione di errore.  Vedere ":help bugs".
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
+Script Vim per determinare il tipo di un file a partire dal suo nome.
+Vedere ":help 'filetype'".
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
+Script Vim per determinare il tipo di un file a partire dal suo contenuto.
+Vedere ":help 'filetype'".
+.TP
+/usr/local/lib/vim/*.ps
+File usati per stampa PostScript.
+.PP
+Per informazioni aggiornate [in inglese - NdT] vedere la home page di Vim:
+.br
+<URL:http://www.vim.org/>
+.SH VEDERE ANCHE
+vimtutor(1)
+.SH AUTORE
+Buona parte di
+.B Vim
+è stato scritto da Bram Moolenaar, con molto aiuto da altri.
+Vedere ":help credits" in
+.B Vim.
+.br
+.B Vim
+è basato su Stevie, scritto da: Tim Thompson,
+Tony Andrews e G.R. (Fred) Walter.
+In verità, poco o nulla è rimasto del loro codice originale.
+.SH BACHI
+Probabili.
+Vedere ":help todo" per una lista di problemi noti.
+.PP
+Si noti che un certo numero di comportamenti che possono essere considerati
+errori da qualcuno, sono in effetti causati da una riproduzione fin troppo
+fedele del comportamento di Vi.
+Se ritenete che altre cose siano errori "perché Vi si comporta diversamente",
+date prima un'occhiata al file vi_diff.txt
+(o battere :help vi_diff.txt da Vim).
+Date anche un'occhiata alle opzioni 'compatible' e 'cpoptions.

runtime/doc/vim.1

@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ If the {scriptout} file exists, characters are appended.
 Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
 .TP
 -x
-Use encryption when writing files.   Will prompt for a crypt key.
+Use encryption when writing files.  Will prompt for a crypt key.
 .TP
 -X
 Don't connect to the X server.  Shortens startup time in a terminal, but the
@@ -415,14 +415,14 @@ Arguments after this will be handled as a file name.
 This can be used to edit a filename that starts with a '-'.
 .TP
 --echo-wid
-GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
+GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout.
 .TP
 --help
 Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
 .TP
 --literal
-Take file name arguments literally, do not expand wildcards.  Not needed on
-Unix, the shell expand wildcards.
+Take file name arguments literally, do not expand wildcards.  This has no
+effect on Unix where the shell expands wildcards.
 .TP
 --noplugin
 Skip loading plugins.  Implied by -u NONE.

runtime/doc/vim.man

@@ -279,8 +279,8 @@ OPTIONS
        -W {scriptout}
                    Like -w, but an existing file is overwritten.
 
-       -x          Use  encryption  when  writing  files.    Will prompt for a
-                   crypt key.
+       -x          Use encryption when writing files.  Will prompt for a crypt
+                   key.
 
        -X          Don't connect to the X server.  Shortens startup time in  a
                    terminal,  but  the  window title and clipboard will not be
@@ -297,12 +297,13 @@ OPTIONS
                    be handled as a file name.  This can  be  used  to  edit  a
                    filename that starts with a '-'.
 
-       --echo-wid  GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout
+       --echo-wid  GTK GUI only: Echo the Window ID on stdout.
 
        --help      Give a help message and exit, just like "-h".
 
        --literal   Take  file  name  arguments  literally, do not expand wild-
-                   cards.  Not needed on Unix, the shell expand wildcards.
+                   cards.  This has no effect on Unix where the shell  expands
+                   wildcards.
 
        --noplugin  Skip loading plugins.  Implied by -u NONE.
 
@@ -311,18 +312,18 @@ OPTIONS
                    is given and the files are edited in the current Vim.
 
        --remote-expr {expr}
-                   Connect to a Vim server, evaluate {expr} in  it  and  print
+                   Connect  to  a  Vim server, evaluate {expr} in it and print
                    the result on stdout.
 
        --remote-send {keys}
                    Connect to a Vim server and send {keys} to it.
 
        --remote-silent
-                   As  --remote,  but  without  the  warning when no server is
+                   As --remote, but without the  warning  when  no  server  is
                    found.
 
        --remote-wait
-                   As --remote, but Vim does not exit  until  the  files  have
+                   As  --remote,  but  Vim  does not exit until the files have
                    been edited.
 
        --remote-wait-silent
@@ -333,31 +334,31 @@ OPTIONS
                    List the names of all Vim servers that can be found.
 
        --servername {name}
-                   Use {name} as the server name.  Used for the  current  Vim,
+                   Use  {name}  as the server name.  Used for the current Vim,
                    unless used with a --remote argument, then it's the name of
                    the server to connect to.
 
        --socketid {id}
-                   GTK GUI only: Use the GtkPlug  mechanism  to  run  gvim  in
+                   GTK  GUI  only:  Use  the  GtkPlug mechanism to run gvim in
                    another window.
 
        --version   Print version information and exit.
 
 ON-LINE HELP
-       Type  ":help"  in Vim to get started.  Type ":help subject" to get help
-       on a specific subject.  For example: ":help ZZ" to  get  help  for  the
-       "ZZ"  command.   Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects (":help cmd-
-       line-completion").  Tags are present to jump from one place to  another
+       Type ":help" in Vim to get started.  Type ":help subject" to  get  help
+       on  a  specific  subject.   For example: ":help ZZ" to get help for the
+       "ZZ" command.  Use <Tab> and CTRL-D to complete subjects  (":help  cmd-
+       line-completion").   Tags are present to jump from one place to another
        (sort of hypertext links, see ":help").  All documentation files can be
        viewed in this way, for example ":help syntax.txt".
 
 FILES
        /usr/local/lib/vim/doc/*.txt
-                      The Vim documentation files.  Use ":help  doc-file-list"
+                      The  Vim documentation files.  Use ":help doc-file-list"
                       to get the complete list.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/doc/tags
-                      The  tags file used for finding information in the docu-
+                      The tags file used for finding information in the  docu-
                       mentation files.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/syntax/syntax.vim
@@ -373,7 +374,7 @@ FILES
                       System wide gvim initializations.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/optwin.vim
-                      Script used for the ":options" command, a  nice  way  to
+                      Script  used  for  the ":options" command, a nice way to
                       view and set options.
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/menu.vim
@@ -383,11 +384,11 @@ FILES
                       Script to generate a bug report.  See ":help bugs".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/filetype.vim
-                      Script  to  detect  the type of a file by its name.  See
+                      Script to detect the type of a file by  its  name.   See
                       ":help 'filetype'".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/scripts.vim
-                      Script to detect the type of a  file  by  its  contents.
+                      Script  to  detect  the  type of a file by its contents.
                       See ":help 'filetype'".
 
        /usr/local/lib/vim/*.ps
@@ -402,17 +403,17 @@ SEE ALSO
 AUTHOR
        Most of Vim was made by Bram Moolenaar, with a lot of help from others.
        See ":help credits" in Vim.
-       Vim is based on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson,  Tony  Andrews  and
-       G.R.  (Fred) Walter.  Although hardly any of the original code remains.
+       Vim  is  based  on Stevie, worked on by: Tim Thompson, Tony Andrews and
+       G.R. (Fred) Walter.  Although hardly any of the original code  remains.
 
 BUGS
        Probably.  See ":help todo" for a list of known problems.
 
-       Note that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some,  are
-       in  fact  caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's behaviour.  And
-       if you think other things are bugs "because Vi  does  it  differently",
-       you  should  take  a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file (or type :help
-       vi_diff.txt when in Vim).  Also have a look  at  the  'compatible'  and
+       Note  that a number of things that may be regarded as bugs by some, are
+       in fact caused by a too-faithful reproduction of Vi's  behaviour.   And
+       if  you  think  other things are bugs "because Vi does it differently",
+       you should take a closer look at the vi_diff.txt file  (or  type  :help
+       vi_diff.txt  when  in  Vim).   Also have a look at the 'compatible' and
        'cpoptions' options.
 
 

runtime/doc/vimdiff-it.1

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.TH VIMDIFF 1 "30 marzo 2001"
+.SH NOME
+vimdiff \- modifica due o tre versioni di un file con Vim, visualizzando le
+differenze
+.SH SINTASSI
+.br
+.B vimdiff
+[opzioni] file1 file2 [file3]
+.PP
+.B gvimdiff
+.SH DESCRIZIONE
+.B Vimdiff
+inizia
+.B Vim
+per due (o tre) file.
+Ogni file ha una sua finestra.
+Le differenze fra file sono evidenziate.
+E' una maniera elegante per controllare modifiche e portare modifiche
+verso un'altra versione dello stesso file.
+.PP
+Vedere vim(1) per dettagli su Vim in generale.
+.PP
+Se iniziato con
+.B gvimdiff
+la GUI sarà utilizzata, se disponibile.
+.PP
+In ogni finestra l'opzione 'diff' è impostata, evidenziando così le
+differenze.
+.br
+Le opzioni 'wrap' e 'scrollbind' sono impostate per migliorare la
+visibilità del testo.
+.br
+L'opzione 'foldmethod' è impostata al valore "diff", che mette gruppi di
+linee uguali fra i diversi file in una piegatura. 'foldcolumn' è impostato
+a due per poter facilmente visualizzare le piegature, aprirle e chiuderle.
+.SH OPZIONI
+Lo schermo è diviso verticalmente, come se aveste usato l'opzione "-O".
+Per dividerlo orizzontalmente, usare l'opzione "-o".
+.PP
+Per tutte le altre opzioni, vedere vim(1).
+.SH VEDERE ANCHE
+vim(1)
+.SH AUTORE
+Buona parte di
+.B Vim
+è stato scritto da Bram Moolenaar, con molto aiuto da altri.
+Vedere ":help credits" in
+.B Vim.

runtime/doc/vimtutor-it.1

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+.TH VIMTUTOR 1 "2001 April 2"
+.SH NOME
+vimtutor \- the Vim tutor
+.SH SINTASSI
+.br
+.B vimtutor [lingua]
+.SH DESCRIZIONE
+.B Vimtutor
+inizia il
+.B Vim
+tutor.
+It copies the tutor file first, so that it can be modified without changing
+the original file.
+.PP
+The
+.B Vimtutor
+is useful for people that want to learn their first
+.B Vim
+commands.
+.PP
+The optional [language] argument is the two-letter name of a language, like
+"it" or "es".
+If the [language] argument is missing, the language of the current locale will
+be used.
+If a tutor in this language is available, it will be used.
+Otherwise the English version will be used.
+.PP
+.B Vim
+is always started in Vi compatible mode.
+.SH FILE
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor[.language]
+The
+.B Vimtutor
+text file(s).
+.TP 15
+/usr/local/lib/vim/tutor/tutor.vim
+The Vim script used to copy the
+.B Vimtutor
+text file.
+.SH AUTORE
+The
+.B Vimtutor
+è stato scritto in origine per Vi da Michael C. Pierce e Robert K. Ware,
+Colorado School of Mines, usando idee fornite da Charles Smith,
+Colorado State University.
+E-mail: bware@mines.colorado.edu.
+.br
+E' stato modificato per
+.B Vim
+da Bram Moolenaar.
+Per i nomi dei traduttori, vedere i file usati nelle rispettive lingue.
+.SH VEDERE ANCHE
+vim(1)

runtime/doc/visual.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Jun 08
+*visual.txt*    For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ However, when the 'selection' option is set to "exclusive" and the cursor is
 after the Visual area, the character under the cursor is not included.
 
 With "v" the text before the start position and after the end position will
-not be highlighted.  However, All uppercase and non-alpha operators, except
+not be highlighted.  However, all uppercase and non-alpha operators, except
 "~" and "U", will work on whole lines anyway.  See the list of operators
 below.
 
@@ -139,6 +139,9 @@ extended to the rightmost column of the longest line.
 If you want to highlight exactly the same area as the last time, you can use
 "gv" |gv| |v_gv|.
 
+							*v_<Esc>*
+<Esc>			In Visual mode: Stop Visual mode.
+
 							*v_CTRL-C*
 CTRL-C			In Visual mode: Stop Visual mode.  When insert mode is
 			pending (the mode message shows
@@ -176,7 +179,7 @@ When switching to another window on the same buffer, the cursor position in
 that window is adjusted, so that the same Visual area is still selected.  This
 is especially useful to view the start of the Visual area in one window, and
 the end in another.  You can then use <RightMouse> (or <S-LeftMouse> when
-'mousemodel' is "popup") to move either end of the Visual area.
+'mousemodel' is "popup") to drag either end of the Visual area.
 
 ==============================================================================
 4. Operating on the Visual area				*visual-operators*
@@ -362,7 +365,7 @@ Note that special characters (like '.' and '*') will cause problems.
 Visual-block Examples					*blockwise-examples*
 With the following text, I will indicate the commands to produce the block and
 the results below. In all cases, the cursor begins on the 'a' in the first
-line if the test text.
+line of the test text.
 The following modeline settings are assumed ":ts=8:sw=4:".
 
 It will be helpful to

runtime/doc/windows.txt

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Apr 29
+*windows.txt*   For Vim version 7.0aa.  Last change: 2004 Dec 29
 
 
 		  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar
@@ -101,6 +101,8 @@ when the last window also has a status line:
 	'laststatus' = 2	always a status line
 
 You can change the contents of the status line with the 'statusline' option.
+This option can be local to the window, so that you can have a different
+status line in each window.
 
 Normally, inversion is used to display the status line.  This can be changed
 with the 's' character in the 'highlight' option.  For example, "sb" sets it to
@@ -875,7 +877,7 @@ list of buffers. |unlisted-buffer|
 
 			1 #h  "/test/text"		line 1 ~
 			2u    "asdf"			line 0 ~
-			3 %l+ "version.c"		line 1 ~
+			3 %a+ "version.c"		line 1 ~
 
 		When the [!] is included the list will show unlisted buffers
 		(the term "unlisted" is a bit confusing then...).

runtime/doc/xxd-it.1

@@ -0,0 +1,402 @@
+.TH XXD 1 "Agosto 1996" "Pagina di manuale per xxd"
+.\"
+.\" 21 Maggio 1996
+.\" Autore della pagina di manuale:
+.\"    Tony Nugent <tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
+.\"    Modificato da Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
+.SH NOME
+.I xxd
+\- Produce esadecimale da un file binario o viceversa.
+.SH SINTASSI
+.B xxd
+\-h[elp]
+.br
+.B xxd
+[opzioni] [input_file [output_file]]
+.br
+.B xxd
+\-r[evert] [opzioni] [input_file [output_file]]
+.SH DESCRIZIONE
+.I xxd
+crea un'immagine esadecimale di un dato file o dello "standard input".
+Può anche ottenere da un'immagine esadecimale il file binario originale.
+Come
+.BR uuencode(1)
+e
+.BR uudecode(1)
+permette di trasmettere dati binari in una rapresentazione ASCII "a prova
+di email", ma ha anche il vantaggio di poter decodificare sullo "standard
+output".  Inoltre, può essere usato per effettuare delle modifiche (patch)
+a file binari.
+.SH OPZIONI
+Se non si specifica un
+.I input_file
+il programma legge dallo "standard input".
+Se
+.I input_file
+è specificato come il carattere
+.RB \` \- '
+, l'input è letto dallo "standard input".
+Se non si specifica un
+.I output_file
+(o si mette al suo posto il carattere
+.RB \` \- '
+), i risultati sono inviati allo "standard output".
+.PP
+Si noti che la scansione dei caratteri è "pigra", e non controlla oltre
+la prima lettera dell'opzione, a meno che l'opzione sia seguita da un
+parametro.
+Gli spazi fra una singola lettera di opzione e il corrispondente parametro
+dopo di essa sono facoltativi.
+I parametri delle opzioni possono essere specificati usando la notazione
+decimale, esadecimale oppure ottale.
+Pertanto
+.BR \-c8 ,
+.BR "\-c 8" ,
+.B \-c 010
+e
+.B \-cols 8
+sono notazioni equivalenti fra loro.
+.PP
+.TP
+.IR \-a " | " \-autoskip
+Richiesta di autoskip: Un singolo '*' rimpiazza linee di zeri binari.
+Valore predefinito: off.
+.TP
+.IR \-b " | " \-bits
+Richiesta di una immagine binaria (cifre binarie), invece che esadecimale.
+Questa opzione scrive un byte come otto cifre "1" e "0" invece di usare i
+numeri esadecimali. Ogni linea è preceduta da un indirizzo in esadecimale e
+seguita da una decodifica ascii (o ebcdic). Le opzioni specificabili dalla
+linea comando \-r, \-p, \-i non funzionano in questo modo.
+.TP
+.IR "\-c colonne " | " \-cols colonne"
+.IR "\-c colonne " | " \-cols colonne"
+In ogni linea sono formattate
+.RI < colonne >
+colonne. Valore predefinito 16 (\-i: 12, \-ps: 30, \-b: 6).
+Valore massimo 256.
+.TP
+.IR \-E " | " \-EBCDIC
+Cambia la codifica della colonna di destra da ASCII a EBCDIC.
+Questo non modifica la rappresentazione esadecimale. Non ha senso
+specificare questa opzione in combinazione con \-r, \-p o \-i.
+.TP
+.IR "\-g bytes " | " \-groupsize bytes"
+Inserisci ogni
+.RI < bytes >
+bytes di output (di due caratteri esadecimali o otto numeri binari ognuno)
+uno spazio bianco.
+Specificando
+.I \-g 0
+i bytes di output non sono separati da alcuno spazio.
+.RI < Bytes "> ha come valore predefinito " 2
+in modalità normale [esadecimale] e \fI1\fP in modalità binaria.
+Il raggruppamento non si applica agli stili "PostScript" e "include".
+.TP
+.IR \-h " | " \-help
+stampa un sommario dei comandi disponibili ed esce.  Non viene fatto
+null'altro.
+.TP
+.IR \-i " | " \-include
+L'output è nello stile dei file "include" in C.  Viene preparata la
+definizione completa di un "array" [vettore], dandogli il nome del
+file di input), tranne che nel caso in cui xxd legga dallo "standard input".
+.TP
+.IR "\-l lunghezza " | " \-len lunghezza"
+Il programma esce dopo aver scritto
+.RI  < lunghezza >
+bytes.
+.TP
+.IR \-p " | " \-ps " | " \-postscript " | " \-plain
+L'output è nello stile di un dump continuo sotto postscript.
+Noto anche come stile esadecimale semplice [plain].
+.TP
+.IR \-r " | " \-revert
+ricostruzione: converte (o mette una patch) a partire dall'immagine
+esadecimale, creando [o modificando] il file binario.
+Se non diretto allo "standard output", xxd scrive nel suo file di output
+in maniera continua, senza interruzioni.  Usare la combinazione
+.I \-r \-p
+per leggere dump in stile esadecimale semplice [plain], senza l'informazione
+di numero di linea e senza un particolare tracciato di colonna.  Degli spazi
+o delle linee vuote possono essere inserite a piacere [e vengono ingorate].
+.TP
+.I \-seek distanza
+Usato con l'opzione
+.I \-r
+: (ricostruzione),
+.RI < distanza >
+viene aggiunta alla posizione nel file trovata nella immagine
+esadecimale.
+.TP
+.I \-s [\+][\-]seek
+Inizia a
+.RI < seek >
+bytes assoluti (o relativi) di distanza all'interno di input_file.
+\fI\+ \fRindica che il "seek" è relativo alla posizione corrente nel file
+"standard input" (non significativa quando non si legge da "standard input").
+\fI\- \fRindica che il "seek" dovrebbe posizionarsi ad quel numero di
+caratteri dalla fine dell'input (o se in combinazione con
+\fI \+ \fR: prime della posizione corrente nel file "standard input").
+Se non si specifica una opzione \-s option, xxd inizia alla posizione
+corrente all'interno del file.
+.TP
+.I \-u
+usa lettere esadecimali maiuscole. Il valore predefinito è di usare
+lettere minuscole.
+.TP
+.IR \-v " | " \-version
+visualizza la stringa contenente la versione del programma.
+.SH ATTENZIONE
+.PP
+.I xxd \-r
+è capace di operare "magie" nell'utilizzare l'informazione "numero di linea".
+Se sul file di output ci si può posizionare usando la "seek", il numero di
+linea all'inizio di ogni riga esadecimale può essere non ordinato, delle
+linee possono mancare delle linee, oppure esserci delle sovrapposizioni.
+In simili casi xxd userà lseek(2) per raggiungere la posizione d'inizio.
+Se il file di output non consente di usare "seek", sono permessi solo dei
+"buchi", che saranno riempiti con zeri binari.
+.PP
+.I xxd \-r
+non genera mai errori di specifica parametri. I parametri non riconosciuti
+sono silenziosamente ignorati.
+.PP
+Nel modificare immagini esadecimali, tenete conto che
+.I xxd \-r
+salta il resto della linea, dopo aver letto abbastanza caratteri contenenti
+dati esadecimali (vedere opzione \-c). Ciò implica pure che le modifiche alle
+colonne di caratteri stampabili ascii (o ebcdic) sono sempre ignorate.
+La ricostruzione da un file immagine esadecimale in stile semplice
+(postscript) con xxd \-r \-p non dipende dal numero corrretto di colonne. 
+IN questo caso, qualsiasi cosa assomigli a una coppia di cifre esadecimali
+è interpretata [e utilizzata].
+.PP
+Notare la differenza fra
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-i file\fR
+.br
+e
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-i \< file\fR
+.PP
+.I xxd \-s \+seek
+può comportarsi in modo diverso da
+.I xxd \-s seek
+, perché lseek(2) è usata per tornare indietro nel file di input.  Il '+'
+fa differenza se il file di input è lo "standard input", e se la pozione nel
+file di "standard input" non è all'inizio del file quando xxd è eseguito,
+con questo input.
+I seguenti esempi possono contribuire a chiarire il concetto
+(o ad oscurarlo!)...
+.PP
+Riavvolge lo "standard input" prima di leggere; necessario perché `cat'
+ha già letto lo stesso file ["file"] fino alla fine dello "standard input".
+.br
+\fI% sh \-c 'cat > copia_normale; xxd \-s 0 > copia_esadecimale' < file
+.PP
+Stampa immagine esadecimale dalla posizione file 0x480 (=1024+128) in poi.
+Il segno `+' vuol dire "rispetto alla posizione corrente", quindi il `128'
+si aggiunge a 1k (1024) dove `dd' si era fermato.
+.br
+\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=normale bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +128 > esadecimale' < file
+.PP
+Immagine esadecimale dalla posizione 0x100 ( = 1024-768 ) del file in avanti.
+.br
+\fI% sh \-c 'dd of=normale bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > esadecimale' < file
+.PP
+Comunque, questo capita raramente, e l'uso del `+' di rado.
+L'autore preferisce monitorare il comportamento di xxd con strace(1) o
+truss(1), quando si usa l'opzione \-s.
+.SH ESEMPI
+.PP
+.br
+Stampa tutto tranne le prime tre linee (0x30 bytes esadecimali) di
+.B file
+\.
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-s 0x30 file
+.PP
+.br
+Stampa 3 linee (0x30 bytes esadecimali) alla fine di
+.B file
+\.
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-s \-0x30 file
+.PP
+.br
+Stampa 120 bytes come immagine esadecimale continua con 40 bytes per linea.
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-ps \-c 20 xxd.1\fR
+
+.br
+2e54482058584420312022417567757374203139
+.br
+39362220224d616e75616c207061676520666f72
+.br
+20787864220a2e5c220a2e5c222032317374204d
+.br
+617920313939360a2e5c22204d616e2070616765
+.br
+20617574686f723a0a2e5c2220202020546f6e79
+.br
+204e7567656e74203c746f6e79407363746e7567
+.br
+
+.br
+Stampa i primi 120 bytes della pagina di manuale vim.1 a 12 bytes per linea.
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-l 120 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
+
+
+.br
+0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 2241  .TH XXD 1 "A
+.br
+000000c: 7567 7573 7420 3139 3936 2220  ugust 1996" 
+.br
+0000018: 224d 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765  "Manual page
+.br
+0000024: 2066 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c   for xxd"..\
+.br
+0000030: 220a 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d  "..\" 21st M
+.br
+000003c: 6179 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220  ay 1996..\" 
+.br
+0000048: 4d61 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574  Man page aut
+.br
+0000054: 686f 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020  hor:..\"    
+.br
+0000060: 546f 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420  Tony Nugent 
+.br
+000006c: 3c74 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567  <tony@sctnug
+.PP
+.br
+Visualizza la data dal file xxd.1
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-s 0x36 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd.1\fR
+.br
+0000036: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  21st May 1996
+.PP
+.br
+Copiare
+.B input_file
+su
+.B output_file
+premettendogli 100 bytes a 0x00.
+.br
+\fI% xxd input_file | xxd \-r \-s 100 \> output_file\fR
+.br
+
+.br
+Modificare (patch) la data nel file xxd.1
+.br
+\fI% echo '0000037: 3574 68' | xxd \-r \- xxd.1\fR
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-s 0x36 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd.1\fR
+.br
+0000036: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  25th May 1996
+.PP
+.br
+Creare un file di 65537 tutto a 0x00,
+tranne che l'ultimo carattere che è una 'A' (esadecimale 0x41).
+.br
+\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \> file\fR
+.PP
+.br
+Stampa una immagine esadecimale del file  di cui sopra con opzione autoskip.
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-a \-c 12 file\fR
+.br
+0000000: 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000  ............
+.br
+*
+.br
+000fffc: 0000 0000 40                   ....A
+.PP
+Crea un file di 1 byte che contiene il solo carattere 'A'.
+Il numero dopo '\-r \-s' viene aggiunto a quello trovato nel file;
+in pratica, i bytes precedenti non sono stampati.
+.br
+\fI% echo '010000: 41' | xxd \-r \-s \-0x10000 \> file\fR
+.PP
+Usare xxd come filtro all'interno di un editor come
+.B vim(1)
+per ottenere una immagine esadecimale di una parte di file
+delimitata dai mark `a' e `z'.
+.br
+\fI:'a,'z!xxd\fR
+.PP
+Usare xxd come filtro all'interno di un editor come
+.B vim(1)
+per ricostruire un pezzo di file binario da una immagine esadecimale
+delimitata dai mark `a' e `z'.
+.br
+\fI:'a,'z!xxd \-r\fR
+.PP
+Usare xxd come filtro all'interno di un editor come
+.B vim(1)
+per ricostruire una sola linea di file binario da una immagine esadecimale,
+Portare il cursore sopra la linea e battere:
+.br
+\fI!!xxd \-r\fR
+.PP
+Per leggere singoli charatteri da una linea seriale
+.br
+\fI% xxd \-c1 < /dev/term/b &\fR
+.br
+\fI% stty < /dev/term/b \-echo \-opost \-isig \-icanon min 1\fR
+.br
+\fI% echo \-n foo > /dev/term/b\fR
+.PP
+.SH CODICI DI RITORNO
+Il programma può restituire questi codici di errore:
+.TP
+0
+nessun errore rilevato.
+.TP
+\-1
+operazione non supportata (
+.I xxd \-r \-i
+non ancora possible).
+.TP
+1
+errore durante la scansione parametri.
+.TP
+2
+problemi con il file di input.
+.TP
+3
+problemi con il file di output.
+.TP
+4,5
+posizione "seek" specificata non raggiungibile all'interno del file.
+.SH VEDERE ANCHE
+uuencode(1), uudecode(1), patch(1)
+.br
+.SH AVVERTIMENTI
+La stranezza dello strumento rispecchia la mente del suo creatore.
+Usate a vostro rischio e pericolo. Copiate i file. Tracciate l'esecuzione.
+Diventate un mago.
+.br
+.SH VERSIONE
+Questa pagina di manuale documenta la versione 1.7 di xxd.
+.SH AUTORE
+.br
+(c) 1990-1997 Juergen Weigert
+.br
+<jnweiger@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
+.LP
+Distribuite liberamente ed attribuitemi il credito,
+.br
+fate soldi e condivideteli con me
+.br
+perdete soldi e non venite a chiederli a me.
+.PP
+Pagina di manuale messa in piedi da Tony Nugent
+.br
+<tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
+.br
+Piccole modifiche di Bram Moolenaar.
+Modificato da Juergen Weigert.
+.PP

runtime/doc/xxd.1

@@ -62,12 +62,11 @@ toggle autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
 .IR \-b " | " \-bits
 Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.
 This option writes octets as eight digits "1"s and "0"s instead of a normal
-hexacecimal dump. Each line is preceded by a line number in hexadecimal and
+hexadecimal dump. Each line is preceded by a line number in hexadecimal and
 followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representation. The command line switches
 \-r, \-p, \-i do not work with this mode.
 .TP
 .IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
-.IR "\-c cols " | " \-cols cols"
 format
 .RI < cols >
 octets per line. Default 16 (\-i: 12, \-ps: 30, \-b: 6). Max 256.
@@ -78,7 +77,7 @@ This does not change the hexadecimal representation. The option is
 meaningless in combinations with \-r, \-p or \-i.
 .TP
 .IR "\-g bytes " | " \-groupsize bytes"
-seperate the output of every
+separate the output of every
 .RI < bytes >
 bytes (two hex characters or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.
 Specify
@@ -139,7 +138,7 @@ show version string.
 .PP
 .I xxd \-r
 has some builtin magic while evaluating line number information.
-If the ouput file is seekable, then the linenumbers at the start of each
+If the output file is seekable, then the linenumbers at the start of each
 hexdump line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or overlapping. In
 these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If the output file is not
 seekable, only gaps are allowed, which will be filled by null-bytes.
@@ -152,7 +151,7 @@ When editing hexdumps, please note that
 skips everything on the input line after reading enough columns of hexadecimal
 data (see option \-c). This also means, that changes to the printable ascii (or
 ebcdic) columns are always ignored. Reverting a plain (or postscript) style
-hexdump with xxd \-r \-p does not depend on the correct number of columns. Here an thing that looks like a pair of hex-digits is interpreted.
+hexdump with xxd \-r \-p does not depend on the correct number of columns. Here anything that looks like a pair of hex-digits is interpreted.
 .PP
 Note the difference between
 .br
@@ -186,7 +185,7 @@ Hexdump from file position 0x100 ( = 1024-768) on.
 \fI% sh \-c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd \-s +-768 > hex_snippet' < file
 .PP
 However, this is a rare situation and the use of `+' is rarely needed.
-the author prefers to monitor the effect of xxd with strace(1) or truss(1), whenever \-s is used.
+The author prefers to monitor the effect of xxd with strace(1) or truss(1), whenever \-s is used.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
 .br
@@ -208,17 +207,17 @@ Print 120 bytes as continuous hexdump with 40 octets per line.
 .br
 \fI% xxd \-l 120 \-ps \-c 20 xxd.1\fR
 .br
-2e544820585844203120224d616e75616c207061
+2e54482058584420312022417567757374203139
 .br
-676520666f7220787864220a2e5c220a2e5c2220
+39362220224d616e75616c207061676520666f72
 .br
-32317374204d617920313939360a2e5c22204d61
+20787864220a2e5c220a2e5c222032317374204d
 .br
-6e207061676520617574686f723a0a2e5c222020
+617920313939360a2e5c22204d616e2070616765
 .br
-2020546f6e79204e7567656e74203c746f6e7940
+20617574686f723a0a2e5c2220202020546f6e79
 .br
-7363746e7567656e2e7070702e67752e6564752e
+204e7567656e74203c746f6e79407363746e7567
 .br
 
 .br
@@ -226,32 +225,32 @@ Hexdump the first 120 bytes of this man page with 12 octets per line.
 .br
 \fI% xxd \-l 120 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
 .br
-0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 224d  .TH XXD 1 "M
+0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 2241  .TH XXD 1 "A
 .br
-000000c: 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765 2066  anual page f
+000000c: 7567 7573 7420 3139 3936 2220  ugust 1996" 
 .br
-0000018: 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c 220a  or xxd"..\\".
+0000018: 224d 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765  "Manual page
 .br
-0000024: 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d 6179  .\\" 21st May
+0000024: 2066 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c   for xxd"..\\
 .br
-0000030: 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220 4d61   1996..\\" Ma
+0000030: 220a 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d  "..\\" 21st M
 .br
-000003c: 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574 686f  n page autho
+000003c: 6179 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220  ay 1996..\\" 
 .br
-0000048: 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020 546f  r:..\\"    To
+0000048: 4d61 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574  Man page aut
 .br
-0000054: 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420 3c74  ny Nugent <t
+0000054: 686f 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020  hor:..\\"    
 .br
-0000060: 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567 656e  ony@sctnugen
+0000060: 546f 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420  Tony Nugent 
 .br
-000006c: 2e70 7070 2e67 752e 6564 752e  .ppp.gu.edu.
+000006c: 3c74 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567  <tony@sctnug
 .PP
 .br
 Display just the date from the file xxd.1
 .br
-\fI% xxd \-s 0x28 \-l 12 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
+\fI% xxd \-s 0x36 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd.1\fR
 .br
-0000028: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939  21st May 199
+0000036: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  21st May 1996
 .PP
 .br
 Copy
@@ -266,11 +265,11 @@ and prepend 100 bytes of value 0x00.
 .br
 Patch the date in the file xxd.1
 .br
-\fI% echo '0000029: 3574 68' | xxd \-r \- xxd.1\fR
+\fI% echo '0000037: 3574 68' | xxd \-r \- xxd.1\fR
 .br
-\fI% xxd \-s 0x28 \-l 12 \-c 12 xxd.1\fR
+\fI% xxd \-s 0x36 \-l 13 \-c 13 xxd.1\fR
 .br
-0000028: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939  25th May 199
+0000036: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  25th May 1996
 .PP
 .br
 Create a 65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00,

runtime/doc/xxd.man

@@ -1,9 +1,7 @@
+XXD(1)                                                                  XXD(1)
 
 
 
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
-
 NAME
        xxd - make a hexdump or do the reverse.
 
@@ -13,239 +11,184 @@ SYNOPSIS
        xxd -r[evert] [options] [infile [outfile]]
 
 DESCRIPTION
-       xxd  creates a hex dump of a given file or standard input.
-       It can also convert a hex dump back to its original binary
-       form.   Like  uuencode(1)  and  uudecode(1)  it allows the
-       transmission of binary data in a `mail-safe' ASCII  repre-
-       sentation,  but  has the advantage of decoding to standard
-       output.  Moreover, it can be used to perform  binary  file
-       patching.
+       xxd  creates a hex dump of a given file or standard input.  It can also
+       convert a hex dump back to its original binary form.  Like  uuencode(1)
+       and  uudecode(1)  it allows the transmission of binary data in a `mail-
+       safe' ASCII representation, but has the advantage of decoding to  stan-
+       dard output.  Moreover, it can be used to perform binary file patching.
 
 OPTIONS
-       If  no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile
-       is specified as a `-' character, then input is taken  from
-       standard  input.  If no outfile is given (or a `-' charac-
-       ter is in its place), results are sent to standard output.
+       If no infile is given, standard input is read.  If infile is  specified
+       as  a  `-'  character,  then input is taken from standard input.  If no
+       outfile is given (or a `-' character is in its place), results are sent
+       to standard output.
 
-       Note that a "lazy" parser is used which does not check for
-       more than the first option letter, unless  the  option  is
-       followed  by  a parameter.  Spaces between a single option
-       letter and its  parameter  are  optional.   Parameters  to
-       options  can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal or octal
-       notation.  Thus -c8, -c 8, -c 010  and  -cols  8  are  all
-       equivalent.
+       Note  that  a  "lazy" parser is used which does not check for more than
+       the first option letter, unless the option is followed by a  parameter.
+       Spaces  between  a single option letter and its parameter are optional.
+       Parameters to options can be specified in decimal, hexadecimal or octal
+       notation.  Thus -c8, -c 8, -c 010 and -cols 8 are all equivalent.
 
 
        -a | -autoskip
-              toggle  autoskip:  A single '*' replaces nul-lines.
-              Default off.
+              toggle  autoskip: A single '*' replaces nul-lines.  Default off.
 
        -b | -bits
-              Switch to bits (binary digits)  dump,  rather  than
-              hexdump.  This option writes octets as eight digits
-              "1"s and "0"s instead of a normal hexacecimal dump.
-              Each line is preceded by a line number in hexadeci-
-              mal and followed by an ascii (or ebcdic)  represen-
-              tation. The command line switches -r, -p, -i do not
-              work with this mode.
+              Switch to bits (binary digits) dump, rather than hexdump.   This
+              option  writes octets as eight digits "1"s and "0"s instead of a
+              normal hexadecimal dump. Each line is preceded by a line  number
+              in  hexadecimal and followed by an ascii (or ebcdic) representa-
+              tion. The command line switches -r, -p, -i do not work with this
+              mode.
 
        -c cols | -cols cols
-              -c cols | -cols cols format <cols> octets per line.
-              Default 16 (-i: 12, -ps: 30, -b: 6). Max 256.
+              format  <cols> octets per line. Default 16 (-i: 12, -ps: 30, -b:
+              6). Max 256.
 
        -E | -EBCDIC
-              Change the character encoding in the righthand col-
-              umn from ASCII to EBCDIC.  This does not change the
-              hexadecimal  representation. The option is meaning-
-              less in combinations with -r, -p or -i.
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          1
-
-
-
-
-
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
+              Change the character encoding in the righthand column from ASCII
+              to EBCDIC.  This does not change the hexadecimal representation.
+              The option is meaningless in combinations with -r, -p or -i.
 
        -g bytes | -groupsize bytes
-              seperate the output of every <bytes> bytes (two hex
-              characters  or  eight bit-digits each) by a whites-
-              pace.  Specify -g 0 to suppress grouping.   <Bytes>
-              defaults  to  2  in normal mode and 1 in bits mode.
-              Grouping does not apply to  postscript  or  include
+              separate the output of every <bytes> bytes (two  hex  characters
+              or eight bit-digits each) by a whitespace.  Specify -g 0 to sup-
+              press grouping.  <Bytes> defaults to 2 in normal mode and  1  in
+              bits  mode.   Grouping  does  not apply to postscript or include
               style.
 
        -h | -help
-              print a summary of available commands and exit.  No
-              hex dumping is performed.
+              print a summary of available commands and exit.  No hex  dumping
+              is performed.
 
        -i | -include
-              output in C include file style. A  complete  static
-              array  definition is written (named after the input
-              file), unless xxd reads from stdin.
+              output  in C include file style. A complete static array defini-
+              tion is written (named after the input file), unless  xxd  reads
+              from stdin.
 
        -l len | -len len
               stop after writing <len> octets.
 
        -p | -ps | -postscript | -plain
-              output in postscript continuous hexdump style. Also
-              known as plain hexdump style.
+              output  in  postscript  continuous  hexdump style. Also known as
+              plain hexdump style.
 
        -r | -revert
-              reverse  operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into
-              binary.  If not writing to stdout, xxd writes  into
-              its output file without truncating it. Use the com-
-              bination -r -p  to  read  plain  hexadecimal  dumps
-              without  line number information and without a par-
-              ticular column layout.  Additional  Whitespace  and
-              line-breaks are allowed anywhere.
+              reverse operation: convert (or patch) hexdump into  binary.   If
+              not  writing  to stdout, xxd writes into its output file without
+              truncating it. Use the combination -r -p to read plain hexadeci-
+              mal dumps without line number information and without a particu-
+              lar column layout. Additional  Whitespace  and  line-breaks  are
+              allowed anywhere.
 
        -seek offset
-              When  used after -r : revert with <offset> added to
-              file positions found in hexdump.
+              When  used  after  -r : revert with <offset> added to file posi-
+              tions found in hexdump.
 
        -s [+][-]seek
-              start at <seek> bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.
-              +  indicates  that the seek is relative to the cur-
-              rent stdin  file  position  (meaningless  when  not
-              reading  from  stdin).   -  indicates that the seek
-              should be that many characters from the end of  the
-              input (or if combined with
-               +  :  before  the  current  stdin  file position).
-              Without -s option, xxd starts at the  current  file
-              position.
+              start at <seek> bytes abs. (or rel.) infile offset.  + indicates
+              that  the  seek  is  relative to the current stdin file position
+              (meaningless when not reading from stdin).  - indicates that the
+              seek  should  be  that many characters from the end of the input
+              (or if combined with
+               + : before  the  current  stdin  file  position).   Without  -s
+              option, xxd starts at the current file position.
 
-       -u     use  upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
+       -u     use upper case hex letters. Default is lower case.
 
        -v | -version
               show version string.
 
-
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          2
-
-
-
-
-
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
-
 CAVEATS
-       xxd -r has some builtin magic while evaluating line number
-       information.   If  the  ouput  file  is seekable, then the
-       linenumbers at the start of each hexdump line may  be  out
-       of  order,  lines may be missing, or overlapping. In these
-       cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If the  out-
-       put  file  is  not  seekable, only gaps are allowed, which
-       will be filled by null-bytes.
+       xxd -r has some builtin magic while evaluating line number information.
+       If the output file is seekable, then the linenumbers at  the  start  of
+       each  hexdump  line may be out of order, lines may be missing, or over-
+       lapping. In these cases xxd will lseek(2) to the next position. If  the
+       output  file  is  not  seekable,  only  gaps are allowed, which will be
+       filled by null-bytes.
 
-       xxd -r never generates parse errors. Garbage  is  silently
-       skipped.
+       xxd -r never generates parse errors. Garbage is silently skipped.
 
-       When  editing  hexdumps,  please  note  that  xxd -r skips
-       everything on the input line after reading enough  columns
-       of hexadecimal data (see option -c). This also means, that
-       changes to the printable ascii  (or  ebcdic)  columns  are
-       always  ignored.  Reverting  a plain (or postscript) style
-       hexdump with xxd -r -p does not depend on the correct num-
-       ber  of  columns.  Here an thing that looks like a pair of
-       hex-digits is interpreted.
+       When editing hexdumps, please note that xxd -r skips everything on  the
+       input line after reading enough columns of hexadecimal data (see option
+       -c). This also means, that changes to the printable ascii  (or  ebcdic)
+       columns  are  always  ignored.  Reverting a plain (or postscript) style
+       hexdump with xxd -r -p does not depend on the correct  number  of  col-
+       umns.  Here  anything  that  looks  like a pair of hex-digits is inter-
+       preted.
 
        Note the difference between
        % xxd -i file
        and
        % xxd -i < file
 
-       xxd -s +seek may be  different  from  xxd  -s  seek  ,  as
-       lseek(2) is used to "rewind" input.  A '+' makes a differ-
-       ence if the input source is stdin,  and  if  stdin's  file
-       position  is  not at the start of the file by the time xxd
-       is started and given its input.   The  following  examples
-       may help to clarify (or further confuse!)...
+       xxd -s +seek may be different from xxd -s seek , as lseek(2) is used to
+       "rewind" input.  A '+' makes a difference if the input source is stdin,
+       and if stdin's file position is not at the start of  the  file  by  the
+       time  xxd  is  started and given its input.  The following examples may
+       help to clarify (or further confuse!)...
 
-       Rewind  stdin before reading; needed because the `cat' has
-       already read to the end of stdin.
+       Rewind stdin before reading; needed because the `cat' has already  read
+       to the end of stdin.
        % sh -c 'cat > plain_copy; xxd -s 0 > hex_copy' < file
 
-       Hexdump from file position 0x480 (=1024+128) onwards.  The
-       `+'  sign  means  "relative to the current position", thus
-       the `128' adds to the 1k where dd left off.
-       % sh -c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +128  >
-       hex_snippet' < file
+       Hexdump  from  file  position  0x480 (=1024+128) onwards.  The `+' sign
+       means "relative to the current position", thus the `128' adds to the 1k
+       where dd left off.
+       %  sh -c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +128 > hex_snippet'
+       < file
 
        Hexdump from file position 0x100 ( = 1024-768) on.
-       % sh -c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +-768 >
-       hex_snippet' < file
+       % sh -c 'dd of=plain_snippet bs=1k count=1; xxd -s +-768 > hex_snippet'
+       < file
 
-       However, this is a rare situation and the use  of  `+'  is
-       rarely  needed.   the author prefers to monitor the effect
-       of xxd with strace(1) or truss(1), whenever -s is used.
+       However,  this is a rare situation and the use of `+' is rarely needed.
+       The author prefers to monitor the  effect  of  xxd  with  strace(1)  or
+       truss(1), whenever -s is used.
 
 EXAMPLES
-       Print everything but  the  first  three  lines  (hex  0x30
-       bytes) of file
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          3
-
-
-
-
-
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
-
+       Print everything but the first three lines (hex 0x30 bytes) of file
        % xxd -s 0x30 file
 
        Print 3 lines (hex 0x30 bytes) from the end of file
        % xxd -s -0x30 file
 
-       Print  120  bytes as continuous hexdump with 40 octets per
-       line.
+       Print 120 bytes as continuous hexdump with 40 octets per line.
        % xxd -l 120 -ps -c 20 xxd.1
-       2e544820585844203120224d616e75616c207061
-       676520666f7220787864220a2e5c220a2e5c2220
-       32317374204d617920313939360a2e5c22204d61
-       6e207061676520617574686f723a0a2e5c222020
-       2020546f6e79204e7567656e74203c746f6e7940
-       7363746e7567656e2e7070702e67752e6564752e
+       2e54482058584420312022417567757374203139
+       39362220224d616e75616c207061676520666f72
+       20787864220a2e5c220a2e5c222032317374204d
+       617920313939360a2e5c22204d616e2070616765
+       20617574686f723a0a2e5c2220202020546f6e79
+       204e7567656e74203c746f6e79407363746e7567
 
-       Hexdump the first 120 bytes  of  this  man  page  with  12
-       octets per line.
+       Hexdump the first 120 bytes of this man page with 12 octets per line.
        % xxd -l 120 -c 12 xxd.1
-       0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 224d  .TH XXD 1 "M
-       000000c: 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765 2066  anual page f
-       0000018: 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c 220a  or xxd"..\".
-       0000024: 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d 6179  .\" 21st May
-       0000030: 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220 4d61   1996..\" Ma
-       000003c: 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574 686f  n page autho
-       0000048: 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020 546f  r:..\"    To
-       0000054: 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420 3c74  ny Nugent <t
-       0000060: 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567 656e  ony@sctnugen
-       000006c: 2e70 7070 2e67 752e 6564 752e  .ppp.gu.edu.
+       0000000: 2e54 4820 5858 4420 3120 2241  .TH XXD 1 "A
+       000000c: 7567 7573 7420 3139 3936 2220  ugust 1996"
+       0000018: 224d 616e 7561 6c20 7061 6765  "Manual page
+       0000024: 2066 6f72 2078 7864 220a 2e5c   for xxd"..\
+       0000030: 220a 2e5c 2220 3231 7374 204d  "..\" 21st M
+       000003c: 6179 2031 3939 360a 2e5c 2220  ay 1996..\"
+       0000048: 4d61 6e20 7061 6765 2061 7574  Man page aut
+       0000054: 686f 723a 0a2e 5c22 2020 2020  hor:..\"
+       0000060: 546f 6e79 204e 7567 656e 7420  Tony Nugent
+       000006c: 3c74 6f6e 7940 7363 746e 7567  <tony@sctnug
 
        Display just the date from the file xxd.1
-       % xxd -s 0x28 -l 12 -c 12 xxd.1
-       0000028: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939  21st May 199
+       % xxd -s 0x36 -l 13 -c 13 xxd.1
+       0000036: 3231 7374 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  21st May 1996
 
-       Copy  input_file  to  output_file and prepend 100 bytes of
-       value 0x00.
+       Copy input_file to output_file and prepend 100 bytes of value 0x00.
        % xxd input_file | xxd -r -s 100 > output_file
 
        Patch the date in the file xxd.1
-       % echo '0000029: 3574 68' | xxd -r - xxd.1
-       % xxd -s 0x28 -l 12 -c 12 xxd.1
-       0000028: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939  25th May 199
+       % echo '0000037: 3574 68' | xxd -r - xxd.1
+       % xxd -s 0x36 -l 13 -c 13 xxd.1
+       0000036: 3235 7468 204d 6179 2031 3939 36  25th May 1996
 
-       Create a 65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00,  except  for
-       the last one which is 'A' (hex 0x41).
+       Create  a  65537 byte file with all bytes 0x00, except for the last one
+       which is 'A' (hex 0x41).
        % echo '010000: 41' | xxd -r > file
 
        Hexdump this file with autoskip.
@@ -254,34 +197,21 @@ XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
        *
        000fffc: 0000 0000 40                   ....A
 
-       Create  a  1  byte file containing a single 'A' character.
-       The number after '-r -s' adds to the linenumbers found  in
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          4
-
-
-
-
-
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
-
-       the file; in effect, the leading bytes are suppressed.
+       Create a 1 byte file containing a single  'A'  character.   The  number
+       after '-r -s' adds to the linenumbers found in the file; in effect, the
+       leading bytes are suppressed.
        % echo '010000: 41' | xxd -r -s -0x10000 > file
 
-       Use  xxd  as  a  filter within an editor such as vim(1) to
-       hexdump a region marked between `a' and `z'.
+       Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as vim(1) to hexdump a region
+       marked between `a' and `z'.
        :'a,'z!xxd
 
-       Use xxd as a filter within an editor  such  as  vim(1)  to
-       recover a binary hexdump marked between `a' and `z'.
+       Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as vim(1) to recover a binary
+       hexdump marked between `a' and `z'.
        :'a,'z!xxd -r
 
-       Use  xxd  as  a  filter within an editor such as vim(1) to
-       recover one line of a hexdump.  Move the cursor  over  the
-       line and type:
+       Use xxd as a filter within an editor such as vim(1) to recover one line
+       of a hexdump.  Move the cursor over the line and type:
        !!xxd -r
 
        Read single characters from a serial line
@@ -295,8 +225,7 @@ RETURN VALUES
 
        0      no errors encountered.
 
-       -1     operation  not supported ( xxd -r -i still impossi-
-              ble).
+       -1     operation not supported ( xxd -r -i still impossible).
 
        1      error while parsing options.
 
@@ -310,9 +239,8 @@ SEE ALSO
        uuencode(1), uudecode(1), patch(1)
 
 WARNINGS
-       The tools  weirdness  matches  its  creators  brain.   Use
-       entirely  at your own risk. Copy files. Trace it. Become a
-       wizard.
+       The  tools  weirdness matches its creators brain.  Use entirely at your
+       own risk. Copy files. Trace it. Become a wizard.
 
 VERSION
        This manual page documents xxd version 1.7
@@ -322,75 +250,14 @@ AUTHOR
        <jnweiger@informatik.uni-erlangen.de>
 
        Distribute freely and credit me,
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          5
-
-
-
-
-
-XXD(1)                                                     XXD(1)
-
-
        make money and share with me,
        lose money and don't ask me.
 
        Manual page started by Tony Nugent
        <tony@sctnugen.ppp.gu.edu.au> <T.Nugent@sct.gu.edu.au>
-       Small  changes  by  Bram  Moolenaar.   Edited  by  Juergen
-       Weigert.
+       Small changes by Bram Moolenaar.  Edited by Juergen Weigert.
 
 
 
 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-Manual page for xxd        August 1996                          6
-
-
+Manual page for xxd               August 1996                           XXD(1)

runtime/filetype.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to detect file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2004 Oct 02
+" Last Change:	2005 Jan 24
 
 " Listen very carefully, I will say this only once
 if exists("did_load_filetypes")
@@ -236,7 +236,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.bdf			setf bdf
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.bib			setf bib
 
 " BIND configuration
-au BufNewFile,BufRead named.conf		setf named
+au BufNewFile,BufRead named.conf,rndc.conf	setf named
 
 " BIND zone
 au BufNewFile,BufRead named.root		setf bindzone
@@ -595,8 +595,8 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.hex,*.h32		setf hex
 " Tilde (must be before HTML)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.t.html			setf tilde
 
-" HTML (.shtml and .stm for server side)
-au BufNewFile,BufRead *.html,*.htm,*.shtml,*.stm  call <SID>FTCheck_html()
+" HTML (.shtml and .stm for server side, .rhtml for Ruby html)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.html,*.htm,*.shtml,*.rhtml,*.stm  call <SID>FTCheck_html()
 
 " Distinguish between HTML and XHTML
 fun! <SID>FTCheck_html()
@@ -893,6 +893,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .muttrc*,*/.mutt/muttrc*,Muttrc	setf muttrc
 " Natural
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.NS[ACGLMNPS]		setf natural
 
+" Netrc
+au BufNewFile,BufRead .netrc			setf netrc
+
 " Novell netware batch files
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.ncf			setf ncf
 
@@ -1281,6 +1284,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sdl,*.pr		setf sdl
 " sed
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sed			setf sed
 
+" Sieve (RFC 3028)
+au BufNewFile,BufRead *.siv			setf sieve
+
 " Sendmail
 au BufNewFile,BufRead sendmail.cf		setf sm
 
@@ -1483,6 +1489,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *.stp			setf stp
 " Standard ML
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.sml			setf sml
 
+" Sudoers
+au BufNewFile,BufRead /etc/sudoers,sudoers.tmp	setf sudoers
+
 " Tads (or Nroff)
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.t
 	\ if !<SID>FTnroff() | setf tads | endif
@@ -1520,6 +1529,9 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead .tidyrc,tidyrc		setf tidy
 " TF mud client
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *.tf,.tfrc,tfrc		setf tf
 
+" TPP - Text Presentation Program
+au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tpp			setf tpp
+
 " TSS - Geometry
 au BufNewFile,BufReadPost *.tssgm		setf tssgm
 
@@ -1736,7 +1748,7 @@ au BufNewFile,BufRead *termcap*
 au BufNewFile,BufRead *vimrc*			setf vim
 
 " Subversion commit file
-au BufNewFile,BufRead svn-commit.*.tmp		setf svn
+au BufNewFile,BufRead svn-commit*.tmp		setf svn
 
 " X resources file
 au BufNewFile,BufRead Xresources*,*/app-defaults/*,*/Xresources/* setf xdefaults

runtime/ftplugin.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim support file to switch on loading plugins for file types
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last change:	2003 May 10
+" Last change:	2004 Nov 22
 
 if exists("did_load_ftplugin")
   finish
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ augroup filetypeplugin
     if expand("<amatch>") != ""
       if exists("b:undo_ftplugin")
 	exe b:undo_ftplugin
-	unlet b:undo_ftplugin b:did_ftplugin
+	unlet! b:undo_ftplugin b:did_ftplugin
       endif
       if &cpo =~# "S" && exists("b:did_ftplugin")
 	" In compatible mode options are reset to the global values, need to

runtime/ftplugin/lisp.vim

@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin
 " Language:      Lisp
-" Maintainer:    Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
-" URL:		 http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
-" Last Change:   May 15, 2003
+" Maintainer:    Sergey Khorev <sergey.khorev@gmail.com>
+" URL:		 http://iamphet.nm.ru/vim
+" Original author:    Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
+" Original URL:		 http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
+" Last Change:   Nov 8, 2004
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -18,3 +20,11 @@ setl define=^\\s*(def\\k*
 setl formatoptions-=t
 setl iskeyword+=+,-,*,/,%,<,=,>,:,$,?,!,@-@,94
 setl lisp
+
+" make comments behaviour like in c.vim
+" e.g. insertion of ;;; and ;; on normal "O" or "o" when staying in comment
+setl comments^=:;;;,:;;,sr:#\|,mb:\|,ex:\|#
+setl formatoptions+=croql
+" with smartindent # cause left alignment
+setl nosmartindent
+

runtime/ftplugin/make.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	Make
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2003 May 04
+" Last Change:	2004 Dec 17
 
 " Only do this when not done yet for this buffer
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin")
@@ -23,3 +23,6 @@ setlocal com=sO:#\ -,mO:#\ \ ,b:#
 
 " Set 'commentstring' to put the marker after a #.
 setlocal commentstring=#\ %s
+
+" Including files.
+let &l:include = '^\s*include'

runtime/ftplugin/perl.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin file
 " Language:	Perl
 " Maintainer:	Dan Sharp <dwsharp at hotmail dot com>
-" Last Change:  2004 May 16
+" Last Change:  2004 Dec 06
 " URL:		http://mywebpage.netscape.com/sharppeople/vim/ftplugin
 
 if exists("b:did_ftplugin") | finish | endif
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ endif
 
 " Provided by Ned Konz <ned at bike-nomad dot com>
 "---------------------------------------------
-setlocal include=\\<\\(use\|require\\)\\>
+setlocal include=\\<\\(use\\|require\\)\\>
 setlocal includeexpr=substitute(substitute(v:fname,'::','/','g'),'$','.pm','')
 setlocal define=[^A-Za-z_]
 

runtime/ftplugin/scheme.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,26 @@
 " Vim filetype plugin
 " Language:      Scheme
-" Maintainer:    Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
-" URL:		 http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
-" Last Change:   Apr 2, 2003
+" Maintainer:    Sergey Khorev <sergey.khorev@gmail.com>
+" URL:		 http://iamphet.nm.ru/vim 
+" Original author:    Dorai Sitaram <ds26@gte.com>
+" Original URL:		 http://www.ccs.neu.edu/~dorai/vimplugins/vimplugins.html
+" Last Change:   Nov 22, 2004
 
-run ftplugin/lisp.vim
+runtime! ftplugin/lisp.vim ftplugin/lisp_*.vim ftplugin/lisp/*.vim
+
+if exists("b:is_mzscheme") || exists("is_mzscheme")
+    " improve indenting
+    setl iskeyword+=#,%,^
+    setl lispwords+=module,parameterize,let-values,let*-values,letrec-values
+    setl lispwords+=define-values,opt-lambda,case-lambda,syntax-rules,with-syntax,syntax-case
+    setl lispwords+=define-signature,unit,unit/sig,compund-unit/sig,define-values/invoke-unit/sig
+endif
+
+if exists("b:is_chicken") || exists("is_chicken")
+    " improve indenting
+    setl iskeyword+=#,%,^
+    setl lispwords+=let-optionals,let-optionals*,declare
+    setl lispwords+=let-values,let*-values,letrec-values
+    setl lispwords+=define-values,opt-lambda,case-lambda,syntax-rules,with-syntax,syntax-case
+    setl lispwords+=cond-expand,and-let*,foreign-lambda,foreign-lambda*
+endif

runtime/indent/GenericIndent.vim

@@ -1,322 +1,322 @@
-" Vim indent file generic utility functions
-" Language:    * (various)
-" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
-" Date:        6/30/2004
-
-" SUMMARY:  To use GenericIndent, indent/<your_filename>.vim would have the
-"           following general format:
-"
-"      if exists("b:did_indent") | finish | endif
-"      let b:did_indent = 1
-"      runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
-"      let b:indentStmts=''
-"      let b:dedentStmts=''
-"      let b:allStmts=''
-"      setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
-"      setlocal indentkeys=<your_keys>
-"      call GenericIndentStmts(<your_stmts>)
-"      call GenericDedentStmts(<your_stmts>)
-"      call GenericAllStmts()
-"
-" END SUMMARY:
-
-" NOTE:  b:indentStmts, b:dedentStmts, and b:allStmts need to be initialized
-"        to '' before callin the functions because 'indent.vim' explicitly
-"        'unlet's b:did_indent.  This means that the lists will compound if
-"        you change back and forth between buffers.  This is true as of
-"        version 6.3, 6/23/2004.
-"
-" NOTE:  By default, GenericIndent is case sensitive.
-"        let b:case_insensitive=1 if you want to ignore case, e.g. DOS batch files
-
-" The function 'GenericIndent' is data driven and handles most all cases of
-" indent checking if you first set up the data.  To use this function follow
-" the example below (taken from the file indent/MuPAD_source.vim)
-"
-" Before you start, source this file in indent/<your_script>.vim to have it
-" define functions for your use.
-"
-"runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
-"
-" The data is in 5 sets:
-"
-" First, set the data set 'indentexpr' to GenericIndent().
-"
-"setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
-"
-" Second, set the data set 'indentkeys' to the keywords/expressions that need
-" to be checked for 'indenting' _as_ they typed.
-"
-"setlocal indentkeys==end_proc,=else,=then,=elif,=end_if,=end_case,=until,=end_repeat,=end_domain,=end_for,=end_while,=end,o,O
-"
-" NOTE: 'o,O' at the end of the previous line says you wish to be called
-" whenever a newline is placed in the buffer.  This allows the previous line
-" to be checked for indentation parameters.
-"
-" Third, set the data set 'b:indentStmts' to the keywords/expressions that, when
-" they are on a line  _when_  you  _press_  the  _<Enter>_  key,
-" you wish to have the next line indented.
-"
-"call GenericIndentStmts('begin,if,then,else,elif,case,repeat,until,domain,do')
-"
-" Fourth, set the data set 'b:dedentStmts' to the keywords/expressions that, when
-" they are on a line you are currently typing, you wish to have that line
-" 'dedented' (having already been indented because of the previous line's
-" indentation).
-"
-"call GenericDedentStmts('end_proc,then,else,elif,end_if,end_case,until,end_repeat,end_domain,end_for,end_while,end')
-"
-" Fifth, set the data set 'b:allStmts' to the concatenation of the third and
-" fourth data sets, used for checking when more than one keyword/expression
-" is on a line.
-"
-"call GenericAllStmts()
-"
-" NOTE:  GenericIndentStmts uses two variables: 'b:indentStmtOpen' and
-" 'b:indentStmtClose' which default to '\<' and '\>' respectively.  You can
-" set (let) these to any value you wish before calling GenericIndentStmts with
-" your list.  Similarly, GenericDedentStmts uses 'b:dedentStmtOpen' and
-" 'b:dedentStmtClose'.
-"
-" NOTE:  Patterns may be used in the lists passed to Generic[In|De]dentStmts
-" since each element in the list is copied verbatim.
-"
-" Optionally, you can set the DEBUGGING flag within your script to have the
-" debugging messages output.  See below for description.  This can also be set
-" (let) from the command line within your editing buffer.
-"
-"let b:DEBUGGING=1
-"
-" See:
-"      :h runtime
-"      :set runtimepath ?
-" to familiarize yourself with how this works and where you should have this
-" file and your file(s) installed.
-"
-" For help with setting 'indentkeys' see:
-"      :h indentkeys
-" Also, for some good examples see 'indent/sh.vim' and 'indent/vim.vim' as
-" well as files for other languages you may be familiar with.
-"
-"
-" Alternatively, if you'd rather specify yourself, you can enter
-" 'b:indentStmts', 'b:dedentStmts', and 'b:allStmts' 'literally':
-"
-"let b:indentStmts='\<begin\>\|\<if\>\|\<then\>\|\<else\>\|\<elif\>\|\<case\>\|\<repeat\>\|\<until\>\|\<domain\>\|\<do\>'
-"let b:dedentStmts='\<end_proc\>\|\<else\>\|\<elif\>\|\<end_if\>\|\<end_case\>\|\<until\>\|\<end_repeat\>\|\<end_domain\>\|\<end_for\>\|\<end_while\>\|\<end\>'
-"let b:allStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmts
-"
-" This is only useful if you have particularly different parameters for
-" matching each statement.
-
-" RECAP:  From indent/MuPAD_source.vim
-"
-"if exists("b:did_indent") | finish | endif
-"
-"let b:did_indent = 1
-"
-"runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
-"
-"setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
-"setlocal indentkeys==end_proc,=then,=else,=elif,=end_if,=end_case,=until,=end_repeat,=end_domain,=end_for,=end_while,=end,o,O
-"call GenericIndentStmts('begin,if,then,else,elif,case,repeat,until,domain,do')
-"call GenericDedentStmts('end_proc,then,else,elif,end_if,end_case,until,end_repeat,end_domain,end_for,end_while,end')
-"call GenericAllStmts()
-"
-" END RECAP:
-
-let s:hit=0
-let s:lastVlnum=0
-let s:myScriptName=expand("<sfile>:t")
-
-if exists("*GenericIndent")
-	finish
-endif
-
-function GenericAllStmts()
-	let b:allStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmts
-	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:indentStmts: ".b:indentStmts.", b:dedentStmts: ".b:dedentStmts.", b:allStmts: ".b:allStmts)
-endfunction
-
-function GenericIndentStmts(stmts)
-	let Stmts=a:stmts
-	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(Stmts)-1
-		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
-		echoerr "Supplied list: <".Stmts.">"
-		return
-	endif
-
-	if !exists("b:indentStmtOpen")
-		let b:indentStmtOpen='\<'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:indentStmtClose")
-		let b:indentStmtClose='\>'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:indentStmts")
-		let b:indentStmts=''
-	endif
-	if b:indentStmts != ''
-		let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'
-	endif
-	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:indentStmtOpen: ".b:indentStmtOpen.", b:indentStmtClose: ".b:indentStmtClose.", b:indentStmts: ".b:indentStmts.", Stmts: ".Stmts)
-	let stmtEntryBegin=0
-	let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
-	let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
-	let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
-	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-	let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
-	while Comma != -1
-		let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
-		let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
-		let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
-		let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-		let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
-	endwhile
-	let stmtEntry=Stmts
-	let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
-endfunction
-
-function GenericDedentStmts(stmts)
-	let Stmts=a:stmts
-	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(Stmts)-1
-		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
-		echoerr "Supplied list: <".Stmts.">"
-		return
-	endif
-
-	if !exists("b:dedentStmtOpen")
-		let b:dedentStmtOpen='\<'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:dedentStmtClose")
-		let b:dedentStmtClose='\>'
-	endif
-	if !exists("b:dedentStmts")
-		let b:dedentStmts=''
-	endif
-	if b:dedentStmts != ''
-		let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'
-	endif
-	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:dedentStmtOpen: ".b:dedentStmtOpen.", b:dedentStmtClose: ".b:dedentStmtClose.", b:dedentStmts: ".b:dedentStmts.", Stmts: ".Stmts)
-	let stmtEntryBegin=0
-	let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
-	let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
-	let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
-	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-	let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
-	while Comma != -1
-		let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
-		let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
-		let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
-		let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
-		let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
-	endwhile
-	let stmtEntry=Stmts
-	let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
-endfunction
-
-" Debugging function.  Displays messages in the command area which can be
-" reviewed using ':messages'.  To turn it on use ':let b:DEBUGGING=1'.  Once
-" on, turn off by using ':let b:DEBUGGING=0.  If you don't want it at all and
-" feel it's slowing down your editing (you must have an _awfully_ slow
-" machine!;-> ), you can just comment out the calls to it from 'GenericIndent'
-" below.  No need to remove the function or the calls, tho', as you never can
-" tell when they might come in handy!;-)
-function DebugGenericIndent(msg)
-  if exists("b:DEBUGGING") && b:DEBUGGING
-		echomsg '['.s:hit.']'.s:myScriptName."::".a:msg
-	endif
-endfunction
-
-function GenericIndent()
-	" save ignore case option.  Have to set noignorecase for the match
-	" functions to do their job the way we want them to!
-	" NOTE: if you add a return to this function be sure you do
-	"           if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
-	"       before returning.  You can just cut and paste from here.
-	let IgnoreCase=&ignorecase
-	" let b:case_insensitive=1 if you want to ignore case, e.g. DOS batch files
-	if !exists("b:case_insensitive")
-		set noignorecase
-	endif
-	" this is used to let DebugGenericIndent display which invocation of the
-	" function goes with which messages.
-	let s:hit=s:hit+1
-  let lnum=v:lnum
-	let cline=getline(lnum)
-	let lnum=prevnonblank(lnum)
-	if lnum==0 | if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif | return 0 | endif
-	let pline=getline(lnum)
-  let ndnt=indent(lnum)
-	if !exists("b:allStmts")
-		call GenericAllStmts()
-	endif
-
-	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."cline=<".cline.">, pline=<".pline.">, lnum=".lnum.", v:lnum=".v:lnum.", ndnt=".ndnt)
-	if lnum==v:lnum
-		" current line, only check dedent
-		"
-		" just dedented this line, don't need to do it again.
-		" another dedentStmts was added or an end%[_*] was completed.
-		if s:lastVlnum==v:lnum
- 			if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
-			return ndnt
-		endif
-		let s:lastVlnum=v:lnum
-		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Checking dedent")
-		let srcStr=cline
-		let dedentKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:dedentStmts)
-		if dedentKeyBegin != -1
-			let dedentKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:dedentStmts)
-			let dedentKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,dedentKeyBegin,dedentKeyEnd-dedentKeyBegin)
-			"only dedent if it's the beginning of the line
-			if match(srcStr,'^\s*\<'.dedentKeyStr.'\>') != -1
-				call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."It's the beginning of the line, dedent")
-				let ndnt=ndnt-&shiftwidth
-			endif
-		endif
-		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."dedent - returning ndnt=".ndnt)
-	else
-		" previous line, only check indent
-		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Checking indent")
-		let srcStr=pline
-		let indentKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:indentStmts)
-		if indentKeyBegin != -1
-			" only indent if it's the last indentStmts in the line
-			let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
-			let allKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:allStmts)
-			let allKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyBegin,allKeyEnd-allKeyBegin)
-			let srcStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyEnd)
-			let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
-			if allKeyBegin != -1
-				" not the end of the line, check what is and only indent if
-				" it's an indentStmts
-				call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Multiple words in line, checking if last is indent")
-				while allKeyBegin != -1
-					let allKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:allStmts)
-					let allKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyBegin,allKeyEnd-allKeyBegin)
-					let srcStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyEnd)
-					let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
-				endwhile
-				if match(b:indentStmts,allKeyStr) != -1
-					call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Last word in line is indent")
-					let ndnt=ndnt+&shiftwidth
-				endif
-			else
-				" it's the last indentStmts in the line, go ahead and indent
-				let ndnt=ndnt+&shiftwidth
-			endif
-		endif
-		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."indent - returning ndnt=".ndnt)
-	endif
-	if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
-	return ndnt
-endfunction
-
-
-" TODO:  I'm open!
-"
-" BUGS:  You tell me!  Probably.  I just haven't found one yet or haven't been
-"        told about one.
-"        
+" Vim indent file generic utility functions
+" Language:    * (various)
+" Maintainer:  Dave Silvia <dsilvia@mchsi.com>
+" Date:        6/30/2004
+
+" SUMMARY:  To use GenericIndent, indent/<your_filename>.vim would have the
+"           following general format:
+"
+"      if exists("b:did_indent") | finish | endif
+"      let b:did_indent = 1
+"      runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
+"      let b:indentStmts=''
+"      let b:dedentStmts=''
+"      let b:allStmts=''
+"      setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
+"      setlocal indentkeys=<your_keys>
+"      call GenericIndentStmts(<your_stmts>)
+"      call GenericDedentStmts(<your_stmts>)
+"      call GenericAllStmts()
+"
+" END SUMMARY:
+
+" NOTE:  b:indentStmts, b:dedentStmts, and b:allStmts need to be initialized
+"        to '' before callin the functions because 'indent.vim' explicitly
+"        'unlet's b:did_indent.  This means that the lists will compound if
+"        you change back and forth between buffers.  This is true as of
+"        version 6.3, 6/23/2004.
+"
+" NOTE:  By default, GenericIndent is case sensitive.
+"        let b:case_insensitive=1 if you want to ignore case, e.g. DOS batch files
+
+" The function 'GenericIndent' is data driven and handles most all cases of
+" indent checking if you first set up the data.  To use this function follow
+" the example below (taken from the file indent/MuPAD_source.vim)
+"
+" Before you start, source this file in indent/<your_script>.vim to have it
+" define functions for your use.
+"
+"runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
+"
+" The data is in 5 sets:
+"
+" First, set the data set 'indentexpr' to GenericIndent().
+"
+"setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
+"
+" Second, set the data set 'indentkeys' to the keywords/expressions that need
+" to be checked for 'indenting' _as_ they typed.
+"
+"setlocal indentkeys==end_proc,=else,=then,=elif,=end_if,=end_case,=until,=end_repeat,=end_domain,=end_for,=end_while,=end,o,O
+"
+" NOTE: 'o,O' at the end of the previous line says you wish to be called
+" whenever a newline is placed in the buffer.  This allows the previous line
+" to be checked for indentation parameters.
+"
+" Third, set the data set 'b:indentStmts' to the keywords/expressions that, when
+" they are on a line  _when_  you  _press_  the  _<Enter>_  key,
+" you wish to have the next line indented.
+"
+"call GenericIndentStmts('begin,if,then,else,elif,case,repeat,until,domain,do')
+"
+" Fourth, set the data set 'b:dedentStmts' to the keywords/expressions that, when
+" they are on a line you are currently typing, you wish to have that line
+" 'dedented' (having already been indented because of the previous line's
+" indentation).
+"
+"call GenericDedentStmts('end_proc,then,else,elif,end_if,end_case,until,end_repeat,end_domain,end_for,end_while,end')
+"
+" Fifth, set the data set 'b:allStmts' to the concatenation of the third and
+" fourth data sets, used for checking when more than one keyword/expression
+" is on a line.
+"
+"call GenericAllStmts()
+"
+" NOTE:  GenericIndentStmts uses two variables: 'b:indentStmtOpen' and
+" 'b:indentStmtClose' which default to '\<' and '\>' respectively.  You can
+" set (let) these to any value you wish before calling GenericIndentStmts with
+" your list.  Similarly, GenericDedentStmts uses 'b:dedentStmtOpen' and
+" 'b:dedentStmtClose'.
+"
+" NOTE:  Patterns may be used in the lists passed to Generic[In|De]dentStmts
+" since each element in the list is copied verbatim.
+"
+" Optionally, you can set the DEBUGGING flag within your script to have the
+" debugging messages output.  See below for description.  This can also be set
+" (let) from the command line within your editing buffer.
+"
+"let b:DEBUGGING=1
+"
+" See:
+"      :h runtime
+"      :set runtimepath ?
+" to familiarize yourself with how this works and where you should have this
+" file and your file(s) installed.
+"
+" For help with setting 'indentkeys' see:
+"      :h indentkeys
+" Also, for some good examples see 'indent/sh.vim' and 'indent/vim.vim' as
+" well as files for other languages you may be familiar with.
+"
+"
+" Alternatively, if you'd rather specify yourself, you can enter
+" 'b:indentStmts', 'b:dedentStmts', and 'b:allStmts' 'literally':
+"
+"let b:indentStmts='\<begin\>\|\<if\>\|\<then\>\|\<else\>\|\<elif\>\|\<case\>\|\<repeat\>\|\<until\>\|\<domain\>\|\<do\>'
+"let b:dedentStmts='\<end_proc\>\|\<else\>\|\<elif\>\|\<end_if\>\|\<end_case\>\|\<until\>\|\<end_repeat\>\|\<end_domain\>\|\<end_for\>\|\<end_while\>\|\<end\>'
+"let b:allStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmts
+"
+" This is only useful if you have particularly different parameters for
+" matching each statement.
+
+" RECAP:  From indent/MuPAD_source.vim
+"
+"if exists("b:did_indent") | finish | endif
+"
+"let b:did_indent = 1
+"
+"runtime indent/GenericIndent.vim
+"
+"setlocal indentexpr=GenericIndent()
+"setlocal indentkeys==end_proc,=then,=else,=elif,=end_if,=end_case,=until,=end_repeat,=end_domain,=end_for,=end_while,=end,o,O
+"call GenericIndentStmts('begin,if,then,else,elif,case,repeat,until,domain,do')
+"call GenericDedentStmts('end_proc,then,else,elif,end_if,end_case,until,end_repeat,end_domain,end_for,end_while,end')
+"call GenericAllStmts()
+"
+" END RECAP:
+
+let s:hit=0
+let s:lastVlnum=0
+let s:myScriptName=expand("<sfile>:t")
+
+if exists("*GenericIndent")
+	finish
+endif
+
+function GenericAllStmts()
+	let b:allStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmts
+	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:indentStmts: ".b:indentStmts.", b:dedentStmts: ".b:dedentStmts.", b:allStmts: ".b:allStmts)
+endfunction
+
+function GenericIndentStmts(stmts)
+	let Stmts=a:stmts
+	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(Stmts)-1
+		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
+		echoerr "Supplied list: <".Stmts.">"
+		return
+	endif
+
+	if !exists("b:indentStmtOpen")
+		let b:indentStmtOpen='\<'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:indentStmtClose")
+		let b:indentStmtClose='\>'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:indentStmts")
+		let b:indentStmts=''
+	endif
+	if b:indentStmts != ''
+		let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'
+	endif
+	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:indentStmtOpen: ".b:indentStmtOpen.", b:indentStmtClose: ".b:indentStmtClose.", b:indentStmts: ".b:indentStmts.", Stmts: ".Stmts)
+	let stmtEntryBegin=0
+	let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
+	let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
+	let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
+	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+	let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
+	while Comma != -1
+		let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
+		let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
+		let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
+		let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+		let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
+	endwhile
+	let stmtEntry=Stmts
+	let b:indentStmts=b:indentStmts.'\|'.b:indentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:indentStmtClose
+endfunction
+
+function GenericDedentStmts(stmts)
+	let Stmts=a:stmts
+	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+	if Comma == -1 || Comma == strlen(Stmts)-1
+		echoerr "Must supply a comma separated list of at least 2 entries."
+		echoerr "Supplied list: <".Stmts.">"
+		return
+	endif
+
+	if !exists("b:dedentStmtOpen")
+		let b:dedentStmtOpen='\<'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:dedentStmtClose")
+		let b:dedentStmtClose='\>'
+	endif
+	if !exists("b:dedentStmts")
+		let b:dedentStmts=''
+	endif
+	if b:dedentStmts != ''
+		let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'
+	endif
+	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."b:dedentStmtOpen: ".b:dedentStmtOpen.", b:dedentStmtClose: ".b:dedentStmtClose.", b:dedentStmts: ".b:dedentStmts.", Stmts: ".Stmts)
+	let stmtEntryBegin=0
+	let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
+	let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
+	let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
+	let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+	let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
+	while Comma != -1
+		let stmtEntryEnd=Comma
+		let stmtEntry=strpart(Stmts,stmtEntryBegin,stmtEntryEnd-stmtEntryBegin)
+		let Stmts=strpart(Stmts,Comma+1)
+		let Comma=match(Stmts,',')
+		let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
+	endwhile
+	let stmtEntry=Stmts
+	let b:dedentStmts=b:dedentStmts.'\|'.b:dedentStmtOpen.stmtEntry.b:dedentStmtClose
+endfunction
+
+" Debugging function.  Displays messages in the command area which can be
+" reviewed using ':messages'.  To turn it on use ':let b:DEBUGGING=1'.  Once
+" on, turn off by using ':let b:DEBUGGING=0.  If you don't want it at all and
+" feel it's slowing down your editing (you must have an _awfully_ slow
+" machine!;-> ), you can just comment out the calls to it from 'GenericIndent'
+" below.  No need to remove the function or the calls, tho', as you never can
+" tell when they might come in handy!;-)
+function DebugGenericIndent(msg)
+  if exists("b:DEBUGGING") && b:DEBUGGING
+		echomsg '['.s:hit.']'.s:myScriptName."::".a:msg
+	endif
+endfunction
+
+function GenericIndent()
+	" save ignore case option.  Have to set noignorecase for the match
+	" functions to do their job the way we want them to!
+	" NOTE: if you add a return to this function be sure you do
+	"           if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
+	"       before returning.  You can just cut and paste from here.
+	let IgnoreCase=&ignorecase
+	" let b:case_insensitive=1 if you want to ignore case, e.g. DOS batch files
+	if !exists("b:case_insensitive")
+		set noignorecase
+	endif
+	" this is used to let DebugGenericIndent display which invocation of the
+	" function goes with which messages.
+	let s:hit=s:hit+1
+  let lnum=v:lnum
+	let cline=getline(lnum)
+	let lnum=prevnonblank(lnum)
+	if lnum==0 | if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif | return 0 | endif
+	let pline=getline(lnum)
+  let ndnt=indent(lnum)
+	if !exists("b:allStmts")
+		call GenericAllStmts()
+	endif
+
+	call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."cline=<".cline.">, pline=<".pline.">, lnum=".lnum.", v:lnum=".v:lnum.", ndnt=".ndnt)
+	if lnum==v:lnum
+		" current line, only check dedent
+		"
+		" just dedented this line, don't need to do it again.
+		" another dedentStmts was added or an end%[_*] was completed.
+		if s:lastVlnum==v:lnum
+ 			if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
+			return ndnt
+		endif
+		let s:lastVlnum=v:lnum
+		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Checking dedent")
+		let srcStr=cline
+		let dedentKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:dedentStmts)
+		if dedentKeyBegin != -1
+			let dedentKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:dedentStmts)
+			let dedentKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,dedentKeyBegin,dedentKeyEnd-dedentKeyBegin)
+			"only dedent if it's the beginning of the line
+			if match(srcStr,'^\s*\<'.dedentKeyStr.'\>') != -1
+				call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."It's the beginning of the line, dedent")
+				let ndnt=ndnt-&shiftwidth
+			endif
+		endif
+		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."dedent - returning ndnt=".ndnt)
+	else
+		" previous line, only check indent
+		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Checking indent")
+		let srcStr=pline
+		let indentKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:indentStmts)
+		if indentKeyBegin != -1
+			" only indent if it's the last indentStmts in the line
+			let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
+			let allKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:allStmts)
+			let allKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyBegin,allKeyEnd-allKeyBegin)
+			let srcStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyEnd)
+			let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
+			if allKeyBegin != -1
+				" not the end of the line, check what is and only indent if
+				" it's an indentStmts
+				call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Multiple words in line, checking if last is indent")
+				while allKeyBegin != -1
+					let allKeyEnd=matchend(srcStr,b:allStmts)
+					let allKeyStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyBegin,allKeyEnd-allKeyBegin)
+					let srcStr=strpart(srcStr,allKeyEnd)
+					let allKeyBegin=match(srcStr,b:allStmts)
+				endwhile
+				if match(b:indentStmts,allKeyStr) != -1
+					call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."Last word in line is indent")
+					let ndnt=ndnt+&shiftwidth
+				endif
+			else
+				" it's the last indentStmts in the line, go ahead and indent
+				let ndnt=ndnt+&shiftwidth
+			endif
+		endif
+		call DebugGenericIndent(expand("<sfile>").": "."indent - returning ndnt=".ndnt)
+	endif
+	if IgnoreCase | set ignorecase | endif
+	return ndnt
+endfunction
+
+
+" TODO:  I'm open!
+"
+" BUGS:  You tell me!  Probably.  I just haven't found one yet or haven't been
+"        told about one.
+"        

runtime/indent/ada.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " Vim indent file
 " Language:	Ada
 " Maintainer:	Neil Bird <neil@fnxweb.com>
-" Last Change:	2003 May 20
+" Last Change:	2004 Nov 23
 " Version:	$Id$
 " Look for the latest version at http://vim.sourceforge.net/
 "
@@ -25,11 +25,11 @@ if exists("*GetAdaIndent")
    finish
 endif
 
-let s:AdaBlockStart = '^\s*\(if\>\|while\>\|else\>\|elsif\>\|loop\>\|for\>.*\<loop\>\|declare\>\|begin\>\|type\>.*\<is\s*$\|\(type\>.*\)\=\<record\>\|procedure\>\|function\>\|accept\>\|do\>\|task\>\|package\>\|then\>\|when\>\|is\>\)'
+let s:AdaBlockStart = '^\s*\(if\>\|while\>\|else\>\|elsif\>\|loop\>\|for\>.*\<\(loop\|use\)\>\|declare\>\|begin\>\|type\>.*\<is\>[^;]*$\|\(type\>.*\)\=\<record\>\|procedure\>\|function\>\|accept\>\|do\>\|task\>\|package\>\|then\>\|when\>\|is\>\)'
 let s:AdaComment = "\\v^(\"[^\"]*\"|'.'|[^\"']){-}\\zs\\s*--.*"
 
 
-" Try to find indent of the block we're in (and about to complete)
+" Try to find indent of the block we're in
 " prev_indent = the previous line's indent
 " prev_lnum   = previous line (to start looking on)
 " blockstart  = expr. that indicates a possible start of this block
@@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ function s:MainBlockIndent( prev_indent, prev_lnum, blockstart, stop_at )
    let line = substitute( getline(lnum), s:AdaComment, '', '' )
    while lnum > 1
       if a:stop_at != ''  &&  line =~ '^\s*' . a:stop_at  &&  indent(lnum) < a:prev_indent
-         return -1
+         return a:prev_indent
       elseif line =~ '^\s*' . a:blockstart
          let ind = indent(lnum)
          if ind < a:prev_indent
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ function s:EndBlockIndent( prev_indent, prev_lnum, blockstart, blockend )
    return a:prev_indent - &sw
 endfunction
 
-" As per MainBlockIndent, but return indent of previous statement-start
+" Return indent of previous statement-start
 " (after we've indented due to multi-line statements).
 " This time, we start searching on the line *before* the one given (which is
 " the end of a statement - we want the previous beginning).
@@ -169,6 +169,7 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
 
    " Get default indent (from prev. line)
    let ind = indent(lnum)
+   let initind = ind
 
    " Now check what's on the previous line
    if line =~ s:AdaBlockStart  ||  line =~ '(\s*$'
@@ -210,7 +211,7 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
       " Multiple line generic instantiation ('package blah is\nnew thingy')
       let ind = s:StatementIndent( ind - &sw, lnum )
    elseif line =~ ';\s*$'
-      " Statement end - try to find current statement-start indent
+      " Statement end (but not 'end' ) - try to find current statement-start indent
       let ind = s:StatementIndent( ind, lnum )
    endif
 
@@ -224,11 +225,14 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
       " Start of line for ada-pp
       let ind = 0
    elseif continuation && line =~ '^\s*('
-      let ind = ind + &sw
+      " Don't do this if we've already indented due to the previous line
+      if ind == initind
+         let ind = ind + &sw
+      endif
    elseif line =~ '^\s*\(begin\|is\)\>'
       let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(procedure\|function\|declare\|package\|task\)\>', 'begin\>' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*record\>'
-      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'type\>', '' ) + &sw
+      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'type\>\|for\>.*\<use\>', '' ) + &sw
    elseif line =~ '^\s*\(else\|elsif\)\>'
       let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'if\>', '' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*when\>'
@@ -251,7 +255,7 @@ function GetAdaIndent()
       let ind = s:EndBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'case\>.*\<is\>', 'end\>\s*\<case\>' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*end\>'
       " General case for end
-      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(if\|while\|for\|loop\|accept\|begin\|record\|case\|exception\)\>', '' )
+      let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, '\(if\|while\|for\|loop\|accept\|begin\|record\|case\|exception\|package\)\>', '' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*exception\>'
       let ind = s:MainBlockIndent( ind, lnum, 'begin\>', '' )
    elseif line =~ '^\s*then\>'

runtime/indent/eiffel.vim

@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 " $Date$
 " $Revision$
 " URL: http://www.djoce.net/page/vim/
-" Last Change:	2004 Sep 14
+" Last Change:	2004 Sept 14 : removed specific value for tab (sw)
 
 " Only load this indent file when no other was loaded.
 if exists("b:did_indent")

runtime/indent/php.vim

@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
 " Author:	Miles Lott <milos@groupwhere.org>
 " URL:		http://milosch.dyndns.org/php.vim
 " Last Change:	2004 May 18
-" Version:	0.5
+" Version:	0.4
 " Notes:  Close all switches with default:\nbreak; and it will look better.
 "         Also, open and close brackets should be alone on a line.
 "         This is my preference, and the only way this will look nice.
@@ -11,9 +11,7 @@
 "         switch/case.  It is nearly perfect for anyone regardless of your
 "         stance on brackets.
 "
-" Changes: 0.5 - fix duplicate indent on open tag, and empty bracketed
-"          statements.
-"          0.4 - Fixes for closing php tag, switch statement closure, and php_indent_shortopentags
+" Changes: Fixes for closing php tag, switch statement closure, and php_indent_shortopentags
 "          option from Steffen Bruentjen <vim@kontraphon.de>
 "
 " Options: php_noindent_switch=1 -- do not try to indent switch/case statements (version 0.1 behavior)
@@ -51,16 +49,16 @@ function GetPhpIndent()
 	let pline = getline(lnum - 1) " previous to last line
 	let ind = indent(lnum)
 
-	" Indent after php open tag
+	" Indent after php open tags
 	if line =~ '<?php'
 		let ind = ind + &sw
-	elseif exists('g:php_indent_shortopentags')
-		" indent after short open tag
+		" indent after short open tags
+	endif
+	if exists('g:php_indent_shortopentags')
 		if line =~ '<?'
 			let ind = ind + &sw
 		endif
 	endif
-	" indent after php closing tag
 	if cline =~ '\M?>'
 		let ind = ind - &sw
 	endif
@@ -74,17 +72,7 @@ function GetPhpIndent()
 			let ind = ind - &sw
 		endif
 		return ind
-	else
-		" Search the matching bracket (with searchpair()) and set the indent of
-		" to the indent of the matching line.
-		if cline =~ '^\s*}'
-			call cursor(line('.'), 1)
-			let ind = indent(searchpair('{', '', '}',
-			'bW', 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."),
-			0), "name") =~? "string"'))
-			return ind
-		endif
-		" Try to indent switch/case statements as well
+	else " Try to indent switch/case statements as well
 		" Indent blocks enclosed by {} or () or case statements, with some anal requirements
 		if line =~ 'case.*:\|[{(]\s*\(#[^)}]*\)\=$'
 			let ind = ind + &sw
@@ -104,7 +92,7 @@ function GetPhpIndent()
 		" Search the matching bracket (with searchpair()) and set the indent of cline
 		" to the indent of the matching line.
 		if cline =~ '^\s*}'
-			call cursor(line('. '), 1)
+			call cursor(line('.'), 1)
 			let ind = indent(searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"'))
 			return ind
 		endif

runtime/keymap/bulgarian.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+" Vim Keymap file for russian characters, phonetic layout 'yawerty'
+" Useful mainly with utf-8 but may work with other encodings
+
+" Maintainer:   Alberto Mardegan <mardy@despammed.com>
+" Last Changed: 2004 Oct 17
+
+" All characters are given literally, conversion to another encoding (e.g.,
+" UTF-8) should work.
+scriptencoding utf-8
+
+let b:keymap_name = "bg"
+
+loadkeymap
+A	А	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER A
+B	Б	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BE
+W	В	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VE
+V	В	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VE
+G	Г	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GHE
+D	Д	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DE
+E	Е	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IE
+Zh	Ж	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZHE
+ZH	Ж	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZHE
+Z	З	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZE
+I	И	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER I
+J	Й	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT I
+K	К	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KA
+L	Л	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EL
+M	М	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EM
+N	Н	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EN
+O	О	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER O
+P	П	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER PE
+R	Р	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ER
+S	С	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ES
+T	Т	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TE
+U	У	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER U
+F	Ф	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EF
+H	Х	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HA
+C	Ц	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSE
+Ch	Ч	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER CHE
+CH	Ч	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER CHE
+Sh	Ш	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA
+SH	Ш	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA
+Sht	Щ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA
+SHt	Щ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA
+SHT	Щ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA
+Sj	Щ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA
+SJ	Щ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA
+Y	Ъ	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HARD SIGN
+X	Ь	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SOFT SIGN
+~	Ю	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU
+Ju	Ю	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU
+JU	Ю	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU
+Q	Я	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YA
+Ja	Я	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YA
+JA	Я	CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YA
+a	а	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER A
+b	б	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER BE
+w	в	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER VE
+v	в	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER VE
+g	г	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER GHE
+d	д	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DE
+e	е	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IE
+zh	ж	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZHE
+w	ж	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZHE
+z	з	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZE
+i	и	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER I
+j	й	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT I
+k	к	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KA
+l	л	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EL
+m	м	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EM
+n	н	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EN
+o	о	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER O
+p	п	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER PE
+r	р	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ER
+s	с	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ES
+t	т	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TE
+u	у	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER U
+f	ф	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EF
+h	х	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HA
+c	ц	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSE
+ch	ч	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER CHE
+sh	ш	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHA
+sht	щ	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHCHA
+sj	щ	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHCHA
+y	ъ	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HARD SIGN
+x	ь	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SOFT SIGN
+`	ю	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YU
+ju	ю	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YU
+q	я	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YA
+ja	я	CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YA

runtime/keymap/polish-slash.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+" Polish letters under VIM >= 6
+" Maintainer:   HS6_06 <hs6_06@o2.pl>
+" Last changed: 2005 Jan 12
+" Current version: 1.0.2
+" History: 
+"  2005.01.12 1.0.2 keymap_name shortened, added Current version, History
+"  2005.01.10 1.0.1 un*x line ends for all files
+"  2005.01.09 1.0.0 Initial release
+
+let encoding = &enc
+if encoding == 'latin1'
+    if has("unix")
+	let encoding = 'iso-8859-2'
+    else
+	let encoding = 'cp1250'
+    endif
+endif
+
+if encoding == 'utf-8'
+	source <sfile>:p:h/polish-slash_utf-8.vim
+elseif encoding == 'cp1250'
+	source <sfile>:p:h/polish-slash_cp1250.vim
+elseif encoding == 'iso-8859-2'
+	source <sfile>:p:h/polish-slash_iso-8859-2.vim
+else
+	source <sfile>:p:h/polish-slash_cp852.vim
+endif

runtime/keymap/polish-slash_cp1250.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Polish letters keymap for cp1250
+" Maintainer:	HS6_06	<hs6_06@o2.pl>
+" Last Changed:	2005 Jan 12
+" Current version: 1.0.2
+" History: see polish-slash.vim
+
+" This keymap adds the special Polish letters 
+" to an existing Latin keyboard.
+" All chars as usual except:
+" Polish:
+"   instead of AltGr+{acelnosxz} you ve to use "/" followed by {acelnosxz}
+
+" short keymap name for statusline
+let b:keymap_name = "PL-slash-WIN"
+
+scriptencoding latin1
+
+loadkeymap
+
+" Polish letters
+/a	<Char-185>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/c	<Char-230>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/e	<Char-234>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/l	<Char-179>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/n	<Char-241>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/o	<Char-243>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/s	<Char-156>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/x	<Char-159>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/z	<Char-191>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+
+/A	<Char-165>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/C	<Char-198>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/E	<Char-202>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/L	<Char-163>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/N	<Char-209>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/O	<Char-211>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/S	<Char-140>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/X	<Char-143>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/Z	<Char-175>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+

runtime/keymap/polish-slash_cp852.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Polish letters keymap for cp852
+" Maintainer:	HS6_06	<hs6_06@o2.pl>
+" Last Changed:	2005 Jan 12
+" Current version: 1.0.2
+" History: see polish-slash.vim
+
+" This keymap adds the special Polish letters 
+" to an existing Latin keyboard.
+" All chars as usual except:
+" Polish:
+"   instead of AltGr+{acelnosxz} you ve to use "/" followed by {acelnosxz}
+
+" short keymap name for statusline
+let b:keymap_name = "PL-slash-DOS"
+
+scriptencoding latin1
+
+loadkeymap
+
+" Polish letters
+/a	<Char-165>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/c	<Char-134>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/e	<Char-169>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/l	<Char-136>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/n	<Char-228>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/o	<Char-162>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/s	<Char-152>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/x	<Char-171>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/z	<Char-190>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+
+/A	<Char-164>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/C	<Char-143>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/E	<Char-168>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/L	<Char-157>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/N	<Char-227>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/O	<Char-224>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/S	<Char-151>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/X	<Char-141>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/Z	<Char-189>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+

runtime/keymap/polish-slash_iso-8859-2.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Polish letters keymap for iso-8859-2
+" Maintainer:	HS6_06	<hs6_06@o2.pl>
+" Last Changed:	2005 Jan 12
+" Current version: 1.0.2
+" History: polish-slash.vim
+
+" This keymap adds the special Polish letters 
+" to an existing Latin keyboard.
+" All chars as usual except:
+" Polish:
+"   instead of AltGr+{acelnosxz} you ve to use "/" followed by {acelnosxz}
+
+" short keymap name for statusline
+let b:keymap_name = "PL-slash-ISO"
+
+scriptencoding latin1
+
+loadkeymap
+
+" Polish letters
+/a	<Char-177>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/c	<Char-230>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/e	<Char-234>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/l	<Char-179>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/n	<Char-241>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/o	<Char-243>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/s	<Char-182>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/x	<Char-188>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/z	<Char-191>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+
+/A	<Char-161>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/C	<Char-198>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/E	<Char-202>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/L	<Char-163>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/N	<Char-209>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/O	<Char-211>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/S	<Char-166>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/X	<Char-172>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/Z	<Char-175>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+

runtime/keymap/polish-slash_utf-8.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+" Polish letters keymap for utf-8
+" Maintainer:	HS6_06	<hs6_06@o2.pl>
+" Last Changed:	2005 Jan 12
+" Current version: 1.0.2
+" History: see polish-slash.vim
+
+" This keymap adds the special Polish letters 
+" to an existing Latin keyboard.
+" All chars as usual except:
+" Polish:
+"   instead of AltGr+{acelnosxz} you ve to use "/" followed by {acelnosxz}
+
+" short keymap name for statusline
+let b:keymap_name = "PL-slash-UTF"
+
+scriptencoding latin1
+
+loadkeymap
+
+" Polish letters
+/a	<Char-0x0105>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/c	<Char-0x0107>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/e	<Char-0x0119>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/l	<Char-0x0142>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/n	<Char-0x0144>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/o	<Char-0x00f3>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/s	<Char-0x015b>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/x	<Char-0x017a>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/z	<Char-0x017c>	" LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+
+/A	<Char-0x0104>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK
+/C	<Char-0x0106>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH ACUTE
+/E	<Char-0x0118>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK
+/L	<Char-0x0141>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L WITH STROKE
+/N	<Char-0x0143>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH ACUTE
+/O	<Char-0x00d3>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE
+/S	<Char-0x015a>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH ACUTE
+/X	<Char-0x0179>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH ACUTE
+/Z	<Char-0x017b>	" LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH DOT ABOVE
+

runtime/keymap/sinhala-phonetic_utf-8.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+" Vim Keymap file for Sinhala (Sri Lanka) (2003-11-02)
+" Maintainer  : Harshula Jayasuriya <hash@jayasolutions.cjb.net>
+" Last Updated: 2004-12-22
+" This is a static phonetic mapping for a standard US-English keyboard
+" (qwerty)
+" http://www.nongnu.org/sinhala/doc/keymaps/sinhala-keyboard_3.html
+
+" Copy the keymap to ~/.vim/keymap/
+" Start gvim
+" Need to disable the menu so that you can use the 'alt' key.
+"   set guioptions-=m
+" Select the new keymap
+"   set keymap=sinhala-phonetic_utf-8
+
+let b:keymap_name = "sinhala"
+
+loadkeymap
+V	<char-0x0d82>	"  ං - anusvaraya (anusvara)
+<A-v>	<char-0x0d83>	"  ඃ - visargaya (visarga)
+a	<char-0x0d85>	" අ - ayanna (a)
+A	<char-0x0d86>	" ආ - aayanna (aa)
+w	<char-0x0d87>	" ඇ - aeyanna (ae)
+W	<char-0x0d88>	" ඈ - aeeyanna (aee)
+i	<char-0x0d89>	" ඉ - iyanna (i)
+I	<char-0x0d8a>	" ඊ - iiyanna (ii)
+u	<char-0x0d8b>	" උ - uyanna (u)
+U	<char-0x0d8c>	" ඌ - uuyanna (uu)
+q	<char-0x0d8d>	" ඍ - iruyanna (iru)
+Q	<char-0x0d8e>	" ඎ - iruuyanna (iruu)
+<A-k>	<char-0x0d8f>	" ඏ - iluyanna (ilu)
+<A-K>	<char-0x0d90>	" ඐ - iluuyanna (iluu)
+e	<char-0x0d91>	" එ - eyanna (e)
+E	<char-0x0d92>	" ඒ - eeyanna (ee)
+F	<char-0x0d93>	" ඓ - aiyanna (ai)
+o	<char-0x0d94>	" ඔ - oyanna (o)
+O	<char-0x0d95>	" ඕ - ooyanna (oo)
+H	<char-0x0d96>	" ඖ - auyanna (au)
+k	<char-0x0d9a>	" ක - alpapraana kayanna (ka)
+K	<char-0x0d9b>	" ඛ - mahaapraana kayanna (kha)
+g	<char-0x0d9c>	" ග - alpapraana gayanna (ga)
+G	<char-0x0d9d>	" ඝ - mahaapraana gayanna (gha)
+<A-n>	<char-0x0d9e>	" ඞ - kantaja naasikyaya (nga)
+<A-g>	<char-0x0d9f>	" ඟ - sanyaka gayanna (nnga)
+c	<char-0x0da0>	" ච - alpapraana cayanna (ca)
+C	<char-0x0da1>	" ඡ - mahaapraana cayanna (cha)
+j	<char-0x0da2>	" ජ - alpapraana jayanna (ja)
+J	<char-0x0da3>	" ඣ - mahaapraana jayanna (jha)
+z	<char-0x0da4>	" ඤ - taaluja naasikyaya (nya)
+Z	<char-0x0da5>	" ඥ - taaluja sanyooga naasikyaya (jnya)
+<A-j>	<char-0x0da6>	" ඦ - sanyaka jayanna (nyja)
+t	<char-0x0da7>	" ට - alpapraana ttayanna (tta)
+T	<char-0x0da8>	" ඨ - mahaapraana ttayanna (ttha)
+d	<char-0x0da9>	" ඩ - alpapraana ddayanna (dda)
+D	<char-0x0daa>	" ඪ - mahaapraana ddayanna (ddha)
+N	<char-0x0dab>	" ණ - muurdhaja nayanna (nna)
+x	<char-0x0dac>	" ඬ - sanyaka ddayanna (nndda)
+<A-t>	<char-0x0dad>	" ත - alpapraana tayanna (ta)
+<A-T>	<char-0x0dae>	" ථ - mahaapraana tayanna (tha)
+<A-d>	<char-0x0daf>	" ද - alpapraana dayanna (da)
+<A-D>	<char-0x0db0>	" ධ - mahaapraana dayanna (dha)
+n	<char-0x0db1>	" න - dantaja nayanna (na)
+X	<char-0x0db3>	" ඳ - sanyaka dayanna (nda)
+p	<char-0x0db4>	" ප - alpapraana payanna (pa)
+P	<char-0x0db5>	" ඵ - mahaapraana payanna (pha)
+b	<char-0x0db6>	" බ - alpapraana bayanna (ba)
+B	<char-0x0db7>	" භ - mahaapraana bayanna (bha)
+m	<char-0x0db8>	" ම - mayanna (ma)
+M	<char-0x0db9>	" ඹ - amba bayanna (mba)
+y	<char-0x0dba>	" ය - yayanna (ya)
+r	<char-0x0dbb>	" ර - rayanna (ra)
+l	<char-0x0dbd>	" ල - dantaja layanna (la)
+v	<char-0x0dc0>	" ව - vayanna (va)
+<A-s>	<char-0x0dc1>	" ශ - taaluja sayanna (sha)
+S	<char-0x0dc2>	" ෂ - muurdhaja sayanna (ssa)
+s	<char-0x0dc3>	" ස - dantaja sayanna (sa)
+h	<char-0x0dc4>	" හ - hayanna (ha)
+L	<char-0x0dc5>	" ළ - muurdhaja layanna (lla)
+f	<char-0x0dc6>	" ෆ - fayanna (fa)
+<A-a>	<char-0x0dca>	" ් - al-lakuna
+<A-A>	<char-0x0dcf>	"  ා - aela-pilla (aa)
+<A-w>	<char-0x0dd0>	"  ැ - ketti aeda-pilla (ae)
+<A-W>	<char-0x0dd1>	"  ෑ - diga aeda-pilla (aae)
+<A-i>	<char-0x0dd2>	"  ි - ketti is-pilla (i)
+<A-I>	<char-0x0dd3>	"  ී - diga is-pilla (ii)
+<A-u>	<char-0x0dd4>	"  ු - ketti paa-pilla (u)
+<A-U>	<char-0x0dd6>	"  ූ - diga paa-pilla (uu)
+<A-q>	<char-0x0dd8>	"  ෘ - gaetta-pilla (r)
+<A-e>	<char-0x0dd9>	"  ෙ - kombuva (e)
+<A-E>	<char-0x0dda>	"  ේ - diga kombuva (ee)
+<A-f>	<char-0x0ddb>	"  ෛ - kombu deka (ai)
+<A-o>	<char-0x0ddc>	"  ො - kombuva haa aela-pilla (o)
+<A-O>	<char-0x0ddd>	"  ෝ - kombuva haa diga aela-pilla (oo)
+<A-h>	<char-0x0dde>	"  ෞ - kombuva haa gayanukitta (au)
+<A-l>	<char-0x0ddf>	"  ෟ - gayanukitta (l)
+<A-Q>	<char-0x0df2>	"  ෲ - diga gaetta-pilla (rr)
+<A-L>	<char-0x0df3>	"  ෳ - diga gayanukitta (ll)
+<A-.>	<char-0x0df4>	" ෴ - kunddaliya (punctuation)
+
+R	<char-0x0dca><char-0x200d><char-0x0dbb>	"  ්‍ර - rakaransaya
+Y	<char-0x0dca><char-0x200d><char-0x0dba>	"  ්‍ය - yansaya
+<A-r>	<char-0x0dbb><char-0x0dca><char-0x200d>	"  ර්‍ - repaya
+
+<A-\>	<char-0x0dca><char-0x200d>	" join - conjunct letters cons 0DCA ZWJ cons
+<A-|>	<char-0x200d><char-0x0dca>	" touch - cons ZWJ 0DCA cons
+
+<S-space>	<char-0x00a0>	" - no-break space. <S-space> didn't work.
+<C-space>	<char-0x200c>	" - ZWNJ. <A-space> doesn't work!

runtime/keymap/sinhala.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+" Vim Keymap file for Sinhala (Sri Lanka)
+"
+source <sfile>:p:h/sinhala-phonetic_utf-8.vim

runtime/lang/menu_chinese(gb)_gb.936.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Simplified Chinese (Windows)
+" Last Change:		Tue Sep  4 11:26:52 CST 2001
+
+" $LANG  on Windows 95/98/NT is Chinese(GB)_GB.936
+" $LANG  on Windows 2000/ME is Chinese_GB.936
+" Source the other one from here.
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese_gb.936.vim

runtime/lang/menu_chinese(taiwan)_taiwan.950.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Traditional Chinese (for UNIX/Big5 Windows)
+" Last Change:		2000 Nov 11
+
+" $LANG  on Windows 95/98/NT is Chinese(Taiwan)_Taiwan.950
+" $LANG  on Windows 2000/ME is Chinese_Taiwan.950
+" Source the other one from here.
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese_taiwan.950.vim

runtime/lang/menu_cs_cz.iso_8859-2.vim

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ menutrans &Paste<Tab>"+gP		V&lo
 menutrans Put\ &Before<Tab>[p		Vlo¾it\ &pøed<Tab>[p
 menutrans Put\ &After<Tab>]p		Vlo¾i&t\ za<Tab>]p
 menutrans &Delete<Tab>x			&Smazat<Tab>x
-menutrans &Select\ all<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ v¹e<Tab>ggVG
+menutrans &Select\ All<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ v¹e<Tab>ggVG
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.			&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace\.\.\.	&Nahradit\.\.\.
 menutrans Options\.\.\.			Volb&y\.\.\.
@@ -186,6 +186,7 @@ menutrans &How-to\ links	Ho&wto
 menutrans &GUI			&Grafické\ rozhraní
 menutrans &Credits		&Autoøi
 menutrans Co&pying		&Licenèní\ politika
+menutrans &Sponsor/Register	Sponzorování/&Registrace
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.		&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans O&rphans		O&siøelé\ dìti
 menutrans &Version		&Verze

runtime/lang/menu_czech_czech_republic.1250.vim

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ menutrans &Paste<Tab>"+gP		V&lo
 menutrans Put\ &Before<Tab>[p		Vložit\ &pøed<Tab>[p
 menutrans Put\ &After<Tab>]p		Vloži&t\ za<Tab>]p
 menutrans &Delete<Tab>x			&Smazat<Tab>x
-menutrans &Select\ all<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ vše<Tab>ggVG
+menutrans &Select\ All<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ vše<Tab>ggVG
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.			&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace\.\.\.	&Nahradit\.\.\.
 menutrans Options\.\.\.			Volb&y\.\.\.
@@ -186,6 +186,7 @@ menutrans &How-to\ links	Ho&wto
 menutrans &GUI			&Grafické\ rozhraní
 menutrans &Credits		&Autoøi
 menutrans Co&pying		&Licenèní\ politika
+menutrans &Sponsor/Register	Sponzorování/&Registrace
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.		&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans O&rphans		O&siøelé\ dìti
 menutrans &Version		&Verze

runtime/lang/menu_czech_czech_republic.ascii.vim

@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ menutrans &Paste<Tab>"+gP		V&lozit<Tab>"+gP
 menutrans Put\ &Before<Tab>[p		Vlozit\ &pred<Tab>[p
 menutrans Put\ &After<Tab>]p		Vlozi&t\ za<Tab>]p
 menutrans &Delete<Tab>x			&Smazat<Tab>x
-menutrans &Select\ all<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ vse<Tab>ggVG
+menutrans &Select\ All<Tab>ggVG		Vy&brat\ vse<Tab>ggVG
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.			&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace\.\.\.	&Nahradit\.\.\.
 menutrans Options\.\.\.			Volb&y\.\.\.
@@ -186,6 +186,7 @@ menutrans &How-to\ links	Ho&wto
 menutrans &GUI			&Graficke\ rozhrani
 menutrans &Credits		&Autori
 menutrans Co&pying		&Licencni\ politika
+menutrans &Sponsor/Register	Sponzorovani/&Registrace
 menutrans &Find\.\.\.		&Hledat\.\.\.
 menutrans O&rphans		O&sirele\ deti
 menutrans &Version		&Verze

runtime/lang/menu_de_de.latin1.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Menu Translations:	German / Deutsch
 " Maintainer:		Johannes Zellner <johannes@zellner.org>
-" Originally By:	Marcin Dalecki <dalecki@cs.net.pl>
+" Originally By:	Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
 " Last Change:	Sat, 20 Apr 2002 19:02:42 CEST
 " vim:set foldmethod=marker tabstop=8:
 

runtime/lang/menu_ja.euc-jp.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Japanese (for UNIX)
+" Translated By:	Muraoka Taro  <koron@tka.att.ne.jp>
+" Last Change:		08:50:47 25-Mar-2001.
+
+" eucjp is the same as euc-jp.  Source the other one from here.
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_ja_jp.euc-jp.vim

runtime/lang/menu_ja.eucjp.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Japanese (for UNIX)
+" Translated By:	Muraoka Taro  <koron@tka.att.ne.jp>
+" Last Change:		08:50:47 25-Mar-2001.
+
+" eucjp is the same as euc-jp.  Source the other one from here.
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_ja_jp.euc-jp.vim

runtime/lang/menu_ja.ujis.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Japanese (for UNIX)
+" Translated By:	Muraoka Taro  <koron@tka.att.ne.jp>
+" Last Change:		08:50:47 25-Mar-2001.
+
+" ujis is the same as euc-jp.  Source the other one from here.
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_ja_jp.euc-jp.vim

runtime/lang/menu_pl_pl.iso_8859-2.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Menu Translations:	Polish
 " Maintainer:		Rafal M. Sulejman <rms@poczta.onet.pl>
-" Initial Translation:	Marcin Dalecki <dalecki@cs.net.pl>
+" Initial Translation:	Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
 " Last Change: 5 May  2004
 
 " Quit when menu translations have already been done.

runtime/lang/menu_pl_pl.utf-8.vim

@@ -0,0 +1,261 @@
+" Menu Translations:	Polish
+" Maintainer:		Rafal M. Sulejman <rms@poczta.onet.pl>
+" Initial Translation:	Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
+" Last Change:	06 Sep 2001
+
+" Quit when menu translations have already been done.
+if exists("did_menu_trans")
+  finish
+endif
+let did_menu_trans = 1
+
+scriptencoding iso-8859-2
+
+" Help menu
+menutrans &Help			Po&moc
+menutrans &Overview<Tab><F1>	&Spis\ Tre¶ci<Tab><F1>
+menutrans &How-to\ links	&Odno¶niki\ JTZ
+menutrans &Credits		Po&dziêkowania
+menutrans &User\ Manual    Podrêcznik\ &u¿ytkownika
+menutrans Co&pying		&Kopiowanie
+menutrans &Version		&Wersja
+menutrans &About		o\ &Aplikacji
+
+" File menu
+menutrans &File				&Plik
+menutrans &Open\.\.\.<Tab>:e		&Otwórz\.\.\.<Tab>:e
+menutrans Sp&lit-Open\.\.\.<Tab>:sp	Otwórz\ z\ &podzia³em\.\.\.<Tab>:sp
+menutrans &New<Tab>:enew       &Nowy<Tab>:enew
+menutrans &Close<Tab>:close		&Zamknij<Tab>:close
+menutrans &Save<Tab>:w			Za&pisz<Tab>:w
+menutrans Save\ &As\.\.\.<Tab>:sav	Zapisz\ &jako\.\.\.<Tab>:sav
+menutrans Split\ &Diff\ with\.\.\.	Podziel\ na\ diff-a\ miêdzy\.\.\.
+menutrans Split\ Patched\ &By\.\.\.	Podziel\ ³atane\ przez\.\.\.
+menutrans &Print			&Drukuj
+menutrans Sa&ve-Exit<Tab>:wqa		Zapisz\ i\ w&yjd¼<Tab>:wqa
+menutrans E&xit<Tab>:qa			&Wyj¶cie<Tab>:qa
+
+" Edit menu
+menutrans &Edit				&Edycja
+menutrans &Undo<Tab>u			&Cofnij<Tab>u
+menutrans &Redo<Tab>^R			&Ponów<Tab>^R
+menutrans Rep&eat<Tab>\.		P&owtórz<Tab>\.
+menutrans Cu&t<Tab>"+x			W&ytnij<Tab>"+x
+menutrans &Copy<Tab>"+y			&Kopiuj<Tab>"+y
+menutrans &Paste<Tab>"+gP		&Wklej<Tab>"+gP
+menutrans Put\ &Before<Tab>[p		Wstaw\ p&rzed<Tab>[p
+menutrans Put\ &After<Tab>]p		Wstaw\ p&o<Tab>]p
+menutrans &Select\ all<Tab>ggVG		Z&aznacz\ ca³o¶æ<Tab>ggVG
+menutrans &Find\.\.\.			&Szukaj\.\.\.
+menutrans &Find<Tab>/			&Szukaj<Tab>/
+menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace\.\.\.	&Zamieñ\.\.\.
+menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace<Tab>:%s	&Zamieñ<Tab>:%s
+menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace		&Zamieñ
+menutrans Find\ and\ Rep&lace<Tab>:s	&Zamieñ<Tab>:s
+menutrans Options\.\.\.			Opcje\.\.\.
+menutrans Settings\ &Window		Ustawienia
+menutrans &Global\ Settings		Ustawienia\ &globalne
+menutrans F&ile\ Settings		Ustawienia\ dla\ pliku
+menutrans Toggle\ Line\ &Numbering<Tab>:set\ nu!			&Numerowanie\ wierszy<Tab>:set\ nu!
+menutrans Toggle\ &List\ Mode<Tab>:set\ list!					Tryb\ &listowania<Tab>:set\ list!
+menutrans Toggle\ Line\ &Wrap<Tab>:set\ wrap!			Za&wijanie\ wierszy<Tab>:set\ wrap!
+menutrans Toggle\ W&rap\ at\ word<Tab>:set\ lbr!			£amanie\ wie&rsza<Tab>:set\ lbr!
+menutrans Toggle\ &expand-tab<Tab>:set\ et!			Rozwijani&e\ tabulatorów<Tab>:set\ et!
+menutrans Toggle\ &auto-indent<Tab>:set\ ai!			&Automatyczne\ wciêcia<Tab>:set\ ai!
+menutrans Toggle\ &C-indenting<Tab>:set\ cin!			Wciêcia\ &C<Tab>:set\ cin!
+menutrans &Shiftwidth				&Szeroko¶æ\ wciêcia
+menutrans Te&xt\ Width\.\.\.			D³ugo¶æ\ linii\.\.\.
+menutrans &File\ Format\.\.\.			&Format\ pliku\.\.\.
+menutrans Soft\ &Tabstop				Rozmiar\ &tabulacji
+menutrans C&olor\ Scheme		Zestawy\ kolorów
+menutrans &Keymap			Uk³ady\ klawiatury
+menutrans None				¿aden
+menutrans accents			akcenty
+menutrans hebrew			hebrajski
+menutrans hebrewp			hebrajski\ p
+menutrans russian-jcuken		rosyjski-jcuken
+menutrans russian-jcukenwin		rosyjski-jcukenwin
+menutrans russian-yawerty  		rosyjski-yawerty
+
+menutrans Toggle\ Pattern\ &Highlight<Tab>:set\ hls!	Podkre¶lanie\ &wzorców<Tab>:set\ hls!
+
+menutrans Toggle\ &Ignore-case<Tab>:set\ ic!	&Ignorowanie\ wielko¶ci<Tab>:set\ ic!
+menutrans Toggle\ &Showmatch<Tab>:set\ sm!		&Pokazywanie\ pasuj±cych<Tab>:set\ sm!
+
+menutrans &Context\ lines	Wiersze\ &kontekstowe
+menutrans &Virtual\ Edit	Obróbka\ &wirtualna
+
+menutrans Never			Nigdy
+menutrans Block\ Selection	Zaznaczanie\ zakresu
+menutrans Insert\ mode		Tryb\ wprowadzania
+menutrans Block\ and\ Insert	Zakres\ i\ wprowadzanie
+menutrans Always		Zawsze
+
+menutrans Toggle\ Insert\ &Mode<Tab>:set\ im!	Tryb\ wprowadzania<Tab>:set\ im!
+menutrans Search\ &Path\.\.\.	Scie¿ka\ poszukiwania\.\.\.
+menutrans Ta&g\ Files\.\.\.	Pliki\ tagów\.\.\.
+
+
+"
+" GUI options
+menutrans Toggle\ &Toolbar		Pasek\ narzêdzi
+menutrans Toggle\ &Bottom\ Scrollbar	Dolny\ przewijacz
+menutrans Toggle\ &Left\ Scrollbar	&Lewy\ przewijacz
+menutrans Toggle\ &Right\ Scrollbar	P&rawy\ przewijacz
+
+" Programming menu
+menutrans &Tools			&Narzêdzia
+menutrans &Jump\ to\ this\ tag<Tab>g^]	&Skocz\ do\ taga<Tab>g^]
+menutrans Jump\ &back<Tab>^T		Skok\ w\ &ty³<Tab>^T
+menutrans Build\ &Tags\ File		&Twórz\ plik\ tagów
+" Folding
+menutrans &Folding				&Zwijanie
+menutrans &Enable/Disable\ folds<Tab>zi		&Zwiñ/rozwiñ<Tab>zi
+menutrans &View\ Cursor\ Line<Tab>zv			&Linia\ kursora<Tab>zv
+menutrans Vie&w\ Cursor\ Line\ only<Tab>zMzx			&Tylko\ linia\ kursora<Tab>zMzx
+menutrans C&lose\ more\ folds<Tab>zm				Zwiñ\ wiêcej<Tab>zm
+menutrans &Close\ all\ folds<Tab>zM				Z&wiñ\ wszystkie<Tab>zM
+menutrans &Open\ all\ folds<Tab>zR				Rozwiñ\ wszystkie<Tab>zR
+menutrans O&pen\ more\ folds<Tab>zr				R&ozwiñ\ wiêcej<Tab>zr
+
+menutrans Create\ &Fold<Tab>zf				T&wórz\ zawiniêcie<Tab>zf
+menutrans &Delete\ Fold<Tab>zd				U&suñ\ zawiniêcie<Tab>zd
+menutrans Delete\ &All\ Folds<Tab>zD				&Usuñ\ wszystkie\ zawiniêcia<Tab>zD
+menutrans Fold\ column\ &width				Szeroko¶æ\ kolumny\ za&winiêæ
+menutrans Fold\ Met&hod		Me&toda\ zawijania
+menutrans M&anual			&Rêcznie
+menutrans I&ndent			W&ciêcie
+menutrans E&xpression W&yrazenie
+menutrans S&yntax			S&k³adnia
+menutrans Ma&rker			Zn&acznik
+
+" Diff
+menutrans &Update					&Od¶wie¿
+menutrans &Get\ Block			&Pobierz\ blok
+menutrans &Put\ Block			&Wstaw\ blok
+
+" Make and stuff...
+menutrans &Make<Tab>:make		M&ake<Tab>:make
+menutrans &List\ Errors<Tab>:cl		&Poka¿\ b³êdy<Tab>:cl
+menutrans L&ist\ Messages<Tab>:cl!	W&ylicz\ powiadomienia<Tab>:cl!
+menutrans &Next\ Error<Tab>:cn		&Nastêpny\ b³±d<Tab>:cn
+menutrans &Previous\ Error<Tab>:cp	&Poprzedni\ b³±d<Tab>:cp
+menutrans &Older\ List<Tab>:cold	&Starsza\ lista<Tab>:cold
+menutrans N&ewer\ List<Tab>:cnew	N&owsza\ lista<Tab>:cnew
+menutrans Error\ &Window  Okno\ komu&nikatów
+menutrans &Update<Tab>:cwin			Akt&ualizuj<Tab>:cwin
+menutrans &Close<Tab>:cclose			&Zamknij<Tab>:cclose
+menutrans &Open<Tab>:copen			&Otwórz<Tab>:copen
+
+menutrans &Set\ Compiler				U&staw\ kompilator
+menutrans &Convert\ to\ HEX<Tab>:%!xxd     Kody\ szesnastkowe<Tab>:%!xxd
+menutrans Conve&rt\ back<Tab>:%!xxd\ -r     Zwyk³y\ tekst<Tab>:%!xxd\ -r
+
+" Names for buffer menu.
+menutrans &Buffers	&Bufory
+menutrans &Refresh\ menu	Od¶wie¿
+menutrans Delete	Skasuj
+menutrans &Alternate	&Zmieñ
+menutrans &Next		&Nastêpny
+menutrans &Previous	&Poprzedni
+menutrans [No\ File]	[Brak\ Pliku]
+
+" Window menu
+menutrans &Window			&Widoki
+menutrans &New<Tab>^Wn			&Nowy<Tab>^Wn
+menutrans S&plit<Tab>^Ws		Po&dziel<Tab>^Ws
+menutrans Sp&lit\ To\ #<Tab>^W^^	P&odziel\ na\ #<Tab>^W^^
+menutrans Split\ &Vertically<Tab>^Wv	Podziel\ pionowo<Tab>^Wv
+menutrans Split\ File\ E&xplorer		Otwórz\ mened¿er\ plików
+
+menutrans &Close<Tab>^Wc		&Zamknij<Tab>^Wc
+menutrans Close\ &Other(s)<Tab>^Wo	Zamknij\ &inne<Tab>^Wo
+menutrans Ne&xt<Tab>^Ww			&Nastêpny<Tab>^Ww
+menutrans P&revious<Tab>^WW		&Poprzedni<Tab>^WW
+menutrans &Equal\ Size<Tab>^W=		&Wyrównaj\ wysoko¶ci<Tab>^W=
+menutrans &Max\ Height<Tab>^W_		Z&maksymalizuj\ wysoko¶æ<Tab>^W_
+menutrans M&in\ Height<Tab>^W1_		Zminim&alizuj\ wysoko¶æ<Tab>^W1_
+menutrans Max\ Width<Tab>^W\|		Maksymalna\ szeroko¶æ<Tab>^W\|
+menutrans Min\ Width<Tab>^W1\|		Minimalna\ szeroko¶æ<Tab>^W1\|
+menutrans Max\ &Width<Tab>^W\|		Zmaksymalizuj\ szeroko¶æ<Tab>^W\|
+menutrans Min\ Widt&h<Tab>^W1\|		Zminimalizuj\ szeroko¶æ<Tab>^W1\|
+menutrans Move\ &To			&Id¼\ do
+menutrans &Top<Tab>^WK			&Góra<Tab>^WK
+menutrans &Bottom<Tab>^WJ		&Dó³<Tab>^WJ
+menutrans &Left\ side<Tab>^WH		&Lewa\ strona<Tab>^WH
+menutrans &Right\ side<Tab>^WL		&Prawa\ strona<Tab>^WL
+menutrans Rotate\ &Up<Tab>^WR		Obróæ\ w\ &górê<Tab>^WR
+menutrans Rotate\ &Down<Tab>^Wr		Obróæ\ w\ &dó³<Tab>^Wr
+menutrans Split\ &Vertically<Tab>^Wv	&Podziel\ w\ poziomie<Tab>^Wv
+menutrans Select\ Fo&nt\.\.\.		Wybierz\ &czcionkê\.\.\.
+
+" The popup menu
+menutrans &Undo			&Cofnij
+menutrans Cu&t			W&ytnij
+menutrans &Copy			&Kopiuj
+menutrans &Paste		&Wklej
+menutrans &Delete		&Skasuj
+menutrans Select\ Blockwise	Zaznacz\ &blok
+menutrans Select\ &Word		Zaznacz\ &s³owo
+menutrans Select\ &Line		Zaznacz\ w&iersz
+menutrans Select\ &Block	Zaznacz\ &blok
+menutrans Select\ &All		Zaznacz\ c&a³o¶æ
+
+" The GUI toolbar
+if has("toolbar")
+  if exists("*Do_toolbar_tmenu")
+    delfun Do_toolbar_tmenu
+  endif
+  fun Do_toolbar_tmenu()
+    tmenu ToolBar.Open		Otwórz plik
+    tmenu ToolBar.Save		Zapisz bie¿±cy plik
+    tmenu ToolBar.SaveAll		Zapisz wszystkie pliki
+    tmenu ToolBar.Print		Drukuj
+    tmenu ToolBar.Undo		Cofnij
+    tmenu ToolBar.Redo		Ponów
+    tmenu ToolBar.Cut		Wytnij
+    tmenu ToolBar.Copy		Skopiuj
+    tmenu ToolBar.Paste		Wklej
+    tmenu ToolBar.Find		Szukaj...
+    tmenu ToolBar.FindNext	Szukaj nastêpnego
+    tmenu ToolBar.FindPrev	Szukaj poprzedniego
+    tmenu ToolBar.Replace		Szukaj i zamieniaj...
+    if 0	" disabled; These are in the Windows menu
+      tmenu ToolBar.New		Nowy widok
+      tmenu ToolBar.WinSplit	Podziel widok
+      tmenu ToolBar.WinMax		Zmaksymalizuj widok
+      tmenu ToolBar.WinMin		Zminimalizuj widok
+      tmenu ToolBar.WinClose	Zamknij widok
+    endif
+    tmenu ToolBar.LoadSesn	Za³aduj sesjê
+    tmenu ToolBar.SaveSesn	Zachowaj bie¿±c± sesjê
+    tmenu ToolBar.RunScript	Uruchom skrypt Vima
+    tmenu ToolBar.Make		Wykonaj bie¿±cy projekt
+    tmenu ToolBar.Shell		Otwórz pow³okê
+    tmenu ToolBar.RunCtags	Twórz tagi w bie¿±cym katalogu
+    tmenu ToolBar.TagJump		Skok do taga pod kursorem
+    tmenu ToolBar.Help		Pomoc Vima
+    tmenu ToolBar.FindHelp	Przeszukuj pomoc Vim-a
+  endfun
+endif
+
+" Syntax menu
+menutrans &Show\ filetypes\ in\ menu	&Pokazuj\ rodzaj\ pliku\ w\ menue
+menutrans &Syntax		&Sk³adnia
+menutrans Set\ '&syntax'\ only	Ustaw\ tylko\ '&syntax'
+menutrans Set\ '&filetype'\ too	Ustaw\ równie¿\ '&filetype'
+menutrans &Off			&Wy³±cz
+menutrans &Manual		&Rêcznie
+menutrans A&utomatic		A&utomatyczne
+menutrans on/off\ for\ &This\ file			w³±cz/w&y³±cz\ dla\ pliku
+menutrans Co&lor\ test		Test\ &kolorów
+menutrans &Highlight\ test	&Test\ pod¶wietlania
+menutrans &Convert\ to\ HTML	Przetwórz\ na\ &HTML
+
+" dialog texts
+let menutrans_no_file = "[Brak pliku]"
+let menutrans_help_dialog = "Wprowad¼ komendê lub s³owo, aby otrzymaæ pomoc o:\n\nPrzedrostek i_ oznacza komendê trybu Wprowadzania (np. i_CTRL-X)\nPrzedrostek c_ oznacza komendê edycji wiersza komend (np. c_<Del>)\nPrzedrostek ' oznacza nazwê opcji (np. 'shiftwidth')"
+let g:menutrans_path_dialog = "Wprowad¼ ¶cie¿kê poszukiwania plików.\nProszê rozdzielaæ nazwy katalogów przecinkiem."
+let g:menutrans_tags_dialog = "Podaj nazwy plików tagów.\nProszê rozdzielaæ nazwy przecinkiem."
+let g:menutrans_textwidth_dialog = "Wprowad¼ now± szeroko¶æ tekstu (0 wy³±cza przewijanie): "
+let g:menutrans_fileformat_dialog = "Wybierz format w którym ten plik ma byæ zapisany"

runtime/lang/menu_polish_poland.1250.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Menu Translations:	Polish
 " Maintainer:		Rafal M. Sulejman <rms@poczta.onet.pl>
-" Initial Translation:	Marcin Dalecki <dalecki@cs.net.pl>
+" Initial Translation:	Marcin Dalecki <martin@dalecki.de>
 " Last Change:	06 Sep 2001
 
 " Quit when menu translations have already been done.

runtime/lang/menu_zh.big5.vim

@@ -1 +1 @@
-source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese(taiwan)_taiwan.950.vim
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese_taiwan.950.vim

runtime/lang/menu_zh_tw.big5.vim

@@ -1 +1 @@
-source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese(taiwan)_taiwan.950.vim
+source <sfile>:p:h/menu_chinese_taiwan.950.vim

runtime/makemenu.vim

@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
 " Script to define the syntax menu in synmenu.vim
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2004 Sep 11
+" Last Change:	2004 Dec 17
 
 " This is used by "make menu" in the src directory.
 edit <sfile>:p:h/synmenu.vim
@@ -366,6 +366,7 @@ SynMenu Sh-S.Shell\ script.csh:csh
 SynMenu Sh-S.Shell\ script.tcsh:tcsh
 SynMenu Sh-S.Shell\ script.zsh:zsh
 SynMenu Sh-S.SiCAD:sicad
+SynMenu Sh-S.Sieve:sieve
 SynMenu Sh-S.Simula:simula
 SynMenu Sh-S.Sinda.Sinda\ compare:sindacmp
 SynMenu Sh-S.Sinda.Sinda\ input:sinda
@@ -406,6 +407,7 @@ SynMenu Sh-S.Standard\ ML:sml
 SynMenu Sh-S.Stored\ Procedures:stp
 SynMenu Sh-S.Strace:strace
 SynMenu Sh-S.Subversion\ commit:svn
+SynMenu Sh-S.Sudoers:sudoers
 
 SynMenu TUV.TADS:tads
 SynMenu TUV.Tags:tags
@@ -423,6 +425,7 @@ SynMenu TUV.TeX.Texinfo:texinfo
 SynMenu TUV.TF\ mud\ client:tf
 SynMenu TUV.Tidy\ configuration:tidy
 SynMenu TUV.Tilde:tilde
+SynMenu TUV.TPP:tpp
 SynMenu TUV.Trasys\ input:trasys
 SynMenu TUV.TSS.Command\ Line:tsscl
 SynMenu TUV.TSS.Geometry:tssgm

runtime/menu.vim

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
 " You can also use this as a start for your own set of menus.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2004 Sep 16
+" Last Change:	2004 Dec 04
 
 " Note that ":an" (short for ":anoremenu") is often used to make a menu work
 " in all modes and avoid side effects from mappings defined by the user.
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ if has("keymap")
   endif
   unlet s:n
 endif
-if has("win32") || has("win16") || has("gui_gtk") || has("gui_kde") || has("gui_photon") || has("gui_mac")
+if has("win32") || has("win16") || has("gui_motif") || has("gui_gtk") || has("gui_kde") || has("gui_photon") || has("gui_mac")
   an 20.470 &Edit.Select\ Fo&nt\.\.\.	:set guifont=*<CR>
 endif
 
@@ -785,9 +785,37 @@ inoremenu <script> 1.40 PopUp.&Paste	<SID>iPaste
 vnoremenu 1.50 PopUp.&Delete		x
 an 1.55 PopUp.-SEP2-			<Nop>
 vnoremenu 1.60 PopUp.Select\ Blockwise	<C-V>
-an 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word		vaw
-an 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line		V
-an 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block		<C-V>
+
+nnoremenu 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word	vaw
+onoremenu 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word	aw
+vnoremenu 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word	<C-C>vaw
+inoremenu 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word	<C-O>vaw
+cnoremenu 1.70 PopUp.Select\ &Word	<C-C>vaw
+
+nnoremenu 1.73 PopUp.Select\ &Sentence	vas
+onoremenu 1.73 PopUp.Select\ &Sentence	as
+vnoremenu 1.73 PopUp.Select\ &Sentence	<C-C>vas
+inoremenu 1.73 PopUp.Select\ &Sentence	<C-O>vas
+cnoremenu 1.73 PopUp.Select\ &Sentence	<C-C>vas
+
+nnoremenu 1.77 PopUp.Select\ Pa&ragraph	vap
+onoremenu 1.77 PopUp.Select\ Pa&ragraph	ap
+vnoremenu 1.77 PopUp.Select\ Pa&ragraph	<C-C>vap
+inoremenu 1.77 PopUp.Select\ Pa&ragraph	<C-O>vap
+cnoremenu 1.77 PopUp.Select\ Pa&ragraph	<C-C>vap
+
+nnoremenu 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line	V
+onoremenu 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line	<C-C>V
+vnoremenu 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line	<C-C>V
+inoremenu 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line	<C-O>V
+cnoremenu 1.80 PopUp.Select\ &Line	<C-C>V
+
+nnoremenu 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block	<C-V>
+onoremenu 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block	<C-C><C-V>
+vnoremenu 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block	<C-C><C-V>
+inoremenu 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block	<C-O><C-V>
+cnoremenu 1.90 PopUp.Select\ &Block	<C-C><C-V>
+
 noremenu  <script> <silent> 1.100 PopUp.Select\ &All	:<C-U>call <SID>SelectAll()<CR>
 inoremenu <script> <silent> 1.100 PopUp.Select\ &All	<C-O>:call <SID>SelectAll()<CR>
 cnoremenu <script> <silent> 1.100 PopUp.Select\ &All	<C-U>call <SID>SelectAll()<CR>

runtime/optwin.vim

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 " These commands create the option window.
 "
 " Maintainer:	Bram Moolenaar <Bram@vim.org>
-" Last Change:	2004 Jul 05
+" Last Change:	2004 Dec 24
 
 " If there already is an option window, jump to that one.
 if bufwinnr("option-window") > 0
@@ -667,6 +667,9 @@ call <SID>OptionL("com")
 call append("$", "formatoptions\tlist of flags that tell how automatic formatting works")
 call append("$", "\t(local to buffer)")
 call <SID>OptionL("fo")
+call append("$", "formatlistpat\tpattern to recognize a numbered list")
+call append("$", "\t(local to buffer)")
+call <SID>OptionL("flp")
 if has("insert_expand")
   call append("$", "complete\tspecifies how Insert mode completion works")
   call append("$", "\t(local to buffer)")
@@ -889,6 +892,8 @@ call append("$", "\t(global or local to buffer)")
 call <SID>BinOptionG("ar", &ar)
 call append("$", "patchmode\tkeep oldest version of a file; specifies file name extension")
 call <SID>OptionG("pm", &pm)
+call append("$", "fsync\tforcibly sync the file to disk after writing it")
+call <SID>BinOptionG("fs", &fs)
 if !has("msdos")
   call append("$", "shortname\tuse 8.3 file names")
   call append("$", "\t(local to buffer)")
@@ -923,6 +928,10 @@ call append("$", "wildcharm\tlike 'wildchar' but can also be used in a mapping")
 call append("$", " \tset wcm=" . &wcm)
 call append("$", "wildmode\tspecifies how command line completion works")
 call <SID>OptionG("wim", &wim)
+if has("wildoptions")
+  call append("$", "wildoptions\tempty or \"tagfile\" to list file name of matching tags")
+  call <SID>OptionG("wop", &wop)
+endif
 call append("$", "suffixes\tlist of file name extensions that have a lower priority")
 call <SID>OptionG("su", &su)
 if has("file_in_path")

runtime/plugin/NetrwFileHandlers.vim

@@ -2,14 +2,14 @@
 "                    netrw's browsers' x command ("eXecute launcher")
 " Author:	Charles E. Campbell, Jr.
 " Date:		Aug 31, 2004
-" Version:	3a	NOT RELEASED
+" Version:	3
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " Prevent Reloading: {{{1
 if exists("g:loaded_netrwfilehandlers") || &cp
  finish
 endif
-let g:loaded_netrwfilehandlers= "v3a"
+let g:loaded_netrwfilehandlers= "v3"
 
 " ---------------------------------------------------------------------
 " NetrwFileHandler_html: handles html when the user hits "x" when the {{{1
@@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ endfun
 fun! NetrwFileHandler_pdf(pdf)
 "  " call Dfunc("NetrwFileHandler_pdf(pdf<".a:pdf.">)")
   if executable("gs")
-   exe "silent! !gs ".a:pdf
+   exe 'silent! !gs "'.a:pdf.'"'
   else
 "   " call Dret("NetrwFileHandler_pdf 0")
    return 0
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ endfun
 fun! NetrwFileHandler_sxw(sxw)
 "  " call Dfunc("NetrwFileHandler_sxw(sxw<".a:sxw.">)")
   if executable("gs")
-   exe "silent! !gs ".a:sxw
+   exe 'silent! !gs "'.a:sxw.'"'
   else
 "   " call Dret("NetrwFileHandler_sxw 0")
    return 0
@@ -184,7 +184,7 @@ fun! NetrwFileHandler_doc(doc)
 "  " call Dfunc("NetrwFileHandler_doc(doc<".a:doc.">)")
 
   if executable("oowriter")
-   exe "silent! !oowriter ".a:doc
+   exe 'silent! !oowriter "'.a:doc.'"'
    redraw!
   else
 "   " call Dret("NetrwFileHandler_doc 0")
@@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ fun! NetrwFileHandler_sxw(sxw)
 "  " call Dfunc("NetrwFileHandler_sxw(sxw<".a:sxw.">)")
 
   if executable("oowriter")
-   exe "silent! !oowriter ".a:sxw
+   exe 'silent! !oowriter "'.a:sxw.'"'
    redraw!
   else
 "   " call Dret("NetrwFileHandler_sxw 0")
@@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ fun! NetrwFileHandler_xls(xls)
 "  " call Dfunc("NetrwFileHandler_xls(xls<".a:xls.">)")
 
   if executable("oocalc")
-   exe "silent! !oocalc ".a:xls
+   exe 'silent! !oocalc "'.a:xls.'"'
    redraw!
   else
 "   " call Dret("NetrwFileHandler_xls 0")